JP7388473B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to have a configuration in which an internal lottery is held based on the fulfillment of predetermined lottery conditions, and a bonus is awarded to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, regarding slot machines, when the start lever is operated while medals are being bet as gaming media, an internal lottery is carried out, the reels begin to rotate, and the reels stop while they are rotating. When the switch is operated, the reels stop rotating. Then, when the reel stop result corresponds to the internal lottery result, a benefit is given according to the result (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2008-295707

Here, in the above-mentioned gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The present invention has been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

The present invention
a plurality of orbiting bodies with plural kinds of patterns attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a starting operation means that, when operated, causes each of the orbiting bodies to start orbiting;
a lottery means that performs a lottery to decide whether or not to give a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
a stop operation means that stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
drive control means for causing each of the orbiting bodies to start orbiting when the start operation means is operated and for stopping the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result when the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
Certain conditions are set that are advantageous to the player.
As the lottery result by the said lottery means,
a first result in which a first pattern combination can be stopped when the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode;
a second result in which a second pattern combination different from the first pattern combination can be stopped when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode;
has
means capable of performing storage processing of specific information based on a predetermined setting trigger in the specific state;
In the specific game in the specific state, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result and first specific information corresponding to the first result is stored as the specific information, the specific state is continued. a means capable of executing the process of
Even if the first specific information is stored as the specific information, if the lottery result by the lottery means in the specific game is the second result, processing for terminating the specific state can be executed. means and
In the specific game, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the second result and second specific information corresponding to the second result is stored as the specific information, processing to continue the specific state. executable means and
Even if the second specific information is stored as the specific information, if the lottery result by the lottery means in the specific game is the first result, processing for terminating the specific state can be executed. means and
Equipped with
The predetermined setting trigger is characterized in that it occurs in a game before the specific game .

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a slot machine in one embodiment. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front door closed. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front door open. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the front door. FIG. 3 is a front view of the housing. It is a diagram showing the symbol arrangement of each reel. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between symbols and effective lines that can be visually recognized from a display window. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and benefits provided. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and benefits provided. It is a diagram for explaining an example of a winning mode. It is a diagram for explaining an example of a winning mode. It is a diagram for explaining an example of a winning mode. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control device. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing by the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows main processing by a main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows lottery processing. It is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for normal game state. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for carryover states. It is a flow chart showing reel control processing. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation order of the stop switch and the winning mode that is established. It is a flowchart which shows bonus state processing. 3 is a flowchart showing end determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of a lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for BB 1st state. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for BB 2nd state. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for BB 3rd state. It is a flowchart which shows priority setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows lottery result corresponding processing. It is a flowchart which shows advantageous area transition lottery processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing for AT lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of an AT mode lottery table. It is a figure showing an example of an advantageous section transition lottery table and an AT mode lottery table. It is a figure showing an example of a continuation rate lottery table. It is a flow chart which shows processing for AT consecutive shots. It is a figure showing an example of a stock lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus AT start process. It is a figure for explaining the outline of an instruction monitor and a section indicator. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of a press order notification effect performed on the auxiliary display section. It is a flowchart which shows the press order notification process. It is a flowchart showing winning result corresponding processing. It is a flowchart which shows the number of games management process. It is a flowchart which shows AT continuation setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows section display first processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process for advantageous area transition games. It is a figure which shows an example of a ceiling game number table. It is a flowchart which shows the section display 2nd process. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the start game and end game of an advantageous section and the display of the section display. It is a flow chart which shows production setting processing by a display control device as a sub-side control device. It is a flowchart which shows the production setting process at the time of a start. It is a flowchart which shows continuous production setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows processing for bonus AT. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the time of a full stop. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between an advantageous section and BB. It is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between an advantageous section and BB. It is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between an advantageous section and BB. 12 is a flowchart showing bonus AT start processing in Modification 1. FIG. It is a figure showing an example of a migration permission lottery table. It is a flow chart which shows processing for AT consecutive shots. It is a flowchart which shows processing for bonus AT. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining changes in the winning mode and the lottery table in Modification 2. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows processing for AT lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus AT start process. It is a flowchart showing winning result corresponding processing. (a) is a flowchart showing a winning suggestion notification process, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a pseudo winning suggestion notification lottery table. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display performance by the auxiliary display section and the stopping mode of each reel. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining changes in the winning mode and the lottery table in Modification 3. FIG. It is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between an advantageous section and BB. 12 is a flowchart showing an AT mode lottery table acquisition process in Modification 4. FIG. It is a figure showing an example of an AT mode lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows AT continuation setting processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the section display 2nd process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for advantageous area transition games. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of an AT mode lottery table. It is a figure showing an example of an AT mode lottery table. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing. It is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between an advantageous section and BB. It is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between an advantageous section and BB. 12 is a flowchart showing a second section display process in Modification 1. FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining changes in the winning mode and the lottery table in Modification 2. FIG. (a) is a flowchart showing bonus AT start processing, and (b) is a flowchart showing continuation chance processing. 12 is a flowchart showing main processing in Modification 3. 13 is a flowchart showing second section display processing in Modification 4. FIG. (a) is a part of a flowchart showing winning result corresponding processing, and (b) is a part of a flowchart showing processing for an advantageous section transition game. It is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between an advantageous section and BB. In the third embodiment, (a) is a flowchart showing the AT continuation setting process, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the next BB lottery table, and (c) is an overview of the first BB and the second BB. It is a figure shown collectively. This is a part of a flowchart showing the second section display process. It is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between an advantageous section and BB. In Modification 1, (a) is a flowchart showing AT continuation setting processing, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the next BB lottery table. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing various modifications of the next BB lottery table in Modification 2. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing processing for an advantageous section transition game in modification example 3. (a) is a flowchart showing a setting suggestion process, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a suggestion lottery table. In the fourth embodiment, (a) and (b) are diagrams for explaining changes in the winning mode and the lottery table, and (c) is a flowchart showing processing for an advantageous section transition game. It is a flowchart which shows the section display 2nd process. It is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between an advantageous section and BB. In the modified example, (a) is a flowchart showing the second section display process, (b) is a diagram for explaining an overview of the RT state, and (c) is a diagram for explaining the stop timing of the reach eye. It is a diagram.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention applied to a reel-type gaming machine, which is a type of gaming machine, and specifically a slot machine, will be described in detail based on the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and FIG. 4 is the front side. FIG. 5 is a rear view of the door 12 and a front view of the housing 11.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 includes a housing 11 forming an outer shell thereof. The casing 11 is formed into a box shape with an open front as a whole, and is attached to so-called island equipment by nailing or the like when installed in a game hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so as to be openable and closable. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a, 13b on the left side when viewed from the front, and the front door 12 is provided with a bearing portion 14a at a position corresponding to each support shaft 13a, 13b. , 14b are provided. When the support shafts 13a, 13b are inserted into the bearings 14a, 14b, the front door 12 rotates with respect to the housing 11 about the opening/closing axis extending in the vertical direction connecting the support shafts 13a, 13b. It is movably supported, and the front open side of the housing 11 can be opened or closed by rotating the front door 12. Further, the front door 12 is locked so that it cannot be opened by a locking device 20 provided on the back side thereof. A key cylinder 21 integrated with a locking device 20 is provided at the upper right end side of the front door 12, and is configured such that the locked state is released by operating a predetermined key on the key cylinder 21.

A game panel 25 is provided near the upper center of the front door 12 to inform the player of the game status. Three vertically elongated display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R are formed side by side on the game panel 25, and the inside of the slot machine 10 is visible through each of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. Note that the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 30, and a reel unit 31 constituting a variable display means is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 30. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R each formed in a cylindrical shape (annular shape). Each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is rotatably supported so that its central axis becomes the rotational axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are arranged on the same axis extending substantially horizontally, and each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponds one-to-one with each display window 26L, 26M, and 26R. . Therefore, a portion of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display window 26L, 26M, 26R, respectively. Furthermore, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed as if they were moving from top to bottom through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R.

Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly explained.

Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is configured to be driven to rotate individually, that is, independently, by driving each stepping motor. . The stepping motor is set to rotate once by applying, for example, a 500-pulse drive signal (hereinafter also referred to as excitation pulse), and this excitation pulse changes the rotational position of the stepping motor, that is, the rotational position of the reel. controlled. Further, in the reel unit 31, a reel index sensor for detecting that the reel has rotated once is installed on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. The reel index sensor outputs a detection signal to the main controller 101, which will be described later, each time it detects that the reel has made one rotation. Therefore, the main controller 101 changes the angular position of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R every rotation based on the detection signal of the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output before the detection signal is input. It can be confirmed and corrected.

A plurality of symbols serving as identification information are drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R in the long side direction (circling direction). More specifically, 20 symbols are drawn at equal intervals. Therefore, in order to switch one symbol to the next symbol at a predetermined position, it is necessary to output 25 pulses (=500 pulses/20 symbols) of excitation pulses. In addition, the main controller 101 can grasp the symbols that are visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R based on the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. Control can be performed such as stopping a predetermined symbol at a position visible from 26L, 26M, and 26R.

Next, the symbols drawn on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R will be explained.

FIG. 6 shows the symbol arrangement of the left reel 32L, middle reel 32M, and right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 20 symbols are arranged in a row on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. Also, numbers 0 to 19 are assigned corresponding to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and these numbers are symbols that can be visually recognized by the main controller 101 from the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. This is a number for recognition, and is not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, in the following explanation, the numbers will be used.

The symbols include the "Bell" symbol (for example, the 1st on the left reel 32L), the "Replay" symbol (for example, the 0th on the left reel 32L), the "Red 7" symbol (for example, the 14th on the left reel 32L), “Watermelon” symbol (e.g. 2nd on left reel 32L), “Cherry” symbol (e.g. 8th on left reel 32L), “BAR” symbol (e.g. 9th on left reel 32L), “White 7” symbol (for example, the 3rd on the left reel 32L), "Youth" symbol (for example, the 18th on the left reel 32L), "Red Shell" symbol (for example, the 4th on the left reel 32L), "White Shell" symbol (for example, the left There are 10 types (19th on reel 32L). As shown in FIG. 6, the number and arrangement order of various symbols are completely different on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Each of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R is formed so that out of 20 symbols attached to the corresponding reel, only 3 symbols can be visually recognized in their entirety. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R.

In this slot machine 10, the game results of each game are reported using combinations of a total of three symbols, one symbol for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, among the visible symbols. Since 3×3=9 symbols are visible as described above, a combination of these three symbols is, for example, by tying the upper symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R as shown in FIG. The combinations of symbols that stop on the upper line L1, the combinations of symbols that stop on the middle line L2 that connects the middle symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the lower symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. There are combinations of symbols that stop on the lower line L3. In addition, there are also combinations of symbols that stop on the downward-sloping line L4 connecting the upper symbol on the left reel 32L, the middle symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the lower symbol on the right reel 32R, the lower symbol on the left reel 32L, and the middle symbol on the middle reel 32M. There are combinations of symbols that stop on the upward-sloping line L5 connecting the upper symbols of the right reel 32R. In addition, there are also combinations of symbols that stop on the bending line L6 connecting the middle symbols of the left reel 32L, the upper symbols of the middle reel 32M, and the upper symbols of the right reel 32R. The above lines L1 to L5 are lines that form a straight line when the symbols are lined up, and the bending line L6 is a line that bends in the middle when the symbols are lined up. It should be noted that there are other combinations of symbols that stop on the bending line other than the bending line L6, but their explanation will be omitted here.

Among these lines L1 to L6, lines that are activated and lines that are not activated by medal bets are set, and when symbols stop in a predetermined combination on the activated line, that is, the activated line, When winning a prize, a bonus is given in which a predetermined number of medals as game media are paid out, or a bonus is given in which the game state is changed. On the other hand, if the symbols stop in a predetermined combination on a line that is not activated, no prize is won and the above benefits are not awarded.

In this slot machine 10, among the lines L1 to L6 mentioned above, the bending line L6 is set as the valid line. More specifically, in this slot machine 10, there are cases where the game is started after three medals are bet, and cases where the game is started when two medals are bet. When a medal is bet and the game is started, only the bent line L6 is set as a valid line, and the other lines L1 to L5 are not set as valid lines. In the following description, the bending line L6 may be referred to as an effective line ML. In addition, below, a game that starts with three medals bet is called a 3-bet game, a game that starts with two medals bet is called a 2-bet game, and a game that starts with one medal bet is called a 2-bet game. The game is also called a 1-bet game. Note that in this embodiment, a 1-bet game and a 2-bet game are not set. That is, in this embodiment, only a 3-bet game is set.

FIGS. 8 and 9 are diagrams showing the correspondence between symbol combinations that result in winnings and benefits that are awarded when winning.

The small role winnings for which medals are paid out include the 1st small role winning to the 27th small winning winning.

When the "Replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the first small winning combination is won. When the first small winning combination is achieved, 15 medals are paid out.

As shown in FIG. 10(a), when the symbols corresponding to the first minor winning combination stop on the active line ML, the "bell" symbols all stop on the upper line L1. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a small win corresponding to the bell has been won.

The “bell” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “white 7” symbol, “cherry” symbol, “red shell” symbol, or “youth” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “white 7” symbol, “white shell” on the right reel 32R When the symbol or the "youth" symbol stops on the active line ML, the second small winning combination is won. When the second small role winning is established, three medals are paid out.

As shown in FIG. 11(b), when the symbols corresponding to the second small winning combination stop on the active line ML, the "watermelon" symbols are aligned and stop on the downward-sloping line L4. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small win corresponding to the watermelon has been won.

When the "Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML, a third small prize is won. If the third small role win is established, three medals are paid out.

As shown in FIG. 11(c), when the symbols corresponding to the third minor winning combination stop on the active line ML, the "watermelon" symbols all stop on the upper line L1. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small win corresponding to the watermelon has been won.

The 4th minor role to the 27th minor role are mainly so-called missed wins in which winning is achieved when the first minor role is missed. If a winning is achieved in the 4th minor role to the 27th minor role, one medal is paid out. The 4th small role to the 27th small role are the "replay" symbol, "red 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "red shell" symbol, "white shell" symbol, "youth" symbol, or "bell" on the left reel 32L. The symbols and the "White 7" symbol on the middle reel 32M, "Cherry" symbol, "Akakai" symbol, "Youth" symbol, "Red 7" symbol, "Watermelon" symbol, "Replay" symbol, "BAR" symbol, " "Bell" symbol or "White shell" symbol, "Red 7" symbol, "White 7" symbol, "White shell" symbol, "Youth" symbol, "Watermelon" symbol, "Aka shell" symbol, "BAR" on the right reel 32R ” symbol or “Replay” symbol, and the winning is established when the corresponding combination stops on the activated line ML. As shown in Figure 8, the combinations of symbols corresponding to the 4th minor prize winning to the 27th minor prize winning are such that the "bell" symbols do not line up and stop on the straight line (L1 to L5). It is set so that it can be easily understood that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has not been achieved.

Incidentally, in the configuration in which medals are paid out based on the winnings of the first to 27th small roles described above, the medals that are paid out are a type of privilege that is given according to the result of the game. In addition, in this specification, the medals that are paid out may also be referred to as balls put out, and the ratio of the number of medals paid out (balls put out) to the number of medals inserted (bet) is also referred to as the ball payout rate. There are cases.

Prizes for which a replay benefit that allows the next game to be played without inserting medals include the 1st replay win to the 11th replay win. As shown in FIG. 9, winning symbol combinations are set for the first to eleventh regames, respectively.

In the first replay, the "Replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Red 7" symbol, "White 7" symbol, "White Shell" symbol, or "Young Man" symbol on the right reel 32R, ” When the symbol stops on the active line ML, a winning is established. As shown in FIG. 10(d), when the symbols corresponding to the first replay winning are stopped on the active line ML, the "replay" symbols are all stopped on the middle line L2. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a replay winning corresponding to the replay has been achieved.

In the second replay, the "Replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol or "Cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML. A prize will be awarded. When the symbols corresponding to the second re-game winning stop on the active line ML, the "BAR" symbols are aligned and stop on the upward-sloping line L5, as shown in FIG. 12(a), or as shown in FIG. 12(b). , the "Red 7" symbol, the "Red 7" symbol, and the "BAR" symbol stop in order from the left on the upward-rightward line L5. When the second re-game winning is established, the game state does not change, but the player changes to an advantageous notification mode, and an AT mode in which medals can be expected to be won is started. Note that the AT mode will be explained in detail later.

The third re-game and the fourth re-game are re-games for adjustment when a plurality of re-games overlap and win.

The 5th replay consists of the "Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, the "Red 7" symbol, the "White 7" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, and the "Cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R. A winning is established when the symbol, the "white shell" symbol or the "youth" symbol, stops on the active line ML. As shown in FIG. 10(e), when the symbol corresponding to the fifth re-game winning stops on the active line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the upper row of the left reel 32L and the upper row of the middle reel 32M, while the right The "Watermelon" symbol does not stop at the upper stage of the reel 32R (the "Watermelon" symbol stops at the lower stage of the right reel 32R), resulting in a so-called upper stage watermelon tenpai-off state. Also, when the symbol corresponding to the 5th re-game winning stops on the active line ML, the "Watermelon" symbol stops on the upper row of the left reel 32L and the lower row of the right reel 32R, while the "Watermelon" symbol stops on the middle row of the middle reel 32M. ” The symbol does not stop (the “Watermelon” symbol stops at the top of the middle reel 32M), resulting in a so-called right-down-down-watermelon-off state.

The 6th replay is a "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, a "white 7" symbol, a "cherry" symbol, an "aka shell" symbol, or a "youth" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R. Or, when the "red shell" symbol stops on the active line ML, a winning is established. As shown in FIG. 10(f), when the symbol corresponding to the 6th re-game winning stops on the active line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the upper row of the left reel 32L and the upper row of the right reel 32R, while the The "Watermelon" symbol does not stop at the upper stage of the reel 32M (the "Watermelon" symbol stops at the middle stage of the middle reel 32M), resulting in a so-called upper stage Watermelon Tenpai-missing stopping mode. Also, when the symbol corresponding to the 6th re-game winning stops on the active line ML, the "Watermelon" symbol stops on the upper row of the left reel 32L and the middle row of the middle reel 32M, while the "Watermelon" symbol stops on the lower row of the right reel 32R. ” The symbol does not stop (the “Watermelon” symbol stops at the top of the right reel 32R), resulting in a so-called right-down-down-watermelon-tempai stop mode.

The 7th replay consists of the "Watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "White 7" symbol, "Cherry" symbol, "Aka Shell" symbol, or "Youth" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Replay" symbol on the right reel 32R. A winning is established when and stops on the active line ML. As shown in FIG. 11(a), when the symbols corresponding to the seventh re-game winning stop on the active line ML, the "watermelon" symbols all stop on the middle line L2.

In the 8th replay, when the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol or "red shell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML. A prize will be awarded. As shown in FIG. 11(b), when the symbol corresponding to the 8th replay winning stops on the active line ML, the "replay" symbol stops on the middle row of the left reel 32L and the middle row of the middle reel 32M, while the right The "replay" symbol does not stop at the middle stage of the reel 32R (the "bell" symbol stops at the middle stage of the right reel 32R), resulting in a so-called middle stage replay out-of-temperature stopping pattern.

In the 9th replay, the "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, the "cherry" symbol, the "red shell" symbol, or the "youth" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R A winning is established when the "red 7" symbol, "white 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "cherry" symbol, "white shell" symbol, or "youth" symbol stops on the activated line ML. Also, in the 11th replay, the "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, or "red shell" symbol on the right reel 32R are valid. If the robot stops on the line ML, a prize is won. As shown in FIGS. 11(c) and 11(d), when the symbol corresponding to the 9th re-game winning or the 11th re-gaming winning stops on the active line ML, a "cherry" symbol appears in the lower row of the left reel 32L. Stop. If you win in the 9th replay or 11th replay, if you perform the stop operation aiming at the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R, the "cherry" symbol will stop on the upper row in the case of a win in the 9th replay. However, in the case of the 11th re-game winning, the "cherry" symbol stops in the middle or lower row, so it is possible to distinguish between the 9th re-gaming winning and the 11th re-gaming winning. In the 10th re-game, a prize is established when it is not possible to win a prize in the 9th re-game or the 11th re-game, that is, when there is a possibility that a prize may be missed.

More specifically, the 10th re-game winning is achieved when the 9th re-gaming is won and the 9th re-gaming winning cannot be established, and the 11th re-gaming is won. This occurs when the 11th re-game winning cannot be achieved. In other words, when the 10th replay win is established, it is difficult to distinguish whether the player has won the 9th replay or the 11th replay. In other words, in order to determine whether the player has won in the 9th replay or the 11th replay, it is necessary to operate the left reel 32L aiming at a "cherry".

State transition winnings in which only a gaming state transition is performed include a 1st BB winning, a 2nd BB winning, and a JAC winning.

When the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML, the first BB prize is won. When the first BB winning is established, the gaming state shifts to the first BB state. As shown in FIG. 11(e), when the symbols corresponding to the first BB winning stop on the active line ML, the "white 7" symbols all stop on the middle line L2.

When the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML, a 2nd BB prize is awarded. When the second BB winning is established, the gaming state shifts to the second BB state. As shown in FIG. 11(f), when the symbol corresponding to the 2nd BB winning stops on the active line ML, the "White 7" symbol stops on the middle row of the left reel 32L and the middle row of the middle reel 32M, and The "Red 7" symbol stops in the middle row.

A JAC prize can only be achieved during the first BB state or the second BB state. When the "red shell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "white 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML, a JAC prize is awarded. When the JAC winning is established, the gaming state shifts to the JAC state. As shown in FIG. 12(c), when the symbols corresponding to JAC winnings stop on the active line ML, the "white 7" symbols all stop on the upward-rightward line L5.

At the lower left side of the game panel 25, a start lever 41 is provided which is operated to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. The start lever 41 constitutes a start operation means or start operation means operated to start rotating the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, that is, start variable display of symbols. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts rotating.

On the right side of the start lever 41, button-shaped stop switches 42 to 44 are provided that are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Each of the stop switches 42 to 44 is arranged directly below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped.

Stop detection sensors 42a to 44a (FIG. 15) are connected to the stop switches 42 to 44, respectively, and the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are connected to a main control device 101, which will be described later. The main controller 101 then recognizes that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated based on detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a. Specifically, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated, the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a output LOW detection signals, and when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, The detection signal is switched from a LOW signal to a HI signal. The main controller 101 recognizes the switching of the signals and recognizes that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. When the main control device 101 recognizes that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, it controls the reels corresponding to the operated switches to stop rotating.

That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped, and when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped. In this case, the right reel 32R stops rotating. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute a stop operation means that is operated to stop the variable display of symbols based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

A medal slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. The medal slot 45 constitutes an input means for inputting game media. Further, if attention is paid to the fact that the medal slot 45 involves an operation in which the player directly inserts medals, it can be said that the medal slot 45 constitutes a direct input means for directly inputting game media.

The medals inserted through the medal slot 45 are guided to either the storage passage 47 or the discharge passage 48 by a selector 46 as passage switching means provided on the back side of the front door 12. More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is de-energized, the medals are guided to the discharge passage 48 side, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is energized, the medals are guided to the ejection passage 48 side. is guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medals guided to the storage passage 47 are guided to a hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11. On the other hand, the medals guided to the discharge passage 48 are guided from a medal discharge port 49 provided at the lower front of the front door 12 to a medal receiving tray 50 and returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 includes a storage tank 52 that stores medals, and a payout device 53 that pays out the medals to the player. The dispensing device 53 discharges the medals into an opening 48a provided in the discharging passage 48 by rotating a medal dispensing rotating plate (not shown), and dispensing the medals to the medal receiving tray 50 via the discharging passage 48. It has become. Further, on the right side of the hopper device 51, a reserve tank 54 is provided to avoid storing more than a predetermined amount of medals in the storage tank 52. A guide plate 52a is provided inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51 to discharge medals from the storage tank 52 to the reserve tank 54. Therefore, if medals are stored at a level higher than the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals will be stored in the reserve tank 54.

A button-shaped return switch 55 is provided below the medal slot 45. If the return switch 55 is operated in a situation where the medals inserted into the medal slot 45 are stuck in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically interlocked and operated, and the medals stuck in the selector 46 are removed. It is designed to be returned through a discharge port 49.

At the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R, there is a first credit input switch 56 for inputting a predetermined specific number of credited virtual medals as game media out of the prescribed number of coins for the game at a time. is provided. The specific number of coins is set depending on the progress of the game. For example, if the first credit input switch 56 is operated when the prescribed number of medals for the game is set as 3 and the specific number is set as 3, then 3 virtual medals will be issued on the condition that there are credits. If the first credit input switch 56 is operated when the prescribed number of credits is set to 2 and the specific number is set to 2, the 2 credits will be inserted on condition that there are credits. When virtual medals are inserted and the specified number of medals is set as 3 or 2, and the specific number of medals is set as 3, when the first credit input switch 56 is operated, If three virtual medals are inserted on the condition that there are credits, and the specified number is set as 3 or 2, and the specific number is set as 2, then the first When the credit input switch 56 is operated, two virtual medals are inserted on the condition that there are credits. Further, a second credit input switch 57 is provided to the left of the first credit input switch 56. The second credit input switch 57 is for inputting one virtual medal. Each credit input switch 56, 57 constitutes an input means for inputting game media together with the medal input slot 45. It should also be noted that whereas the medal slot 45 involves the player directly inserting medals, the credit input switches 56 and 57 only involve the operation of inserting virtual medals based on stored memory. For example, it can be said that it constitutes indirect input means for indirectly inputting game media. Note that this slot machine 10 is not provided with a credit insertion switch because two virtual medals are inserted.

The first credit input switch 56 has a larger operation surface that can be operated by the player than the second credit input switch 57, and the first credit input switch 56 is easier to operate than the second credit input switch 57. better than. Therefore, normally, it is assumed that the player operates the first credit input switch 56 to proceed with the game. In other words, normally, players would play a game by inserting a specific number of coins out of the specified number of coins.

To the right of the first credit input switch 56 and the second credit input switch 57, a performance switch 66 is provided which is operated when a performance occurs.

A settlement switch 59 is provided to the left of the start lever 41. In other words, this slot machine 10 has a credit function that stores and stores surplus input medals and paid-out medals at the time of winning as virtual medals until a predetermined maximum value (50 medals) is reached. When the payment switch 59 is operated under the condition that the virtual medals are stored and stored, the virtual medals are paid out from the medal outlet 49 as real medals. In this case, if we focus on the function of paying out credited virtual medals as real medals, it can be said that the settlement switch 59 constitutes a settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored game media.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R of the game panel 25, there is a credit display section 60 that displays the number of credited virtual medals, and a remaining payout number that displays the remaining number of medals that will be paid out before the BB state ends. A display section 61 and a payout number display section 62 for displaying the number of medals paid out at the time of winning are provided. Although these display units 60 to 62 are constructed of 7-segment displays, it is of course possible to replace them with liquid crystal displays or the like.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R on the game panel 25, and to the right of the payout number display section 62, there is a push order display that indicates the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and a push order display that indicates the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44. An instruction monitor 68 is provided which has a section indicator for indicating an advantageous section, which is a section in which the winning rate of the small winning combination is changed by the above, and the game can be played in an advantageous situation for the player. The instruction monitor 68 will be explained in detail later.

At the top of the front door 12, there is an upper lamp 63 that lights up or flashes as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right lamps that play various sound effects and notify the player of the game status as the game progresses. A speaker 64 and an auxiliary display section 65 for providing various information to the player are provided. The auxiliary display section 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses, and since the game using each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R can be considered to be based on the main display section, in this embodiment, It is called an auxiliary display section 65. A display control device 81 for driving the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 is provided on the back side of the auxiliary display section 65.

In the front door 12, below the gaming panel 25 and below the stop switches 42 to 44, there is a lower display section 69 in which the model name of the gaming machine is written or a predetermined display screen may be configured. It is provided. Note that the lower display section 69 may be configured as a liquid crystal display section, the lower display section 69 may be provided with an operation means for presentation, or the entire lower display section 69 may be an operation means that can be operated.

A power supply box 70 is provided inside the housing 11 to the left of the hopper device 51. The power supply box 70 accommodates a power supply device 91 therein, and also includes a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to each part including the main control device 101. The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting the error state of the slot machine 10. Further, the setting key insertion hole 73 is used by a hall manager or the like to adjust the payout of medals. That is, the winning probability (set value) of the slot machine 10 can be set by a hall manager or the like inserting a setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning it on. Note that the reset switch 72 is operated not only to reset an error state but also to clear various types of stored information in the slot machine 10 and to change the probability of winning.

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 is attached to the housing 11 for overall management of the game.

The main control device 101 is provided with a winning ratio monitor 77 for clearly indicating the ratio of gaming states that are advantageous to the player and those that are not. The role ratio monitor 77 is controlled by the main controller so that it becomes visible from the front of the gaming machine when the front door 12 is open, and becomes invisible from the front of the gaming machine when the front door 12 is closed. 101 is installed on the side facing the front of the gaming machine, and more specifically, it is installed in the board box so that the display surface of the role ratio monitor 77 can be viewed through the board box in which the main control device 101 is housed. It is accommodated. Incidentally, when the front door 12 is in the closed state, the role ratio monitor 77 cannot be seen through the gaps between the display windows 26L to 26R, and the locked state is released by operating a predetermined key on the key cylinder 21. It is impossible to check the role ratio monitor 77 unless the front door 12 is opened. Note that the role ratio monitor 77 will be explained in detail later.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be explained based on the block diagrams of FIGS. 13 and 14.

The main control device 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered on a CPU 102 which is an arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, the CPU 102 is connected to a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input/output port 104, and the like via an internal bus. The main control device 101 functions as a main board built into the slot machine 10.

On the input side of the main controller 101, there is a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R has rotated once), and a start detection sensor that detects the operation of the start lever 41. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a that individually detect the operation of each stop switch 42 to 44, inserted medal detection sensor 45a that detects medals inserted from the medal slot 45, and detects medals paid out from the hopper device 51. A payout detection sensor 51a, a first credit insertion detection sensor 56a that individually detects the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, a second credit insertion detection sensor 57a that individually detects the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, and a settlement switch 59. A settlement detection sensor 59a detects the operation of the reset switch 72, a reset detection sensor 72a detects the operation of the reset switch 72, a setting key detection sensor 73a detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turned ON, etc. Various sensors are connected, and signals from these various sensors are output to the CPU 102 via an input/output port 104.

Further, a power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via an input/output port 104 . The power supply device 91 is equipped with a power supply section 91a that supplies driving power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main control device 101, a power outage monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the state of power interruption and generates a power failure signal not only in the event of a power outage but also in the event of power interruption by the power switch 71. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage, which in this example is 12 volts DC, output from the power supply unit 91a, and determines that the power has been cut off when this drive voltage drops to, for example, less than 10 volts. It is configured so that a power outage signal is output. The power outage signal is supplied to each of the CPU 102 and the input/output port 104, and the CPU 102 executes power outage processing to be described later by recognizing this power outage signal. Further, this power outage signal is also configured to be supplied to the display control device 81.

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts, which is used as a drive voltage in a control system such as the main controller 101, even when the output voltage drops to less than 10 volts. The time during which this stabilized voltage is output is sufficient for the main controller 101 to perform power outage processing.

On the output side of the main control device 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating each reel 32L, 32M, 32R), a medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, a hopper device 51, a credit card A display section 60, a remaining payout number display section 61, a payout number display section 62, an instruction monitor 68, a role ratio monitor 77, a display control device 81, an external centralized terminal board 121 that can send information to a hall management device (not shown), etc. are included. It is connected via an output port 104.

The CPU 102 described above includes a ROM 105 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 102, and a work area that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 105. In addition to the RAM 106, which is not shown, as is well known, there are various processing circuits necessary for the slot machine 10 such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit, as well as a credit counter for counting the number of credits. Various counters are built-in. The ROM 105 and the RAM 106 constitute a main memory as a storage means, and programs for executing various processes are stored in the ROM 105 as part of the control program.

The RAM 106 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 91 even after the power to the slot machine 10 is cut off. The RAM 106 includes a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing lottery results of winning combinations, and stop information used to control the stop of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition to a stop information storage area 106b for storing game conditions such as a BB state, a state information storage area 106c for storing game states such as BB state, etc., a backup area is provided.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer at the time of power cutoff (including power cutoff due to operation of the power switch 71; the same shall apply hereinafter) when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like. Yes, when the power outage is resolved (including turning on the power by operating the power switch 71; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information in the backup area. . Writing to the backup area is executed when the power is turned off by power outage processing (see FIG. 15), and restoration of each value written to the backup area is executed during the main processing when the power is turned on.

Further, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 is configured to receive a power outage signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 91b when power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. When the power is cut off, NMI interrupt processing as power outage flag generation processing is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 14, the display control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered on a CPU 181 which is an arithmetic processing means. The CPU 181 includes a ROM 182 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 181, and a work area that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 182. It has built-in RAM 183 for securing the memory.

The display control device 81 is provided with an input/output port (not shown), and the main control device 101 is connected to the input side, and the upper lamp 63, speaker 64, and auxiliary display section 65 are connected to the output side. There is. Then, based on various commands input from the main controller 101, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 are driven and controlled. In other words, the display control device 81 serves as a sub-platform that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101 that is the main platform that centrally manages the games. That is, by providing a sub-board for audio, lamps, and displays related to indirect games, the burden on the main board is reduced.

A production switch 66 (more specifically, a production switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the production switch 66) and the like are connected to the input side of the display control device 81. Note that the various display sections 60 to 62 and 68 may also be configured to be driven and controlled by the display control device 81.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 will be explained. The processing of the CPU 102 can be roughly divided into main processing that is started upon power-on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and a power outage signal sent to the NMI terminal. There is also an NMI interrupt process that is activated in response to the input of . Below, among these processes, the processes related to the progress of the game, ie, the timer interrupt process and the main process will be explained.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing that is periodically executed by the main controller 101, and the CPU 102 of the main controller 101 generates a timer interrupt every 1.49 msec, for example.

First, in the register saving process shown in step S101, the values of all registers in the CPU 102 used in normal processing to be described later are saved to the backup area of the RAM 106. In step S102, it is checked whether the power outage flag is set, and if the power outage flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103, where power outage processing is executed.

Here, an outline of the power outage process will be explained.

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like, a power outage signal is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power outage signal is input to the main controller 101 via the NMI terminal. When the power failure signal is input, the main controller 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets a power failure flag in a power failure flag storage area provided in the RAM 106.

In the power outage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the command transmission has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, this processing is ended, the process returns to the timer interrupt processing, and the command transmission is completed. If the command transmission has been completed, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. Thereafter, the output state of the output port in the input/output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, by calculating a RAM determination value for determining whether the data in the RAM 106 is normal or not when the power outage is resolved and storing it in a backup area, subsequent access to the RAM is prohibited. After performing the above processing, the system enters an infinite loop in case the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. In addition, considering the case where the power outage flag is erroneously set due to noise or the like, for example, it is checked whether or not a power outage signal is being output until entering an infinite loop. If the power outage signal is not output, it means that the power outage has been recovered, so writing to the RAM 106 is permitted, the power outage flag is reset, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. If the power outage signal continues to be output, an infinite loop will continue. Incidentally, even under an infinite loop, it is checked whether or not a power outage signal is being output, and if the power outage signal is no longer being output, the process moves to the main process.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, if the power outage flag is not set in step S102, various processes from step S104 onwards are performed.

That is, in step S104, a watchdog timer clearing process is performed to initialize the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of a malfunction. In step S105, interrupt end declaration processing is performed to enable the next timer interrupt to be set for the CPU 102 itself. In step S106, in order to rotate each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, stepping motor control processing is performed to drive the stepping motor, which is the respective drum drive motor. In step S107, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 15) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, and the payout detection sensor 51a connected to the input/output port 104 are read, and whether the read results are normal or not. Performs sensor monitoring processing to monitor the In step S108, timer calculation processing is performed to subtract the values of each counter and timer. In step S109, a counter process is performed to output the results of counting the number of medals bet and the number of medals paid out to the external centralized terminal board 121.

In step S110, a command output process is performed to transmit various commands such as a lottery result command to be described later to the display control device 81. In step S111, segment data setting processing is performed to set segment data to be displayed on the credit display section 60, remaining payout number display section 61, payout number display section 62, and instruction monitor 68, respectively. In step S112, a segment data display process is performed in which the segment data set in the segment data setting process is supplied to each of the display units 60 to 62, 68 and corresponding numbers, symbols, etc. are displayed. In step S113, port output processing is performed to output data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port 104. In step S114, the values of each register saved in the backup area in step S101 are restored to the corresponding registers in the CPU 102. Thereafter, in step S115, interrupt permission processing is performed to permit the next timer interrupt, and this series of timer interrupt processing is ended.

Next, the main processing of the main controller 101 will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 16. The main process is executed when the power is turned on after recovery from a power outage or when the power switch 71 is turned on.

In step S201, as initialization processing for driving, the value of the stack pointer is set in the CPU 102, and an interrupt mode that allows interrupt processing is set, and then various registers for the register group in the CPU 102, I/O devices, etc. settings, etc.

When these initialization processes are completed, in step S202, it is determined whether or not the reset switch 72 is operated, more specifically, whether or not an ON signal is received from the reset detection sensor 72a. If the reset switch 72 is operated when the power is turned on this time (at the time of restoration), all data stored in the RAM 106 is erased as RAM clear processing in step S203.

If the reset switch 72 is not operated in step S202, or after the RAM clearing process in step S203 is executed, in step S204, the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turned on. Or, more specifically, it is determined whether an ON signal is received from the setting key detection sensor 73a. If the setting key is turned on when the power is turned on this time (at the time of restoration), the process proceeds to step S205, and initialization processing of advantageous section information is executed.

Here, in this slot machine 10, there are cases where a winning combination with a different profit is achieved depending on the order in which the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, and the instruction monitor 68 or the like may notify the operator of the order of operations. . Then, an advantageous section in which the operation order may be notified and a normal section in which the operation order is not notified are distinguished, and the initialization process of the advantageous section information in step S205 is performed in the advantageous section. This is a process to erase all information related to. That is, by performing the initialization process of the advantageous section information, the advantageous section is set to the normal section.

In the following step S206, winning probability setting processing is performed.

An overview of the winning probability setting process will be explained. In the slot machine 10, six levels of winning probabilities from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" are prepared in advance, and the winning probability setting process is a setting based on which winning probability the internal processing is to be executed. This is the process to do so. In the winning probability setting process, as a predetermined operation, the setting value is updated by 1 each time the reset switch 72 is operated. For example, each time the reset switch 72 is operated, the setting value is changed from "setting 1" to "setting 2". The setting values are updated as follows: → "Setting 3" → "Setting 4" → "Setting 5" → "Setting 6" → "Setting 1". Note that each set value is displayed, for example, on the credit display section 60, and the display is updated every time the set value is updated. Then, the operation of the start lever 41 with the setting key detection sensor 73a turned OFF is regarded as a setting value confirmation operation, and the setting value at that point is set as the current setting value, and the winning probability setting process ends. do. Based on the end of the winning probability setting process, the display on the credit display section 60 also ends. The setting value set in the winning probability setting process is stored and held in the RAM 106 until the next winning probability setting process is started.

If it is determined in step S204 that the setting key has not been turned on, or after performing the process in step S206, it is determined in step S207 whether or not a power outage flag is set. If the power outage flag is not set, normal processing is executed in step S208 to perform main control related to the game.

On the other hand, if the power outage flag is set in step S207, power restoration processing shown in steps S209 and subsequent steps is performed. The power restoration process is a process for restoring the state of the slot machine 10 to the state before the power was shut off. Therefore, in the power restoration process, it is first necessary to check whether the data in the RAM 106 is normal.

Therefore, in step S209, it is determined whether the RAM determination value is normal. Specifically, the checksum value of the RAM 106 is checked to see if the value is normal, that is, whether the checksum value including the RAM judgment value is 0. If the checksum value including the RAM determination value is 0, it is determined that the data in the RAM 106 is normal.

If the RAM determination value is abnormal in step S209, that is, the checksum value is not 0, it is highly likely that the data in the RAM 106 has been destroyed. Therefore, in such a case, error display processing is performed in step S210. As the error display process, first, interrupt processing is prohibited and all output ports in the input/output port 104 are cleared, thereby controlling all actuators connected to the input/output port 104 to an off state. Thereafter, an error display is displayed to notify the hall manager of the occurrence of an error, and this state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is turned on.

If it is determined in step S209 that the RAM judgment value is normal, the process advances to step S211, where the value of the stack pointer saved in the backup area is written to the stack pointer of the CPU 102, and the stack state is changed to the state before the power was cut off. restore the condition. Next, in step S212, a power restoration command is sent to the display control device 81 to inform the execution of power restoration processing. Thereafter, in step S213, the game state is stopped and automatic payment settings are saved, and in step S214, various sensors such as the start detection sensor 41a are initialized. After the above processing is completed, the power failure flag is reset in step S215, and the address is returned to the address before the power was shut off. Specifically, the process returns to the timer interrupt process described above, and the watchdog timer clear process (step S104) is executed.

Next, the normal processing executed in step S208 of the main processing will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 17. The normal process is a process for performing main control related to the game.

First, in step S301, interrupt permission processing is performed to permit the next timer interrupt. In step S302, pre-start processing is performed to enable the game. In the pre-start process, the process waits until the display control device 81 and the like complete initialization. When the initialization of the display control device 81 and the like is completed, game management processing shown in steps S303 to S312 is performed.

As a game management process, in step S303, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, random numbers used in the previous game, etc.) are cleared. After that, in step S304, a start waiting process is performed.

In the start waiting process, it is determined whether any re-game winnings were achieved in the previous game. If any re-game winning is established, an automatic insertion process is performed to automatically input virtual medals of the same number as the previous bet number, and the start waiting process is ended. Specifically, for example, when a replay prize is established in a 3-bet game, a process is performed in which three virtual medals are automatically inserted.

In addition, in the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without subtracting the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display section 60. In other words, if any re-game winning is achieved in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals he owns and without inserting medals. If any re-gaming winnings have not been established, a sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed to check whether any abnormality has occurred in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring process step S107 of the timer interrupt process, If an abnormality has occurred, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality processing is performed to notify the occurrence of an error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. If the reading result of the sensor is normal, it is determined whether the settlement switch 59 has been operated or not, and when the settlement switch 59 has been operated, a medal return process that pays out the same number of virtual medals as the credited virtual medals. I do.

After the end of the medal return process or when the payment switch 59 has not been operated, it is determined whether medals were inserted or credit input switches 56 and 57 were operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process. If either one of them is performed, a medal insertion process is performed to change the number of bets, etc., and the start waiting process is ended. Furthermore, if neither medals nor credit input switches 56 and 57 are operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is ended.

After the start waiting process ends, in step S305, it is determined whether the number of medal bets has reached a specified number. As already explained, this slot machine 10 allows only 3-bet games to be played, and only 3 is set as the prescribed number. If the number of bets has not reached the specified number, the process returns to step S304 to wait for the start, and processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process are performed.

If the number of bets has reached the specified number, a bet command including information on the number of bets for which an affirmative determination was made in step S305 is sent to the display control device 81 as a sub-side control device in step S306. Set as the output target. The command set here is output to the display control device 81 in step S110 in the timer interrupt process. The display control device 81 that has received the bet command executes processing for notification based on the bet operation (for example, notification that a game start condition has been met, notification of a lottery result in a previous game), and outputs a notification to the speaker 64. and controls the auxiliary display section 65.

After executing the process in step S306, it is determined in step S307 whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated. If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S304 to wait for the start, and processes subsequent to the sensor abnormality confirmation process are performed.

On the other hand, if the start lever 41 is operated, the configuration is such that the game can be started if the start lever 41 is operated under a situation where a specified number of medals have been bet. It means that a command has occurred. In such a case, in step S308, a valid line setting process is performed in which the combination line corresponding to the bet number is set as the valid line. That is, only the bending line L6 is set as a valid line. In step S309, the medal path switching solenoid 46a is switched to a de-energized state to prohibit bet acceptance. Thereafter, the lottery process in step S310, the reel control process in step S311, and the medal payout process in step S312 are sequentially executed, and the process returns to step S303.

Next, the lottery process in step S310 will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 18.

In step S401, a random number to be used when determining the validity of a winning combination is acquired. This slot machine 10 is configured such that when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free run counter at that time. The free run counter generates random numbers from 0 to 65535, and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the RAM 106. With this configuration, it becomes possible to obtain a random number promptly at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it becomes possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random numbers, in step S402, a lottery table for determining the validity of the winning combination is obtained. In this slot machine 10, the gaming states are roughly divided into a normal gaming state and a bonus state, and the lottery table is set for each gaming state. Note that the lottery table acquisition process will be explained in detail when explaining the gaming state, but here, the state before transition to the bonus state will be explained.

That is, if the current game is in a normal gaming state without winning a bonus such as the 1st BB or 2nd BB, a lottery table for the normal gaming state is acquired in step S402. FIG. 19 is a normal gaming state lottery table obtained in the normal gaming state. Index values IV are set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set.

After acquiring the lottery table, in step S403, the index value IV is set to 1, and in the subsequent step S404, a determination value DV used for determining the validity of the winning combination is set. In this judgment value setting process, a new judgment value DV is set by adding a point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV to the current judgment value DV. In addition, in the first judgment value setting process, the random value obtained in step S401 is set as the current judgment value DV, and the current index value IV, 1, and the corresponding point value PV are added to this random value, and a new value is set. Let it be the judgment value DV.

After that, in step S405, it is determined whether the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV is valid or not. In determining the validity of the combination, it is determined whether the determination value DV exceeds 65535. If the value exceeds 65535, in step S406, a process is executed to set the winning flag of the game result corresponding to the index value IV determined affirmatively in step S405 to the winning flag storage area 106a. For example, if the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=23, the second minor winning flag and the third minor winning flag are set in step S406. Further, if the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=25, the 1st BB winning flag and the 1st re-game winning flag are set in step S406, and the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=26. If so, the second BB winning flag and the first re-game winning flag are set in step S406.

By the way, if the set winning flag is not a winning flag indicating that the first BB was won (first BB winning flag) or a winning flag indicating that the second BB was winning (second BB winning flag), the winning flag is stored in the winning flag storage area 106a. The set winning flag is reset after the game in which the corresponding winning flag was set ends (see S303 of the normal process). On the other hand, when the winning flag is the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag, these winning flags are reset with one of the conditions being that the corresponding winning has been achieved. That is, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid over multiple games.

In a state where the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is carried over, the lottery table for the carried over state is referred to and the lottery processing of the game is performed. In the carryover state lottery table (FIG. 20), each index value IV and point value PV value are set so that the first BB and second BB will not be won.

In addition, instead of separately preparing a lottery table for carryover state, in step S406 when the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is being carried over, the winning combinations corresponding to the 1st BB and 2nd BB (reply duplicate 1st BB, repeat It may be configured such that if a winning combination is won in a combination other than the duplicate 2nd BB, the corresponding winning flag is set, and if a winning combination other than the combination corresponding to the 1st BB and 2nd BB is not won, the corresponding winning flag is not set. .

That is, for example, if the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV=25 in a state where the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, the 1st BB winning flag and the 1st replay winning flag are not set. , For example, if the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV=11 with the 1st BB winning flag carried over, the 1st minor winning flag, the 4th minor winning flag, and the 5th minor winning flag It is also possible to set a winning flag and an eighth small winning combination winning flag.

If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S405, it means that the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV has failed. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 in step S407, and in the subsequent step S408, it is determined whether there is a combination corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether the index value IV added by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index values IV set in the lottery table. If there is a target to be determined, the process returns to step S404 and the determination of the validity of the winning combination is continued. At this time, in step S404, the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV are added to the judgment value DV used for determining the validity of the previous winning combination (that is, the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, In step S405, the winning combination is determined based on the determination value DV.

By the way, when determining the validity of the winning combination using the lottery table shown in FIG. probability) is approximately 1/27.3. The probability of winning normal reply B (probability of winning when IV=2) and the probability of winning normal reply C (probability of winning when IV=3) are approximately 1 in 26.2. It is. The probability of winning chance A (probability of winning when IV = 4) is approximately 1/164, and the probability of winning chance B (probability of winning when IV = 5). is approximately 1 in 262, and the probability of winning in chance C (probability of winning when IV = 6) is approximately 1 in 16400, which means that the probability of winning in chance B is higher than that in chance C. It is set so that it is easier to win, and chance A is easier to win than chance B. The probability of winning Cherry A (probability of winning when IV=7) is about 1/107. The probability of winning Cherry B (probability of winning when IV=8) is approximately 1/215, and the probability of winning Cherry C (probability of winning when IV=9) is approximately 1/215. It is approximately 1/13100, and is set so that Cherry B is more likely to win than Cherry C, and Cherry A is easier to win than Cherry B. The probability of winning the common bell (probability of winning when IV=10) is approximately 1/6560. Forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, pinch push bell 2, middle order push bell 1, middle order push bell 2, middle reverse push bell 1, middle reverse push bell 2, reverse pinch bell 1, reverse The probability of winning Pincer Bell 2, Reverse Push Bell 1, and Reverse Push Bell 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as push order bells) (probability of winning when IV = 11 to 22) is approximately It is 1/18.2. The probability of winning a watermelon (probability of winning when IV=23) is approximately 1/219. The probability of winning the first BB with duplicate replies (probability of winning when IV=25) is approximately 1/20.1. The probability of winning the second BB with duplicate replies (probability of winning when IV=26) is approximately 1/6.7. The probability of winning either of these 1st BB of repeat duplication and 2nd BB of repeat duplication (probability of winning when IV = 25, 26) is about 1/5 in total, The winning probability is set higher than the winning probability for games, small prizes, and IV = 1 to 24). In the normal gaming state, it is set so that the duplicate one-card combination (IV=24) and JAC (IV=27) will not be won (the corresponding point value PV is set to 0). In the normal gaming state, the probability of not winning any winning combination (probability of a losing result) is zero.

In the carryover state lottery table (Fig. 20) obtained when the 1st BB or 2nd BB is won, the winning probability of the 1st BB with repeat overlap and the 2nd BB with repeat overlap corresponding to the 1st BB or 2nd BB is the normal game. Unlike the lottery table for states, other lottery probabilities are the same in the normal game state and carryover state. That is, in the lottery table for the carryover state, the probability of winning the first BB of repeat overlap and the second BB of repeat overlap (probability of winning when IV=25, 26) is zero. In the lottery table for the carryover state, the probability of not winning any of the winning combinations (probability of a losing result) is approximately 1/5.02, since the 1st BB of repeat duplication and the 2nd BB of repeat duplication are not won. be. Note that the lottery table for the normal game state and the lottery table for the carryover state are obtained according to the state in the process of step S402.

By the way, in the normal game state, excluding the increase and decrease in the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state, you can expect a decrease of about 1.92 medals per game (net increase of medals minus about 1.92 medals), and in the carryover state , excluding the increase and decrease in the first BB state and the second BB state, a decrease of about 2.52 medals can be expected per game (net increase of medals minus about 2.52 medals).

After the winning flag is set in step S406, or if it is determined in step S408 that there is no object to be judged, it means that the judgment of the winning combination has ended. In such a case, the process advances to step S409, and a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect that disables the operations of the stop switches 42 to 44 for a predetermined period.

In the following step S410, lottery result handling processing is performed. In the lottery result handling process, processing for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state according to the lottery results in steps S401 to S408, processing for notifying the winning combination, etc. are performed. The lottery result handling process will be described in detail later.

After executing the process of step S410, a lottery result command is set in step S411. Here, the lottery result command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to make it understand the result of determining whether the winning combination is correct or not. However, in the normal process, various commands such as the above lottery result command are simply set in the ring buffer, and no commands are transmitted to the display control device 81. The command is sent to the display control device 81 in the command output process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process described above.

Then, in step S412, a stop information setting process is executed to set stoppable symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the lottery result of the current game. In the stop information setting process, stop symbol information corresponding to the winning combination is set based on the winning flag set in step S406. For example, the push order bell 1 is won (won when IV = 11), and the 1st small role winning flag, 4th small role winning flag, 5th small role winning flag, and 8th small role winning flag are set. In this case, the stop symbol information is set so that the symbols corresponding to the first minor prize, fourth minor prize, fifth minor prize, and eighth minor prize can be stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition, if the watermelon is won (won when IV = 23) and the second minor role winning flag and the third minor role winning flag are set, the symbols corresponding to the second minor role and third minor role winning flag will be Stop symbol information is set on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R so that it can be stopped.

In the following step S413, when a plurality of stoppable symbol information is set in step S412, a priority setting process is executed to set the priority order. This priority setting process will be explained in detail later, but basically, if multiple roles are won among the minor roles, replays, and bonus roles, the priority order shown below is set. do. If a small role win and a bonus are won, the priority order is set so that the small role win takes priority and the bonus win is established when the small role win cannot be achieved. . When winning a re-game and a bonus, the priority order is set so that the re-game winning is established with priority.

For example, in a situation where you have won the 1st BB (the 1st BB winning flag is set and the game that won the 1st BB or the 1st BB winning has been carried over), you also win a watermelon, and you win the 1st BB. , If the stop symbol information corresponding to the 2nd minor role and 3rd minor role winning is set, the 2nd minor role and 3rd minor role winning will be established with priority over the 1st BB winning. Set priorities. In addition, in a situation where you have won the 2nd BB (a situation where the 2nd BB winning flag is set and the game that won the 2nd BB or the 2nd BB winning has been carried over), you may also win the regular reply A and win the 2nd BB. If the stop symbol information corresponding to winning, 1st re-gaming winning, and 2nd re-gaming winning is set, the priority order is set so that each re-gaming winning takes precedence over the 2nd BB winning. do.

Here, when a re-game is won, a winning combination of symbols is set so that one of the winning re-games will definitely win. In other words, if the player wins in the replay, the replay win will definitely be achieved and there will be no loss of winnings. Therefore, when stop symbol information for re-games and bonuses is set, a re-game win is always achieved in any of the set re-games, and a bonus win is never achieved. In this embodiment, the first BB and the second BB are won by winning the first BB of duplicate duplication and the second BB of duplicate duplication, and when winning the first BB of duplicate duplication and the second BB of duplicate duplication, You can win not only the second BB but also the first replay. Therefore, in a game where the first BB or the second BB is won, the first replay prize is established instead of the first BB or the second BB.

After executing the process of step S413, the section display first process is executed in step S414, and then the lottery process is ended. The first section display process is a process related to display control of the instruction monitor 68 and the hand ratio monitor 77, and this process will be explained in detail later.

Next, the reel control process in step S311 will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 21.

In the reel control process, first, a rotation effect process is performed in step S501. The rotation performance process is a process for performing a performance using reel control during the invalid period based on the results of the freeze lottery process performed in step S409. In the following step S502, a rotation start process is performed to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

In the rotation start process, it is checked whether a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reel started rotating in the previous game, and if it has not elapsed, the wait time has elapsed. Wait until If the wait time has elapsed, the wait time for the next game is reset, and motor control initialization processing is performed to set rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106. By performing such processing, acceleration processing of the stepping motor is started in the stepping motor control processing (step S106) of the timer interrupt processing, and each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R starts rotating. Therefore, even if the player bets a specified number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may not immediately start rotating. Thereafter, the process waits until each reel 32L, 32M, 32R rotates at a predetermined rotational speed, and the rotation start process ends. Furthermore, when the rotational speed of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R reaches a constant speed, the CPU 102 can generate a stop command by lighting the lamps (not shown) of each stop switch 42 to 44. Notify players, etc.

Following the rotation start process, in step S503, it is determined whether any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the process waits until one of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. If it is determined that any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S504, and it is determined whether the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether a stop command has been generated. do. If a stop command has not been issued, the process returns to step S503 and waits until one of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. If a stop command is generated, a stop command is set in step S505. Here, the stop command command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to make it understand which stop switch was operated to generate the stop command. When the stop instruction command is set, stop control processing shown in steps S506 to S512 is performed to stop the rotating reels.

In step S506, the symbol number of the reached symbol that has reached the base position (lower stage in this embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the symbol number of the reached symbol that has reached the base position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In the following step S507, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In this slot machine 10, as a stopping mode in which each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped, there is a corresponding stopping mode in which when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the reached symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is. A stopping mode in which the reels are stopped after sliding one symbol, a stopping mode in which they are stopped after sliding two symbols, a stopping mode in which they are stopped after sliding three symbols, and a stopping mode in which they are stopped after sliding four symbols. Five patterns of stopping modes are available. Therefore, in step S507, a value between 0 and 4 is calculated as the slip count based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. Thereafter, in step S508, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stopped symbol to be actually stopped at the base position. In step S509, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the reached symbol of the reel to be stopped this time is equal to the symbol number of the stopped symbol. If they are equal, reel stop processing to stop the rotation of the reel is performed in step S510. conduct. After that, in step S511, it is determined whether all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped. If all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped, a second stop information setting process is performed in step S512, and the process returns to step S503.

Here, the second stop information setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels are stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning flag and the stop roll of the stopped reel. In this slot machine 10, for example, when a win occurs when IV=11 to 22, that is, when a bell is won in the order of pressing (see FIGS. 19 and 20), the stop switch 42 that generates the stop command A second stop information setting process is performed in order to change the winning mode achieved by the order of operations in steps 44 to 44.

FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and winning modes that are established. For example, if the middle order push bell 1 is won, each of the stop switches 42 to 44 will change from left to middle to right, left to right to middle, middle to right to left, right to left to middle, or right to right. Stop information is set so that when the operation is performed in the order of middle → left, the 12th minor role winning, 13th minor role winning, or 16th minor role winning is established, and the operation is performed in the order of middle → left → right. In this case, the stop information is set so that in addition to winning the 12th minor role, winning the 13th minor role, and winning the 16th minor role, winning the first minor role can also be achieved. However, even if the stop information is set in this way, the corresponding winning may not be achieved depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

The symbol arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be briefly explained. In this slot machine 10, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be stopped after sliding up to four symbols from the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. Therefore, if the same type of symbols are arranged on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R with an interval of 4 symbols or less, the winning symbol will be activated when it becomes a winning symbol regardless of the timing of operating the stop switch 43. Can be stopped on the line. On the other hand, with regard to the symbols arranged so as to form sections separated by five or more symbols, the player needs to aim at the symbols and operate the stop switches 42 to 44 in order to stop the symbols on the active line.

An example will be explained in which the middle order push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of left → middle → right. In such a case, the stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed in order to achieve the 12th minor winning combination, the 13th minor winning combination, or the 16th minor winning combination as described above.

The 12th small role symbols on the left reel 32L are the "Red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol. Furthermore, the 13th small role symbols on the left reel 32L are a "red shell" symbol and a "white shell" symbol. The 16th small role symbols on the left reel 32L are a "replay" symbol and a "youth" symbol. On the left reel 32L, these 12th small role symbols, 13th small role symbols, and 16th minor role symbols are arranged so that the spacing between the symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time, regardless of the timing of the operation, either the 12th small role symbol, the 13th minor role symbol, or the 16th minor role symbol is placed on the active line (middle row). Stop. In this slot machine 10, when a plurality of target symbols are operated at a timing when they can be stopped, stop control is performed so as to stop the symbol with a small number of sliding pieces on the active line. That is, for example, if the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the first "Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the lower row, the fourth "Akakai" symbol (2 It is possible to stop the 16th small role symbol, the 5th "replay" symbol (3 panels) in the middle row, and the 4th "Akakai" symbol, which has the lowest number of sliding panels, in the middle row. Stop control of the left reel 32L is performed so that the left reel 32L stops. In this case, although there remains a possibility that the 13th minor role win will be achieved, the 12th minor role win and the 16th minor role win will not be achieved.

When the 13th small role symbol on the left reel 32L stops in the middle row, in the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed so that the 13th small role winning can be realized.

The 13th small role symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" symbol. On the left reel 32L, "Replay" symbols are arranged such that the interval between "Replay" symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, in this case, regardless of the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43, stop control is performed so that the "replay" symbol stops at the upper stage of the middle reel 32M.

The 13th small role symbols on the right reel 32R are the "white shellfish" symbol and the "youth" symbol. On the right reel 32R, these symbols are arranged such that the interval between the "white shell" symbol and the "youth" symbol is 5 or more symbols. In other words, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, there are cases where the 13th small role symbol "Shirakai" symbol or "Young man" symbol can be stopped in the upper row, and cases where it cannot be stopped in the upper row. be. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing when it can be stopped in the upper row, the 13th small winning combination will be won, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing when it cannot be stopped in the upper row, a so-called loss will occur. becomes.

Here, when the "Ark Shell" symbol stops in the middle row of the left reel 32L and the "Replay" symbol stops in the upper row of the middle reel 32M, as mentioned above, if you win the middle order push bell 1 and move to the 13th small In addition to cases where there is a possibility of winning a winning combination, there are also cases where there is a possibility of winning the middle order push bell 2 and winning the 15th small winning combination. That is, the 15th small role symbol in the middle order push bell 2 has the left reel 32L and middle reel 32M common to the 13th small role symbol. In the right reel 32R, the 13th small role symbol is a "white shell" symbol and a "youth" symbol, while the 15th minor symbol is a "red 7" symbol and a "white 7" symbol, which are different. ing. In particular, on the right reel 32R, the 13th small role symbol and the 15th small role symbol can be changed to the 15th minor role symbol by operating the right stop switch 44 at a timing that allows the 13th minor role symbol to stop on the active line. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing when the 15th small role symbol cannot be stopped on the active line and the 15th small role symbol can be stopped on the active line, the 13th small role symbol cannot be stopped on the active line. Each of these designs is arranged on the . Therefore, assuming that you do not know whether you have won the middle order push bell 1 or the middle order push bell 2, you can stop the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M and win the 13th small prize. Even if the 15th small winning combination is in a stopped mode with a possibility of winning, it is not possible to aim for it and win.

Next, an example will be explained in which the middle order push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of middle → left → right. In such a case, the stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed in order to achieve the first minor prize win, the 12th minor prize win, the 13th minor prize win, or the 16th minor prize win.

Here, in the present embodiment, in the priority setting process (step S413) of the lottery process (FIG. 18), when the winning flags of a plurality of small roles are set, the priority order is set as symbol number priority control and number priority control. Its priority is set based on either control or control. In other words, as mentioned above, for example, if a bonus and a small role (1st minor role to 27th minor role where medal payout may occur) are won at the same time, the winning of the minor role will be prioritized. If a bonus and a re-game are won at the same time, the re-game is set to win preferentially. On the other hand, if multiple minor prizes are won over and over again, the minor prizes that have the same number of medals paid out as a bonus at the time of winning are divided into groups, and are treated as winning symbols for each group. Symbol number priority control is set so that small roles in groups with a large number of symbols attached are prioritized to win, and small roles in groups with a large number of medals paid out as a bonus when winning a prize are prioritized. The priority order is set by one of the following controls: number-of-sheets priority control, which is set so that the following holds true.

For example, the cases of winning the first minor role, winning the 12th minor role, winning the 13th minor role, and winning the 16th minor role associated with the operation order of middle → left → right in the middle order push bell 1 will be explained. When the first minor role winning is established, 15 medals are paid out, whereas when the 12th minor role winning, the 13th minor role winning, or the 16th minor role winning is established, one medal is paid out. In this case, the small roles that have the same number of medals paid out as a bonus when winning a prize are divided into groups: the first group (first small role) in which 15 medals are paid out, and the first group (first small role) in which 1 medal is paid out. The second group (12th small role, 13th small role, and 16th small role). In the symbol number priority control, for example, the winning symbols of the first group on the middle reel 32M (the first small winning symbol on the middle reel 32M) are "replay" symbols, and there are four of them on the middle reel 32M. , the winning symbols of the second group on the middle reel 32M (the 12th minor symbol, the 13th minor symbol, and the 16th minor symbol on the middle reel 32M) are the "replay" symbol and the "red shell" symbol, and There are five winning symbols in 32M, and since there are more winning symbols in the second group, it is set so that the winning symbols in the second group are established preferentially. On the other hand, in the number priority control, it is set so that the small win of the first group with a large number of medals paid out is achieved preferentially. In other words, when the middle order push bell 1 is operated in the order of middle → left → right, if symbol number priority control is applied, the 12th minor role winning, 13th minor winning winning, or 16th minor winning winning will be In contrast, when number priority control is applied, control is performed so that the first small winning combination is established.

When the middle order push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of middle → left → right, which corresponds to the first minor role, when symbol number priority control is applied, The first small role symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, the 12th minor symbol and the 13th minor symbol are "replay" symbols, and the 16th minor symbol is a "white 7" symbol. In this case, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated for the first time, if it is possible to stop the "Bell" symbol and the "Replay" symbol or the "White 7" symbol on the active line (upper row) at the same time. , the stop control is performed so that the "replay" symbol or the "white 7" symbol is given priority and stopped on the active line. The "Replay" symbol and the "White 7" symbol are arranged so that the spacing between the symbols is 4 or less, so regardless of the operation timing, the 12th minor symbol and the 13th minor symbol are on the active line. Either the symbol or the 16th small role symbol stops. Then, as described above, the remaining left reel 32L and right reel 32R are controlled to stop so as to win the maximum number of small winning combinations that can be won in relation to the symbols that have already stopped. In other words, if the symbol number priority control is applied when the middle order push bell 1 is won, even if the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, there is no room for winning the 1st minor prize, and the 12th minor prize winning, Either the 13th small role winning or the 16th small role winning will be established.

On the other hand, if the middle order push bell 1 is won and each stop switch 42 to 44 is operated in the order of middle → left → right, which corresponds to the first small winning combination, number priority control is applied. In this case, if the middle stop switch 43 is operated for the first time, it is possible to stop the "bell" symbol and the "replay" symbol or the "white 7" symbol on the active line (upper row) at the same time. For example, stop control is performed so that the "bell" symbol, which is the first small winning symbol, is prioritized and stopped on the active line. Since the "bell" symbols are arranged so that the spacing between the symbols is 4 or less, the first small winning symbol stops on the active line regardless of the timing of its operation. Regarding the first small role, not only the middle reel 32M, but also the left reel 32L and right reel 32R are arranged so that the spacing between symbols is 4 or less, so regardless of the operation timing, the active line It is possible to stop the first small winning symbol. Therefore, when the middle order push bell 1 is won and the player operates in the order of middle → left → right, if number priority control is applied, the first small winning combination is achieved regardless of the operation timing.

Not limited to the above-mentioned middle order push bell 1, but for each push order bell, in the operation order corresponding to the first minor role, not only the first minor role but also the 4th minor role to the 27th minor role that pays out one medal. A plurality of are set (Fig. 22). And, no matter which order bell is pressed, in the operation order corresponding to the first minor combination, the number of winning symbols in a group different from the first minor combination is set to be greater.

In this embodiment, in the normal game state and the carryover state of the first BB to the second BB, symbol number priority control is basically applied and the priority order between each small role is set. In other words, in the normal game state or the carryover state between the 1st BB and the 2nd BB, even if the order of operations at the time of winning the push order bell matches the winning of the first minor prize with a large number of payout medals, the symbol number priority control Winnings of the 4th minor role to the 27th minor role, which are the other 1 medal payout, are established with priority instead of the 1st minor role.

Incidentally, when the common bell is won, the first minor winning flag is set, and the other 4th minor winning to 27th minor winning flags, which are the payouts of one medal, are not set. Therefore, in the case where the common bell is won, even if symbol number priority control is applied, the first minor winning combination is achieved regardless of the operation order and operation timing.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, if it is determined in step S511 that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, a payout determination process is performed in step S513. The payout determination process is a process that sets the number of medals to be paid out, with one condition being that the winning symbol combinations are lined up on the active line. In the payout determination process, the combination of symbols formed on the active line is derived from the symbol numbers of the stopped symbols stopped at the bottom of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and it is determined whether or not a winning has been achieved on the active line. judge. If the winning combination is established, it is further determined whether the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. When the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning combination and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination are set in the payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106. On the other hand, if the winning combination does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality processing is performed to notify the occurrence of an error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After performing the payout determination process, a bonus status process is executed in step S514. The bonus state processing includes processing for shifting to a bonus state such as a first BB state or a second BB state based on the winning result. The bonus state processing will be explained in detail later. In the following step S515, winning result corresponding processing is performed. In the winning result corresponding process, processing for changing the display mode, etc. is performed based on the winning result. The winning result corresponding process will be explained in detail later.

After performing the winning result corresponding process, a second section display process is executed in step S516. The second section display process is a process related to display control of the instruction monitor 68, and this process will be described in detail later. Thereafter, in step S517, a winning result command is set to cause the display control device 81 to grasp the winning combination in the current game, and the reel control process is ended.

Next, an outline of the medal payout process in step S312 will be explained.

In the medal payout process, it is determined whether the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is 0 or not. If the number of payouts is 0, it means that it has been determined in the previous payout determination process that the small winning combination has not been won. In such a case, based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process, it is determined whether any of the 1st re-game winning to 11th re-gaming winning has been achieved. If any re-play winnings have not been achieved, the medal payout process is immediately terminated, and if any re-play winnings have been achieved, a re-play setting process is performed to set the gaming mode to re-play mode. , ends the medal payout process. In addition, in the start waiting process (step S304) explained earlier, when it is determined that the current gaming mode is the re-gaming mode, automatic input processing is performed.

On the other hand, if the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the number of payouts are paid out, and the medal payout process is ended. Specifically, regarding the payout of medals, if the count value of the credit counter has not reached the upper limit (the number of stored medals is 50), the number of payouts is added to the count value of the credit counter, and the value after the addition is It is displayed on the credit display section 60. In addition, when the count value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit, or when the count value reaches the upper limit while adding the number of payouts, the medal payout rotary plate is driven and the medals are ejected from the hopper device 51. The medals are paid out to the medal receiving tray 50 via the outlet 49. In addition, in the medal payout process, processing is also performed to change the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display section 62 in accordance with the payout of medals. In addition, when the current gaming state is the BB state, the number of payouts is subtracted from the value of the remaining payout number counter, which will be described later, and the remaining number of payouts displayed on the remaining payout number display section 61 is subtracted. .

<Bonus status processing>
The bonus status process in step S514 in the reel control process will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 23. As described above, the bonus status process is a process activated between the payout determination process (step S513) and the winning result corresponding process (step S515) in the reel control process (FIG. 21).

First, in step S601, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a bonus state, that is, whether the current gaming state is the first BB state or the second BB state. Whether the state is in the first BB state or the second BB state depends on the presence or absence of the first BB state flag and the second BB state flag, which are set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 when transitioning to the first BB state or the second BB state. Identifiable. That is, in step S601, if neither the first BB state flag nor the second BB state flag is set, it is determined that the state is neither the first BB state nor the second BB state, and the process proceeds to step S602.

In step S602, it is determined whether or not the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set, and one of the BBs has been won. If none of the BB winning flags are set, the bonus state processing is ended as is. If any BB winning flag is set, the process advances to step S603.

In step S603, it is determined whether the first BB winning or the second BB winning has been achieved. If any BB winning has not been achieved, the process proceeds to step S604, and it is determined whether the first BB carryover flag or the second BB carryover flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The 1st BB carryover flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to understand that the 1st BB winning is being carried over, and the 2nd BB carryover flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to know that the 2nd BB winning is being carried over. This is a flag for understanding. That is, in this embodiment, information on carrying over the first BB winning and information on carrying over the second BB winning are respectively stored, and the CPU 102 can grasp which BB winning is carried over. It has become. If any of the BB carryover flags is set, the bonus state processing is immediately ended.

If none of the BB carryover flags are set, in step S605, processing is executed to set the BB carryover flag corresponding to the winning BB in the various flag storage areas 106d, and then the bonus state processing is ended. More specifically, in step S605, if the first BB winning flag is set, the first BB carryover flag is set, and if the second BB winning flag is set, the second BB carryover flag is set.

If it is determined in step S603 that the first BB winning or the second BB winning has been achieved, the process advances to step S606. In step S606, a process of inputting "140" into the BB counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The BB counter is a counter for defining the upper limit number of payouts in each BB state. That is, by inputting "140" into the BB counter in step S606, the first BB state and the second BB state are set to end when 140 or more medals are paid out. In step S607, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag are cleared.

Then, in step S608, the carryover flag corresponding to the BB that won this time is cleared. That is, when the 1st BB winning is established, if the 1st BB carryover flag is set, the 1st BB carryover flag is cleared, and if the 1st BB carryover flag is not set, that state is maintained. . In addition, when a 2nd BB win is established, if the 2nd BB carryover flag is set, the 2nd BB carryover flag is cleared, and if the 2nd BB carryover flag is not set, that state is maintained. . Note that the case where the 1st BB carryover flag and the 2nd BB carryover flag are set means that the winning game was not achieved in the winning game of the 1st BB or 2nd BB, and the 1st BB carryover flag and the 2nd BB carryover flag are set. The case where it is not set is the case where the prize is established in the winning game of the 1st BB or the 2nd BB.

Thereafter, in step S609, the BB status flag corresponding to the BB that won this time is set in the various flag storage area 106d. That is, when the first BB winning is achieved, the first BB state flag is set, and when the second BB winning is achieved, the second BB state flag is set. As a result, from the next game onwards, an affirmative determination will be made in step S601.

In the subsequent step S610, a process is executed to set the corresponding BB winning game flag in the various flag storage areas 106d. That is, when the first BB winning is established, the first BB winning game flag is set, and when the second BB winning is established, the second BB winning game flag is set. Each BB winning game flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that a BB winning has been achieved in the current game, and is a flag that is cleared at the end of one game (at the start of the next game). After executing the process of step S610, the bonus state process ends.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S601 and the state is the first BB state or the second BB state, the process proceeds to step S611, and an end determination process is performed as a process during the first BB state or the second BB state.

Here, the end determination process in step S611 will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 24.

In step S701, it is determined whether the current bonus state is the JAC state by determining whether or not the JAC state flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The JAC state is a state in which the lottery result of the game becomes a JAC winning (winning occurs when IV = 27), and the JAC state shifts when the JAC winning is established, and the small prize is won a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 8 times). This state continues until a winning combination is achieved or the game is played a predetermined number of times (12 times in this embodiment).

If it is not the JAC state, the JAC winning flag is set in step S702, and it is determined whether or not the JAC winning state is occurring. If the JAC has been won, the process advances to step S703.

In step S703, it is determined whether or not a JAC prize has been achieved as a result of the current game. If the JAC winning is not established, the process proceeds to step S704, and it is determined whether or not the JAC carryover flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The JAC carryover flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the JAC winning is carried over. That is, in this embodiment, not only the 1st BB win and the 2nd BB win, which trigger the transition to the bonus state, but also the JAC win, which triggers the transition of the internal state during the bonus state, can be carried over to the next game. It is said that If the JAC carryover flag is not set, processing for setting the JAC carryover flag is executed in step S705.

If it is determined in step S703 that the JAC prize has been won, the process advances to step S706. In step S706, a process is executed in which "8" is input to the first JAC counter provided in the various counter areas 106e, and "12" is input to the second JAC counter. The JAC first counter is a counter for defining the upper limit number of small winnings in the JAC state, and the JAC second counter is a counter for defining the upper limit number of games in the JAC state. In other words, the JAC state is set to end when the player wins 8 small prizes or plays the game 12 times. Thereafter, in step S707, the JAC winning flag is cleared, in step S708, a process of clearing the JAC carryover flag is executed, and in step S709, the JAC status flag is set. Note that if the JAC carryover flag is not set in step S708, that state is maintained. As a result, the internal state in the bonus state shifts to the JAC state, and an affirmative determination is made in the next step S701.

If it is determined in step S702 that the JAC has not been won, if it is determined in step S704 that the JAC carryover flag is set, or after executing the process in step S705 or step S709, the process advances to step S710. . In step S710, it is determined whether or not a small winning combination has been achieved in the current game. If a small win has been achieved, a process is executed to subtract the number of medals paid out based on the current win from the BB counter in step S711. Note that the case where it is determined in step S710 that a small winning combination has been achieved is a case where a small winning combination has been won in a situation that is not in the JAC state.

If it is determined in step S701 that the device is in the JAC state, the process advances to step S712. In step S712, it is determined whether or not a small winning combination has been achieved in the current game. If a small winning combination has been won, 1 is subtracted from the JAC first counter in step S713, and the number of medals paid out based on the current winning is subtracted from the BB counter in step S714. If it is determined in step S712 that a small winning combination has not been established, or after executing the process in step S714, a process to subtract 1 from the JAC second counter is executed in step S715. Then, in step S716, it is determined whether the JAC first counter or the JAC second counter is 0. If either counter is 0, the other JAC counter is also cleared to 0 in step S717, and a process of clearing the JAC status flag is executed. This ends the JAC state, and a negative determination is made in the next step S701.

If a negative determination is made in step S710 or step S716, or after executing the process in step S711 or step S717, the process advances to step S718. In step S718, it is determined whether the BB counter is less than or equal to 0 and the condition for ending the bonus state is satisfied. If the termination condition is not met, the termination determination process is terminated.

If the termination condition is satisfied, the staying BB status flag is cleared in step S719. Thereafter, in step S720, a process is executed to set a BB end game flag corresponding to the BB state to be ended this time in the various flag storage areas 106d, and then the end determination process is ended. That is, when ending the first BB state, the first BB ending game flag is set, and when ending the second BB state, the second BB ending game flag is set. Each BB end game flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the BB state has been established in the current game, and is a flag that is cleared at the end of one game (at the start of the next game).

That is, in this embodiment, the bonus state includes a state in which the JAC is not won (BB first state), a state in which the JAC is won but before the JAC is won (BB second state), and a state in which the JAC is not won (BB second state). state (BB third state), and when it moves to the bonus state, it moves from the BB first state to the BB second state, or moves to the BB third state without passing through the BB second state. When the third state ends, the configuration shifts to the BB first state. When the maximum number of payouts in the BB state is reached, the BB state ends regardless of whether it is in the BB first state to the BB third state. That is, even if the upper limit number of wins or the upper limit number of games for a small winning combination has not been reached in the JAC state, the BB state ends.

As a result of the transition of the internal state during the bonus state, the lottery probability of each game during the bonus state changes. Here, the lottery table acquisition process performed in the lottery process (FIG. 18) of each game will be described based on the flowchart of FIG. 25. The lottery table acquisition process is a process performed in step S402 in the lottery process.

The presence or absence of the BB status flag is determined in step S801, and if it is not set, the presence or absence of the BB carryover flag is determined in step S802. If neither the BB status flag nor the BB carryover flag is set, it is a normal gaming state, and in this case, a lottery table for normal gaming state is acquired in step S803, and then the main acquisition process is ended. In addition, if the BB carryover flag is set even if the BB status flag is not set, it means that one of the BB carryover states is in effect.In this case, after acquiring the carryover state lottery table in step S804, The main acquisition process ends.

In the BB state, an affirmative determination is made in step S801, and the process advances to step S805. In step S805, it is determined whether the JAC carryover flag is set. If the JAC carryover flag is set, it is the BB second state, and in this case, the lottery table for the BB second state is acquired in step S806, and then the main acquisition process is ended. If the JAC carryover flag is not set, it is determined in step S807 whether the JAC status flag is set. If neither the JAC carryover flag nor the JAC state flag is set, it is the BB first state, and in this case, the lottery table for the BB first state is acquired in step S808, and then the main acquisition process is ended. If the JAC state flag is set, it is the BB third state, and in this case, the lottery table for the BB third state is acquired in step S809, and then the main acquisition process is ended.

These BB first state lottery table to BB third state lottery table will be explained based on FIGS. 26 to 28. FIG. 26 shows an example of a lottery table for BB first state, FIG. 27 shows an example of a lottery table for BB second state, and FIG. 28 shows an example of a lottery table for BB third state.

In the BB first state, the probability of winning JAC (probability of winning when IV=27) is approximately 1/3.0. In addition, the probability of winning the common bell (the probability of winning when IV = 10), the probability of winning the push order bell (the probability of winning when IV = 11 to 22), the probability of winning watermelon ( The probability of winning when IV = 23) is the same as in the normal game state and carryover state, with the common bell being about 1/6560, and the number of keys in the order of pressing being about 1.5 in total. 1, and watermelon is about 1/219th. In the BB first state, the point value PV of index value IV = 1 to 9, 24 to 26 is set to 0, and various replays, duplicate 1-card combinations, repeat duplicate 1st BB, repeat duplicate 2nd BB are set to 0. will not be elected. Incidentally, in the BB first state, settings are made so that there will be no out-of-range result. In the BB first state, a decrease of about 2.92 medals per game can be expected (net increase of medals minus about 2.92 medals).

As mentioned above, when the JAC is won in the BB first state and the JAC win is carried over, the state shifts to the BB second state. In the BB second state, the probability of winning the common bell, push order bell, and watermelon is the same as in the BB first state, but it is set so that it can be won in each replay, and any The probability of winning the replay (probability of winning when IV=1 to 9) is approximately 1/3.0. In other words, in the BB second state, the point value PV for the JAC win in the BB first state is allocated to the point value PV for the replay win, and there will be no losing result even in the BB second state. It is set as follows. In other words, in the BB second state, there is no loss result, and since small winnings and replays are controlled so that winnings are established with priority over JAC, which is a type of bonus, basically, If a JAC prize cannot be established and a JAC prize is not established in a game in which a JAC prize is won in the BB first state, the bonus state ends without a JAC prize established.

In this embodiment, when the push order bell is won in the BB second state, if the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is the operation order associated with the first minor prize winning, the first minor prize winning is established. become able to do so.

Here, as mentioned above, when multiple winnings of small roles occur, the priority order is set based on the symbol number priority control, and the priority order is set based on the number number priority control. In the normal game state and carryover state, the priority order is basically set by symbol number priority control.

More specifically, in the priority setting process of step S413 in the lottery process (FIG. 18), as shown in the flowchart of FIG. The priority order is set based on symbol number priority control. Therefore, when the push order bell is won, even if the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 corresponds to the first minor prize winning, the fourth minor prize is the group in which one medal is paid out. Winning the prize to the 27th minor role will take precedence, and the 1st minor role winning will not occur.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S901 that the JAC carryover flag is set, a priority order is set based on sheet number priority control in step S903. Therefore, when the push order bell is won, if the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is the operation order corresponding to the first minor prize winning, the first minor prize winning is the group in which 15 medals are paid out. is established with priority over the 4th minor role winning to the 27th minor role winning where one medal is paid out, and the 1st minor role winning is established.

After executing the processing in step S902 or step S903, other priority setting processing is performed in step S904, and then the main setting processing ends. In step S904, priority settings are made between bonuses, small winning combinations, and replays. These priorities are as described above, and the small winning combination takes precedence over the bonus, and the replay takes precedence over the small winning combination, and winnings are established.

In this way, in the BB first state, by avoiding the JAC winning due to the JAC winning, the BB second state is reached, and it becomes possible to establish the first minor winning when the push order bell is won. In the BB second state, a decrease of about 1.15 medals per game can be expected (net increase minus about 1.15 medals).

On the other hand, by establishing a JAC prize in the game in which the JAC prize was won in the BB first state, the state shifts to the BB third state. In the BB 3rd state, the winning probability of the common bell (probability of winning when IV = 10) is set to approximately 1 in 8.9, which is higher than in the BB 1st and BB 2nd states. It is set to be. On the other hand, in the BB third state, the point value PV of the index value IV=11 to 22 is set to 0, and it is set so that the push order bell will not be won. In addition, in the BB third state, the point values PV of the index values IV=1 to 9 and 25 to 27 are also set to 0, and are set so that the winning combinations corresponding to these are not won. In the BB third state, the probability of a losing result in which none of the winning combinations is won is approximately 1/5.7. In the BB third state, a decrease of about 0.66 medals per game can be expected (net increase of medals minus about 0.66 medals).

As mentioned above, if the common bell is won, the first small winning prize, which is 15 coins paid out, is established regardless of the order in which the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. That is, in the BB third state, the probability of winning the first small winning combination is approximately 1/8.9. On the other hand, in the BB second state, even if the push order bell is won, the operation order is the one operation order associated with the first minor combination out of six operation orders. Unless it matches the above, the first minor prize cannot be achieved. In this case, if there is a probability of about 1.5 of winning the push order bell, there will be a probability of 1/6 of winning the first small role, and a probability of about 1/9.0 of winning the first prize. A small role prize will be established. In other words, the BB third state can be said to be a state in which the main first minor winning combination, which is an opportunity to increase medals, is more likely to occur than in other states.

However, in the BB second state, notification of the operation order associated with the first small prize winning among the operation orders of the press order bell (press order notification) may be performed. In this case, in the BB second state, it is possible to win the first small winning combination with about 1.5 times. In addition, if the push order is announced in the BB second state and it becomes possible to win the first small prize when the push order bell is won, an increase of approximately 7.91 medals per game can be expected (net increase in medals). (approximately 7.91 medals), we can expect a large increase in medals. Hereinafter, the gameplay using the press order notification will be explained.

<Lottery result handling process>
First, the lottery result handling process performed in step S410 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 30. The lottery result handling process is a process that is carried out after the lottery process for each game is performed, and is performed in AT mode (assist time mode, navigation mode, specific This is a process for performing a lottery for transition to state).

More specifically, first, in step S1001, it is determined whether an advantageous section flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. As mentioned above, in this slot machine 10, regarding the occurrence of press order notification, etc., an advantageous section where press order notification etc. can occur and a normal section where it cannot occur are set. The advantageous section flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to understand that the current game is an advantageous section, and is a flag that is set based on the transition to the advantageous section, and cleared based on the transition to the normal section. It is.

If the advantageous section flag is not set, it means that the current game is a normal section, and in this case, an advantageous section transition lottery process is executed in step S1002.

In the advantageous section shift lottery process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 31, the lottery result of the current game is grasped in step S1101. Then, in step S1102, an advantageous section transition lottery table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. As shown in FIG. 34, in the advantageous section transfer lottery table, the transfer rate to the advantageous section (probability of winning the advantageous section transfer lottery) is set according to the lottery result of each game. As shown in FIG. 34, the triggers for the lottery to move to the advantageous section are normal reply A, normal reply B, normal reply C, chance item A, chance item B, chance item C, cherry A, cherry B, Cherry C, common bell, push order bell, watermelon, duplicate 1-card combination, repeat duplicate 1st BB, repeat duplicate 2nd BB, and JAC are set. That is, in the normal game state, the carryover state, and the BB 1st to BB 3rd states, all possible winning results are set as triggers for the lottery to move to the advantageous section.

After acquiring the lottery table in step S1102, a process of acquiring random numbers for advantageous section transition lottery is executed in step S1103. As the random number for advantageous section transition lottery, dedicated counters in various counter areas 106e are used, and the dedicated counters are updated at a predetermined period, and in step S1103, the latest updated value of the counters is acquired. Then, in step S1104, an advantageous section transfer lottery is executed, and in step S1105, it is determined whether or not the transfer lottery has been won. If the transfer lottery has not been won, the advantageous section transfer lottery process is directly terminated. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the lottery table is set so that no matter which trigger is used, there is a 100% probability of winning the advantageous section transfer lottery. In this case, if it is determined that the game result ascertained in step S1101 is the trigger for the transition lottery (not a losing result), it is also possible to omit the processing of steps S1102 to S1105.

If it is determined in step S1105 that the transition lottery has been won, in step S1106, a process is executed to set an advantageous section winning game flag in the various flag storage areas 106d, and then the advantageous section transition lottery process is ended. . The advantageous section winning game flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section has been won in the current game.

Returning to the description of the lottery result handling process, if it is determined in step S1001 that the advantageous section flag is set, or after the advantageous section transfer lottery process is executed in step S1002, the process advances to step S1003. In step S1003, it is determined whether the AT mode winning flag or the AT mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The AT mode winning flag is a flag that is set when the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is won, and the AT mode flag is a flag that is set when shifting to the AT mode. That is, in step S1003, it is determined whether the situation is such that the transition to the AT mode has already been determined or the transition has already been completed. If none of the flags is set in step S1003 and the transition to AT mode has not yet been determined, AT lottery processing is executed in step S1004. On the other hand, if any of the flags is set in step S1003, AT consecutive hits processing is executed in step S1005.

<AT lottery processing>
First, the AT lottery process in step S1004 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 32.

First, in step S1201, it is determined whether the vehicle is in the BB state by determining whether any BB state flag is set. If it is in the BB state, the AT lottery process is immediately ended. That is, in the present embodiment, in the first BB state and the second BB state, a lottery for transition to the AT mode is not performed.

If it is not the BB state, the lottery result of the current game is grasped in step S1202. Then, in step S1203, processing for acquiring an AT mode lottery table is executed.

In the AT mode lottery table acquisition process, a lottery table corresponding to the current situation is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105. That is, as shown in FIG. 33, it is determined in step S1301 whether the advantageous section flag is set. If the advantageous section flag is not set and it is a normal section, the AT mode lottery table for the normal section is acquired in step S1302, and then the main acquisition process is ended.

If it is an advantageous section, it is determined in step S1303 whether a CZ mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. In this embodiment, the normal mode and the CZ mode are provided as states in the advantageous section and before winning the AT mode transition lottery, and the CZ mode is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery than the normal mode. set as the mode. The CZ mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to understand that the current mode is the CZ mode, and is set when transitioning to the CZ mode.

If the CZ mode flag is not set in the advantageous section where the AT lottery process is performed, it means that the current mode is the normal mode. In this case, in step S1304, the AT mode lottery table for normal mode is acquired, and then the main acquisition process is ended. If the CZ mode flag is set in step S1303, it means that the current mode is the CZ mode. In this case, in step S1305, the AT mode lottery table for CZ mode is acquired, and then the main acquisition process is ended.

As shown in FIG. 34, each of these AT mode lottery tables has a higher probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery in the order of AT mode lottery table for normal section → AT mode lottery table for normal mode → AT mode lottery table for CZ mode. The AT mode lottery table for the normal section has the lowest probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery, and the AT mode lottery table for CZ mode has the highest probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery. ing. More specifically, in the normal section, only Cherry C and Watermelon are set as trigger results that can win the AT mode transition lottery, and other lottery results are set so as not to win the AT mode transition lottery. On the other hand, in the advantageous section, each lottery result except the common bell, push order bell, duplicate 1-card combination, rep duplicate 1st BB, rep duplicate 2nd BB, and JAC is a trigger result that can win the AT mode transition lottery. It is set. Then, for example, it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery for chance item B than chance item A, and it is even easier to win the AT mode transition lottery for chance item C than chance item B. It is set such that the lower the winning probability (appearance rate) as a lottery result of the game, the easier it is to win the AT mode transition lottery. In addition, regarding normal reply A and cherry A, the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery differs depending on the setting value set in the winning probability setting process (step S206), and settings are made to increase the ball payout rate. It is set so that the higher the value (the higher the set value), the easier it is to win the AT mode transition lottery.

In addition, in the normal section, the AT mode transition lottery may be performed even with these common bells and push order bells, and the game results that trigger the AT mode transition lottery are not limited to those described above. For example, the superiority of the CZ mode may be ensured by having different types of game results that trigger the AT mode transition lottery between the normal mode and the CZ mode; in this case, the type of game results that trigger the AT mode transition lottery It is preferable that there are more types of results in the CZ mode. Furthermore, in this case, the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery itself may be the same in the normal mode and the CZ mode. There are multiple CZ modes, and each CZ mode is different, such as in one CZ mode, it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery on chance, and in other CZ modes, it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery on cherry. An AT mode transition lottery table may be set.

Returning to the explanation of the AT lottery process, after acquiring the AT mode transition lottery table in step S1203, the AT mode transition lottery is executed in step S1204. Note that in the AT mode transition lottery, random numbers for lottery are obtained from various counter areas 106e, and the lottery is performed using the random numbers, as in the advantageous section transition lottery. The configuration for such a lottery is the same for other lotteries described below, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

In step S1205, it is determined whether the lottery for transition to AT mode has been won. If the AT mode transition lottery is won, it is determined in step S1206 whether the advantageous section flag is set. If the advantageous section flag is not set and the AT mode transition lottery in the normal section is won, processing for setting the advantageous section winning game flag is executed in step S1207. If the advantageous section flag is set in step S1206, or after the advantageous section winning game flag is set in step S1207, a process of setting the AT mode winning flag is executed in step S1208.

In the following step S1209, a continuation rate lottery process is executed to set the continuation rate of the current AT mode. In this embodiment, a continuation lottery is held at a predetermined determination trigger during AT mode, and if the continuation lottery is won, the AT mode continues, and if the continuation lottery is not won, the AT mode ends. The configuration is such that there may be cases where this is the case. The continuation rate lottery process in step S1209 is a process for determining the probability of winning the continuation lottery. In the continuation rate lottery process, the selected continuation rate is set to vary depending on the game result that triggered the current AT mode shift winning. In this embodiment, a 60% continuation mode, a 70% continuation mode, an 80% continuation mode, and a 90% continuation mode are set as the continuation rate of the AT mode, and one of these continuation modes is determined by lottery. In step S1209, the continuation rate is determined by lottery based on the continuation rate lottery table obtained from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105. As shown in the continuation rate lottery table, as shown in FIG. 35, for example, if chance A is used as a trigger to switch to AT mode, the 70% continuation mode is most likely to be selected, and chance B is triggered to switch to AT mode. In the case of a transition win, the 60% continuation mode is set to be most likely to be selected.

After executing the continuation rate lottery process in step S1209, a continuation rate flag corresponding to the lottery result is set in step S1210. That is, when the 60% continuation mode is selected, the 60% flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d, and similarly, when the 70% continuation mode is selected, the 70% flag and 80% continuation mode are selected. If the 90% continuation mode is selected, the 80% flag is set, and if the 90% continuation mode is selected, the 90% flag is set.

In step S1211, a precursor game number lottery process is executed. In the precursor mode, a suggestion effect is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, the speaker 64, etc., indicating that the AT mode change has been won, before the notification of the AT mode change win (AT mode win notification effect) is performed. This is the mode in which the The precursor mode is set to continue for a maximum of 32 games, and the number of precursor games from 0 to 32 is determined by lottery in step S1211.

In step S1212, the number of portent games determined in step S1211 is input into the portent counters in the various counter areas 106e, and in step S1213, processing for setting portent flags in the various flag storage areas 106d is executed. The omen counter is a counter that is decremented by 1 for each game in the omen mode, and the omen flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the omen mode is set. Then, in step S1214, a process of setting the precursor command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the present AT lottery process is ended. The portent command is a command for making the display control device 81 understand that the portent mode is set, and provides information on the number of games remaining until the ceiling counter reaches 0 in the portent mode, that is, the number of games in the portent mode. Contains information on.

If it is determined in step S1205 that the player did not win the AT mode transition lottery, the process advances to step S1215. In step S1215, it is determined whether the advantageous section flag is set. If it is an advantageous section, in step S1216, a process of subtracting 1 from the ceiling counters in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The ceiling counter defines the maximum number of games that can be played without winning the AT mode transition lottery from a predetermined setting trigger. The ceiling counter is decremented by 1 for each game, and when it becomes 0, the transition to the AT mode is confirmed without winning the AT mode transition lottery. That is, in step S1217, it is determined whether the ceiling counter has reached 0 based on the processing result of step S1216. If it has become 0, the process proceeds to step S1208, and the AT mode winning flag is set. The processing after step S1208 is as described above.

If a negative determination is made in step S1215 or step S1217, processing for the pseudo precursor mode is performed in steps S1218 to S1224. In this embodiment, although the same or similar suggestion effect as in the precursor mode occurs, the effect mode ends without the AT mode winning notification effect indicating that the shift to AT mode is finally allowed. A pseudo-foreshadowing mode (a mode in which so-called false effects occur) is set. That is, in step S1218, the CPU 102 determines whether or not a pseudo precursor flag for specifying that the pseudo precursor mode is set in the various flag storage area 106d, and if it has already been set, it is left as is. The AT lottery process ends.

If the pseudo omen flag is not set, it is determined by lottery whether or not to set the pseudo omen mode in step S1219. Regarding such a lottery, for example, it is set such that the harder it is to win (lower appearance rate) as a game lottery result, the more likely it is to win the lottery for transition to the pseudo omen mode. In the following step S1220, it is determined whether or not the pseudo portent lottery in step S1219 has been won, and if it has not been won, the AT lottery process is directly ended. If the pseudo omen lottery is won, the number of games in the pseudo omen mode is determined by lottery in step S1221. Regarding such a lottery, for example, if the game lottery result is easy to win (high appearance rate) and the lottery to switch to the pseudo omen mode is won, a pseudo omen mode with a relatively long number of games is set. It is set as follows. Then, in step S1222, a process is executed to input the number of games in the pseudo-harbinger mode determined in step S1221 to the pseudo-harbinger counter provided in the various counter areas 106e. Thereafter, in step S1223, a pseudo omen flag is set, and in step S1224, a process of setting a pseudo omen command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the present AT lottery process is ended. The pseudo precursor counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games in the pseudo precursor mode, and the pseudo precursor command is a command for making the display control device 81 understand that the pseudo precursor mode is set. Information on the remaining number of games in the pseudo-harbinger mode is included, and the display control device 81 performs a lottery to generate a suggestion effect according to the remaining number of games in the pseudo-harbinger mode.

<Processing for AT continuous use>
Next, the AT consecutive play processing executed in step S1005 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 36. As already explained, the AT consecutive winning process is a process that is executed when the AT mode winning flag and the AT mode flag are set, and is executed as one set of AT modes from a predetermined start trigger to end trigger. This is a process for adding (stocking) the number of AT mode sets to be performed.

That is, in step S1401, it is determined whether the device is in the BB state by determining whether any BB state flag is set. If it is not in the BB state, it is determined in step S1402 whether a transition permission flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The transition permission flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that it is possible to make a BB win in the AT mode and that the winning permission condition (transition permission condition) is satisfied. If the transition permission flag is set, the AT consecutive play processing is ended as is.

If it is determined in step S1401 that the state is BB, or if it is determined in step S1402 that the transfer permission flag is not set, the process advances to step S1403. In step S1403, the lottery result of the current game is grasped. Then, in steps S1404 to S1414, a process of acquiring a stock lottery table from the various table storage areas 105a is executed.

That is, in step S1404, it is determined whether or not the AT mode flag is set, and if it is not set, in step S1405, it is determined whether or not the AT notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. judge. The AT notification flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to understand that the AT mode winning notification effect has been executed, and is in a state where it has already been notified that the AT mode transition lottery has been won or that the ceiling has been reached. This is a flag indicating that In this embodiment, after the AT mode winning notification performance is executed, the AT mode is started when the lottery result of the game becomes a result (normal reply A to C) that becomes a predetermined start trigger. In other words, a situation where the AT mode flag is not set and the AT notification flag is not set is a situation where the AT mode winning flag is set but before the AT mode winning notification effect is executed. The situation where the mode flag is not set and the AT notification flag is set is a situation where the AT mode winning notification effect has been executed but before the AT mode starts. If a negative determination is made in step S1405, a stock lottery table for before AT winning notification is obtained in step S1406, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S1405, a stock lottery table for before AT transition is acquired in step S1407. get.

Furthermore, if it is determined in step S1404 that the AT mode flag is set, it is determined in step S1408 whether or not the BB state flag is set. If not set, it is determined in step S1409 whether the BB carryover flag is set. The situation in which the BB carryover flag is not set in step S1409 is mainly the situation before the BB is won in the AT mode. If a negative determination is made in step S1409, a stock lottery table for no BB carryover is obtained in step S1410, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S1409, a stock lottery table for BB carryover is obtained in step S1411.

If it is determined in step S1408 that the state is BB, it is determined in step S1412 whether or not the JAC carryover flag is set. If the JAC carryover flag is not set and the BB first state or BB third state is present, a stock lottery table for no JAC carryover is obtained in step S1413, and the JAC carryover flag is set and the BB If it is in the second state, a stock lottery table for JAC carryover is acquired in step S1415.

As shown in FIG. 37, these stock lottery tables show that when comparing before the AT winning notification (step S1406) and before AT transition after the AT winning notification (step S1407), the AT after the AT winning notification is higher than before the AT winning notification. It is set so that it is easier to win the stock lottery before the transition. Therefore, in a configuration where the stock lottery is performed in the precursor mode after winning AT mode until the AT mode winning notification is performed, or after the AT mode winning notification and before the start of AT mode, the winning notification is more effective than before the AT mode winning notification. The latter can be said to be given preferential treatment. This is to alleviate players' frustration due to the slow start of AT mode, whereas in precursor mode it is still difficult for players to determine whether or not a transition to AT mode will occur. However, it is known that the transition to AT mode occurs after the winning notification and before the transition, and this is due to the fact that the system is waiting for the AT mode to start.

Also, before the transition to the BB state, when comparing the cases where there is no BB carryover flag (step S1410) and the case where there is a BB carryover flag (step S1411), it seems that winning the stock lottery is easier with no BB carryover than with BB carryover. is set to . In the BB state, it is set so that it is easier to win the stock lottery in the BB second state with the JAC carryover flag than in the BB first state or the BB second state without the JAC carryover flag.

After acquiring the various stock lottery tables, a stock lottery is executed in step S1415, and it is determined in step S1416 whether or not the stock lottery has been won. If the stock lottery is won, in step S1417, a process of adding 1 to the stock counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. Then, in step S1418, a process is executed to set the stock command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the process for AT consecutive shots is ended. The stock counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of consecutive sets in AT mode, and the stock command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to grasp information about winning the stock lottery. If it is determined in step S1416 that the player did not win the stock lottery, the AT consecutive winning process is immediately terminated. In addition, it may be set so that multiple sets of stock may be won in the stock lottery. In that case, a value corresponding to the number of sets is added to the stock counter, and information on the number of sets is sent to the stock command. It may also be configured to include it in

In the lottery result handling process (FIG. 30), after the AT consecutive winning process in step S1005 is executed, the bonus AT start process is executed in step S1006. The process for starting the bonus AT is a process for notifying that the winning permission condition has been satisfied (transfer permission notification) in a situation where it is possible to establish a BB win.

<Bonus AT start process>
That is, in the process for starting bonus AT, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 38, it is determined in step S1501 whether or not the BB state is present. If it is in the BB state, the process for starting the bonus AT is immediately ended. In the following step S1502, it is determined whether the BB winning flag is set. If the BB winning flag is not set, the transfer cannot be permitted yet, so the process for starting the bonus AT is ended. In the following step S1503, it is determined whether or not the AT mode flag is set, and if it is not set, the process for starting the bonus AT is directly terminated.

If a BB prize is won during the AT mode, it is determined in step S1504 whether the lottery result of the current game is a losing result and it is a game in which a BB prize can be established. By the way, in this embodiment, if you win the 1st BB or 2nd BB, it will be a duplicate win with the first replay (reply duplicate 1st BB, reply duplicate 2nd BB), so if you win the 1st BB or 2nd BB winning game, The configuration is such that it is not possible to win a 1BB prize or a 2nd BB prize. In other words, a game in which a BB win can be established is a game after a BB win, and a game in which the lottery result of the game is a losing result. If the result is not a loss, the process for starting the bonus AT is immediately ended. If the result is a failure, in step S1505, a process is executed to set a transfer permission flag in the various flag storage area 106d. Then, in step S1506, a process is executed to set the winning permission command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this bonus AT start process is ended. The processing of the display control device 81 that receives the winning permission command will be described in detail later. In step S1504, if the lottery result of the current game is not a losing result, the process for starting the bonus AT is directly ended.

Returning to the description of the lottery result handling process (FIG. 30).

After executing the process of step S1004 or step S1006, it is determined in step S1007 whether or not the lottery result of the current game is a winning combination. The push order combination is a result that includes normal reply A, normal reply B, and normal reply C in addition to the press order bell. Normal Rip A, Normal Rip B, and Normal Rip C are all results of multiple replays resulting in winnings, and the replays that result in a winning may vary depending on the order in which the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. It is set.

Specifically, normal reply A, normal reply B, and normal reply C are set on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R so that when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the second replay winning is established. When the stop control is performed and the left stop switch 42 or the right stop switch 44 is operated for the first time, the stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed so that the first re-game winning is achieved. However, in these Normal Reply A, Normal Reply B, and Regular Reply C, no matter which replay prize is achieved among the replays that have been won twice, the benefit granted is a replay, and the replay that is achieved is The only difference is the type of game. In other words, normal reply A, normal reply B, and normal reply C are game results in which a re-game winning is established regardless of the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, but the stop result differs depending on the order of operation. Normal reply A, normal reply B, and normal reply C are triggers for starting the AT mode, and the AT mode is activated in a game where the AT mode winning flag is set and the second replay winning can be achieved. is started.

If it is determined in step S1007 that the winning combination has been pressed, it is determined in step S1008 whether the AT mode winning flag or the AT mode flag is set. If any of the flags is set, the push order notification process is executed in step S1009, and then the lottery result handling process is ended. If a negative determination is made in step S1007 or step S1008, the lottery result handling process is immediately terminated.

<Overview of push order notification>
Prior to explaining the press order notification process executed in step S1009, an overview of the press order notification executed on the instruction monitor 68 and the press order notification effect executed on the auxiliary display section 65 will be explained. Note that the press order notification and press order notification effect can also be referred to as, for example, press order navigation, order notification, or mode notification. The instruction monitor 68 is connected to the main control device 101, and the main control device 101 notifies you of the pressing order. On the other hand, the auxiliary display section 65 is connected to the display control device 81, and the display control device 81 performs a pressing order notification effect.

First, the configuration of the instruction monitor 68 will be explained with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39(a) is a front view of the instruction monitor 68, and FIG. 39(b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display mode of the instruction monitor 68 and the display content.

As shown in FIG. 39(a), the instruction monitor 68 is provided with eight display segments N1 to N8. Each of the display segments N1 to N8 has an individual light source made of an LED, and by controlling on/off of these individual light sources, only one arbitrary display segment can be turned on. Any combination of display segments can be lit. As a result, predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers) are individually displayed on the instruction monitor 68. Note that since all of the above-mentioned individual light sources emit light of the same color, the same color is displayed in each of the display segments N1 to N8.

Regarding each display segment N1 to N8, in detail, the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are all linear display segments, and the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are linear display segments. Segment N7 is arranged so that it can display at least the numbers "1" to "6". Further, the eighth display segment N8 is a circular display segment, and is arranged laterally at the lower right portion of the area where the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are provided. Therefore, the instruction monitor 68 can display at least "1" to "6", "1." to "6.", and ".".

Note that, as long as it is possible to individually display multiple patterns of symbols on the instruction monitor 68, the shape and arrangement of each display segment N1 to N8 may be arbitrary, and it is even possible to display seven segments instead of eight segments. It is also possible to use a configuration using 1 segment, 9 segments, or the like. Furthermore, it is not essential that the colors displayed in each of the display segments N1 to N8 be the same, and the configuration may be such that the colors displayed in each of the display segments N1 to N8 can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, the configuration in which each display segment N1 to N8 is turned on or off by controlling the light source on and off is not essential, but if display control can be performed individually in each display segment N1 to N8, A segment display may be configured with a single backlight and a liquid crystal display. Furthermore, instead of applying segment display to each display area, symbols may be displayed using other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a CRT, and a dot matrix.

The first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are display segments used to notify the operation order of the pressing combination. For example, as shown in FIG. 39(b), by performing the stop operations in the order of "left" → "middle" → "right" as the operation order of each stop switch 42 to 44, a winning mode advantageous to the player can be achieved. If so, the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment N7 are lit and "1" is displayed. Furthermore, if the winning mode is advantageous to the player by performing the stop operations in the order of "right" → "left" → "middle" as the operation order of each stop switch 42 to 44, the first display segment N1, The second display segment N2, the third display segment N3, the fifth display segment N5, and the sixth display segment N6 are lit to display "5". In other words, the numbers (symbols) displayed in each display segment N1 to N7 have a one-to-one correspondence with the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and are displayed in display segments N1 to N7. By operating the stop switches 42 to 44 based on the numbers (symbols), it is possible to win a prize in a manner advantageous to the player.

In the eighth display segment N8, predetermined start conditions are met, including notification conditions that result in a situation in which press order notification may occur, such as transitioning to an advantageous section, AT mode winning notification being performed, and an AT mode flag being set. If the starting condition is met, it is lit in the game where the starting condition is met. Further, the light is turned off when the AT mode ends and the advantageous section shifts to the normal section.

In other words, the section in which it is easier for the player to win a prize in an advantageous manner by making it easier to be notified of the order of operations such as the push order bell etc. is defined as an advantageous section (advantageous state, specific state), and the eighth display segment N8 is In an advantageous section, the light will turn on during a specific section where you can actually benefit from push order notification, and it will turn off during a normal section that is not an advantageous section or a non-specific section that is an advantageous section but is not a specific section. It serves as an indicator (specific notification means).

As already explained, the instruction monitor 68, which has the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as a press order indicator and the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator, displays the number of payout pieces on the game panel 25. It is arranged near the side of the display section 62. In other words, the instruction monitor 68 is located above the stop switches 42 to 44, etc. that are operated by the player. In other words, the instruction monitor 68 is located below the position where the stop switches 42 to 44, etc. are provided, on the front surface of the gaming machine. is not placed on the decorative panel. Therefore, it can be said that the eighth display segment N8 is prevented from being hidden by the hands operating the stop switches 42 to 44, etc., and is placed in a position where it is easily visible to the player. Also, since it is arranged near the payout number display section 62, which is easy to watch for players who are playing the game with the aim of acquiring medals, it can be said that the chances of players overlooking it are suppressed.

Furthermore, in the instruction monitor 68, the eighth display segment N8 in particular has a brightness higher than that of the surrounding display parts (for example, the payout number display part 62 and the backlight of the game panel 25) (more specifically, The brightness of the corresponding LED is determined so that the brightness is twice that of the surrounding display section. Therefore, even if the eighth display segment N8 and the surrounding display sections are both controlled to emit light (lighted up), the eighth display segment N8 becomes conspicuous. ing. Regarding the illuminance toward the front of the gaming machine, the illuminance of the eighth display segment N8 toward the front of the gaming machine is higher than that of the surrounding display sections (more specifically, the illuminance of the eighth display segment N8 is higher than that of the surrounding display sections). The illuminance of the corresponding LED is determined so that the illuminance is twice as high. Such a configuration also improves the visibility of the eighth display segment N8, and prevents it from being overlooked when the eighth display segment N8 is in the lit state.

Next, the press order notification effect performed on the auxiliary display section 65 will be described with reference to FIG. 40. Here, the push order notification effect on the auxiliary display section 65 will be described using as an example a case where the push order combination is won when the operation order to be notified this time is middle→right→left.

As shown in FIG. 40(a), the auxiliary display section 65 displays the button corresponding to the stop switch to be operated first among the three button displays arranged in parallel corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44 (in the figure, the middle stop The number 1 is added to the middle button (corresponding to the switch 43), and the button is displayed larger than the other button displays. Further, each button is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for a bell, blue for a replay, etc.). Thereby, the player can recognize the winning combination in the current game and that the stop switch to be operated first is the middle stop switch 43. In addition, in the auxiliary display section 65, a number is displayed on the right button display to indicate that the next stop switch to be operated is the right stop switch 44, and the last stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42. The number 2 is displayed and the number 3 is displayed on the left button display.

When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in FIG. Buttons are displayed larger. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 has been completed and that the next stop switch to be operated is the right stop switch 44.

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. Buttons are displayed larger. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 has been completed and that the next stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42.

To explain the execution timing of the press order notification, the press order notification is performed during the invalid period of the stop switches 42 to 44 from the start of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R until the constant speed rotation after the acceleration period. is set to run. In this way, by having a configuration in which the press order notification is executed at a timing before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective, it is possible to recognize the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 and then press the stop switches 42 to 44. This allows the game to proceed at a good tempo.

<Press order notification process>
Next, the press order notification process executed in step S1009 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 41.

First, in step S1601, it is determined whether the AT mode flag is set. The case where the AT mode flag is not set means that the transition to the AT mode has not yet occurred after the AT mode is won. In this case, in step S1602, it is determined whether the AT notification flag is set. The case where the AT mode flag is not set and the AT notification flag is not set means that although the AT mode transition lottery has been won, the player is still in the precursor mode. In this case, in this game, the press order notification is not generated, and the process for press order notification is ended. If the AT notification flag is set, the process advances to step S1603.

In step S1603, it is determined whether the lottery result of the current game is one of normal reply A to normal reply C. If it is not normal reply A to normal reply C but the pressing order bell, the main pressing order notification process is immediately terminated. If it is one of the normal replies A to normal replies C, an AT start flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d in step S1604. The AT start flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to understand that the AT mode will be started from the current game. After that, in step S1605, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled so that the press order notification corresponding to the second re-game winning is performed. Then, in step S1606, after executing a process of setting a press order command including information on the operation order corresponding to the second replay winning as an output target to the display control device 81, a process for notifying the main press order is executed. end. The display control device 81 that has received this press order command displays a press order notification effect corresponding to the second re-game winning, such as a press order notification effect of the order in which the middle stop switch 43 should be operated first, and a press order notification effect of ``Aim from the inside!''. !'', voice navigation, etc. are displayed, and the auxiliary display section 65 and speaker 64 are controlled so that the symbol corresponding to the second re-game winning is announced.

If it is determined in step S1601 that the AT mode flag is set, the process advances to step S1607. In step S1607, it is determined whether the lottery result of the current game is the push order bell. If it is not the pressing order bell, the pressing order notification process is immediately terminated. If it is the pressing order bell, it is determined in step S1608 whether or not the above transfer permission flag is set. If the transition permission flag is not set, it is determined in step S1609 whether or not it is in any BB state. If it is determined in step S1608 that the transition permission flag is set, or if it is determined in step S1609 that the transition permission flag is not set but is not in the BB state, the process advances to step S1610 and the current push The instruction monitor 68 is controlled so that the press order notification corresponding to the first small prize winning is performed according to the type of order bell. Then, in step S1611, a process is executed to set a press order command including information on the operation order corresponding to the first minor win as an output target to the display control device 81, and then a process for notifying the main press order is executed. end. The display control device 81 that has received this press order command controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 so that a press order notification effect corresponding to the first small winning combination is performed. On the other hand, if the transition permission flag is not set and the player is in the BB state, the process for notifying the push order is terminated without notifying the push order when the push order bell is won even if it is in the AT mode. .

<Winning result processing>
Next, the winning result handling process executed in step S515 in the reel control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 42. In the winning result handling process, processing for starting or ending the AT mode or the like is performed depending on the game result.

First, in step S1701, game number management processing is performed. In the game number management process, a process for managing the number of CZ mode games and the number of portent mode games is performed.

More specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 43, in step S1801, it is determined whether the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is set, and if it is in either BB state, the game continues. End the number management process. That is, if a transition to the BB state occurs during the CZ mode or the precursor mode, the number of games in the precursor mode or the CZ mode is not managed. If it is not in any BB state, the process advances to step S1802, and it is determined whether the CZ mode flag is set. If the CZ mode flag is set, a process of decrementing the CZ counter by 1 is executed in step S1803. Then, in step S1804, it is determined whether the CZ counter has reached 0. If it has become 0, the CZ mode flag is cleared in step S1805, and a CZ end command is output to the display control device 81. Execute the process to set as target. Clearing the CZ mode flag ends the CZ mode and shifts to the normal mode.

After executing the process in step S1805, a process for setting the number of ceiling games is executed in step S1806. The process of setting the number of ceiling games is a process of inputting any predetermined value from 100 to 999 into the ceiling counter. Which value is input into the ceiling counter is determined by lottery. The process of setting the number of ceiling games will be explained in detail later.

If a negative determination is made in either step S1802 or step S1804, or after executing the process in step S1806, the process advances to step S1807. In step S1807, it is determined whether a precursor flag or a pseudo precursor flag is set. If none of the flags is set, the game number management process is immediately terminated. If any of the flags is set, the process advances to step S1808, and a process of subtracting 1 from the precursor counter or pseudo precursor counter is executed. That is, in step S1808, if the mode is the sign mode, the sign counter is subtracted by 1, and if the mode is the pseudo sign mode, the pseudo sign counter is subtracted by 1.

After executing the process in step S1808, it is determined in step S1809 whether the precursor flag has been set and the precursor counter has reached 0. That is, when the number of portent games becomes 0 in the portent mode, the process advances to step S1810, and processing for clearing the portent flag is performed. Then, in step S1811, the AT notification flag is set, and in step S1812, the process of setting the AT winning notification command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and the number of games management process is ended. By setting the AT notification flag, processing for generating press order notification for second re-game winning is performed in the above press order notification process. In addition, the display control device 81 that has received the AT winning notification command performs an AT mode winning notification effect to notify that the AT mode transition lottery has been won and the transition to AT mode is permitted. The auxiliary display section 65 and speaker 64 are controlled accordingly.

In step S1809, if the precursor counter is not 0 or if the pseudo precursor flag is set instead of the precursor flag, the process advances to step S1813. In step S1813, it is determined whether the pseudo precursor counter is 0 and the pseudo precursor flag is set. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1813, a process of clearing the pseudo precursor flag is executed in step S1814, and then the number of games management process is ended. This ends the pseudo precursor mode. Further, if a negative determination is made in step S1813, and the pseudo precursor counter is not 0, or is 0 but the precursor flag is set instead of the pseudo precursor flag, the game number management process is directly terminated.

Returning to the description of the winning result handling process, after the number of games management process is executed in step S1701, it is determined in step S1702 whether or not the AT start flag is set. As mentioned above, the AT start flag is a flag that is set in a game that allows the second replay winnings when a transition to AT mode occurs.More specifically, when the AT notification flag is set, This is a flag that is set at the start of the game when a player wins from Normal Rep A to Normal Rep C in a situation where the player wins. If the AT start flag is set, the AT mode winning flag is cleared in step S1703, the AT notification flag is cleared in step S1704, and the AT start flag is cleared in step S1705. Then, in step S1706, the AT mode flag is set, and in step S1707, a continuation flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The continuation flag is a flag for determining that the AT mode is to be continued during a predetermined continuation determination of the AT mode.

Thereafter, in step S1708, processing for setting the AT start command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. The display control device 81 that has received the AT start command controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 so that an AT mode start effect is performed according to the continuation rate of the AT mode to be started.

If it is determined in step S1702 that the AT start flag is not set, the process advances to step S1709. In step S1709, it is determined whether the AT mode flag is set and the AT mode is in progress. If it is not in the AT mode, the winning result handling process is immediately terminated. If the AT mode is in effect, in step S1710, an AT continuation setting process is executed to manage continuation of the AT mode based on the game results of the current game, and then the winning result handling process is ended.

<AT continuation setting process>
In the AT continuation setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 44, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not any BB winning game flag is set. It is determined whether or not the following holds true. As mentioned above, the BB winning game flag is a flag that is set in the bonus state processing that is performed immediately before the winning result corresponding processing.

In this embodiment, the AT mode continuation determination is performed from the time of BB winning until the end of BB. More specifically, the AT mode is configured to end if the conditions for continuation of AT mode are not satisfied by the end of BB, and if the conditions for continuation of AT mode are satisfied at the end of BB, at least the next BB The configuration is such that the AT mode continues until the state ends. That is, step S1901 is a process for determining whether or not the timing is included in the AT mode continuation determination timing.

If a BB win is established in the current game, it is determined in step S1902 whether the stock counter is 0 or not. If the stock counter is 1 or more, the stock counter is decremented by 1 in step S1903, the continuation command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1904, and then the AT Ends the continuation setting process. The display control device 81 that has received the continuation command controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 so that a continuation effect corresponding to the continuation of the AT mode is performed in the BB state where the player won the prize this time.

If the stock counter is 0 in step S1902, a continuous lottery process is executed in step S1905. In this process, it is determined by a lottery whether or not to continue the AT mode based on the continuation rate lottery that is performed when the AT mode shift lottery is won. That is, if the 60% flag is set and the mode is 60% continuous, there is a 60% probability of winning the continuous lottery in step S1905, and if the 90% flag is set and the mode is 90% continuous, The continuous lottery is performed in such a way that the continuous lottery in step S1905 has a 90% probability of winning.

In step S1906, it is determined whether or not the continuation lottery in step S1905 has been won. If the continuation lottery has been won, the process advances to step S1904, a continuation command is set, and then the AT continuation setting process is ended. If the continuation lottery is not won, the continuation flag is cleared in step S1907, and the process of setting the non-continuation command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step S1908, and then the AT continuation setting is performed. Finish the process. The display control device 81 that has received the non-continuation command controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 so that a non-continuation effect corresponding to the fact that the AT mode is not continued in the current winning BB state is performed. For example, if a BB prize is established without winning the stock lottery after shifting to AT mode, and the continuation lottery in step S1905 is not won, the continuation flag set at the time of transitioning to AT mode is cleared in step S1907. That will happen.

If it is determined in step S1901 that it is not a BB winning game, it is determined in step S1909 whether or not the game is in the BB state by determining whether any BB state flag is set. If it is in the BB state, it is determined in step S1910 whether the continuation flag is set. The case where the continuation flag is not set is the case where it is determined in step S1907 and step S1908 that the game is not continued when the BB prize is won, and a performance for that purpose is performed. In this case, it is determined in step S1911 whether the stock counter is 0 or not. If the continuation flag is not set and the stock counter is 1 or more, it means that the stock lottery was determined to be non-continuous at the time of BB winning, but the stock lottery is performed in the lottery result handling process (AT consecutive winning process) during the BB state. This is the case if you win. In this case, a process of setting a continuation flag is executed in step S1912, a continuation command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1913, and then the AT continuation setting process is ended. When the display control device 81 receives a continuation command during the BB state, control is performed so that the non-continuation performance on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 is rewritten into a continuation performance. If the continuation flag is set in step S1910 or if the stock counter is 0 in step S1911, the AT continuation setting process is ended.

If it is determined in step S1909 that the game is not in the BB state, it is determined in step S1914 whether or not any BB end game flag is set, indicating that the current game is the end game in the BB state. Determine whether or not. As mentioned above, the BB end game flag is a flag that is set in the bonus status process that is performed immediately before the winning result corresponding process.

If it is not the end game, the AT continuation setting process is ended. If it is the end game, a process of clearing the transition permission flag is executed in step S1915. In the following step S1916, it is determined whether or not the continuation flag is set, and if it is set, the AT continuation setting process is immediately terminated. In this case, the AT mode continues even after the BB state ends, and after winning the BB and setting the winning permission flag, by establishing the BB winning, an affirmative determination is made in step S1901, and subsequent continuation determination is made. It will be done.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1916 that the continuation flag is not set, processing to clear the AT mode flag is performed in step S1917. Then, in step S1918, a process is executed to set the AT end command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this AT continuation setting process is ended. The display control device 81 that has received the AT end command controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 to notify that the AT mode has ended.

<Management of number of games and differential number of cards in advantageous section>
Next, a first section display process and a second section display process for controlling the eighth display segment N8 as a section display and managing the number of games and the difference number of sheets in an advantageous section will be explained. .

<Section display first process>
First, the first section display process will be explained with reference to FIG. 45. The first section display process is a process performed in step S414 in the lottery process (FIG. 18), in which the lottery result of the game is determined based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the lottery result of the game is determined based on the lottery result. This is carried out after the display mode transition lottery, etc. (lottery result handling process) is performed.

In step S2001, it is determined whether the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is being displayed, more specifically, whether the eighth display segment N8 is being lit. As already explained, the case where the eighth display segment N8 is being lit indicates the case where it is a specific section of the advantageous section in which at least a notification condition that can generate press order notification is satisfied. If a negative determination is made in step S2001 and it is determined that the eighth display segment N8 is turned off, the process advances to step S2002.

In step S2002, it is determined whether an advantageous section flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. If the advantageous section flag is set, it is determined in step S2003 whether or not the advantageous section winning game flag is set. The advantageous section winning game flag is a flag that is set when the advantageous section transfer lottery is won in the advantageous section transfer lottery process, and is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that this is the winning game. If the advantageous section winning game flag is set, processing for clearing the advantageous section winning game flag is executed in step S2004. Then, in step S2005, an advantageous section flag is set. By setting the advantageous section flag, the normal section is shifted to the advantageous section. Then, in step S2006, processing is performed to start counting the number of games in the advantageous section, more specifically, to start measuring the number of games AG in the advantageous section in various counter areas 106e. The number of games in the advantageous section AG corresponds to a grasping means for grasping the number of games played in the advantageous section, and a process of adding 1 for each game in the advantageous section is executed.

In the following step S2007, advantageous section transition game processing is executed. The advantageous section transition game process is a process related to an instruction function performed in a game in which a transition to an advantageous section has occurred.

<Advantageous section transition game processing>
The advantageous section transition game process will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 46.

In step S2101, it is determined whether any BB carryover flag is set. If the BB carryover flag is set, in step S2102, a ceiling game number table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a. As shown in FIG. 47, the ceiling game number table is set so that the ceiling game number is randomly determined between 100 games and 999 games, such as 100 games, 200 games, 300 games, etc. , 999 games, etc. are set in units of approximately 100 games, which are likely to be selected. In addition, in the ceiling game number table, the number of ceiling games that are likely to be selected differs depending on the setting value, and the higher the setting value (the higher the setting value of the ball output rate), the easier it is to select a shorter number of ceiling games. There is.

After acquiring the ceiling game number table in step S2102, a lottery process for the ceiling game number is executed in step S2103. Then, in step S2104, the process of inputting the number of ceiling games determined by the lottery into the ceiling counter is executed, and then the process for the advantageous section transition game ends. As described above, the ceiling counter is decremented by 1 for each game in the AT lottery process, and when it becomes 0, the AT mode winning flag is set without winning the AT mode transition lottery.

Incidentally, the processing from step S2102 to step S2104 is a process for setting the number of ceiling games, and in step S1806 in the above-mentioned number of games management process (FIG. 43), a process for obtaining a ceiling game number table (step S2102) and a lottery for the number of ceiling games are performed. Processing (step S2103) and ceiling counter input processing (step S2104) are executed.

Note that the ceiling game number table acquired in step S2102 and the ceiling game number table acquired in step S1806 may be different, and more specifically, the ceiling game number table acquired in step S2102 and the ceiling game number table acquired in the advantageous section transition game may be different. , the number of ceiling games set upon termination of CZ mode may be different from the number of ceiling games set upon termination of CZ mode, for example, the number of ceiling games set upon termination of CZ mode may be different from the number of ceiling games set upon termination of CZ mode. A smaller number of games may be more likely to be set as the ceiling number of games, or vice versa.

If it is determined in step S2101 that the BB carryover flag is not set, it is determined in step S2105 whether any BB status flag is set. If any BB status flag is set and the transition is to an advantageous section that occurred during the BB status, in step S2106, a transition completed flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d, and then from step S2102 to In step S2104, the above-described number of ceiling games is set, and then the process for advantageous section transition games is ended.

In this embodiment, the advantageous section may be ended at the time of winning a BB prize or at the end of the BB state, and the transition completed flag indicates the end of the BB state when the advantageous section is transferred during the BB state. This is a flag to prevent the advantageous section from ending. In other words, if it is possible to end the advantageous section at the time of winning a BB and at the end of the BB, even if the advantageous section ends with the BB win and then re-enters the advantageous section during the BB state, the advantageous section such as the end of the BB will continue. This is a configuration in which an opportunity to end the section may occur. Therefore, there are cases in which the advantageous section ends when a BB is won (re-transition to the advantageous section during the BB state), and cases where the advantageous section is not ended when the BB is won (transition to the advantageous section occurs during the BB state). It is necessary to distinguish between cases in which there is no migration), and the above-mentioned migrated flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to distinguish between these cases.

On the other hand, if the shift to the advantageous section occurs in a situation where the BB winning has not been carried over and the player is not in the BB state, a process of setting a CZ mode flag is executed in step S2107. Then, in step S2108, 32 is input to the CZ counter, and then the process for advantageous section transition game is ended.

In other words, if you want to move to the advantageous section in a situation where you are carrying over the BB win or are in the BB state, you will move to the normal mode, and if you are not carrying over the BB win and are not in the BB state, you will move to the advantageous section. In this case, the mode changes to the CZ mode, and the mode at the time of transition to the advantageous section differs depending on whether or not the BB winning is carried over and whether or not the BB state is present. Since the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery is higher in CZ mode than in normal mode, it is better to move to an advantageous section in a situation where the BB win is carried over or in a BB state, than in a situation where this is not the case. In other words, it is more advantageous for the player to move to the advantageous section before winning the BB or in the BB winning game.

Returning to the explanation of the first section display process, if the advantageous section flag is set in step S2002, the process advances to step S2008. In step S2008, it is determined whether the AT mode flag or the CZ mode flag is set. As already explained, after the AT mode winning notification performance is performed, the AT mode flag is set, which creates a state in which press order notification can occur when the press order winning combination is won, and the notification start condition of the section display is set. will be established. In addition, in this slot machine 10, the conditions for starting the notification on the section display include not only a state where press order notification can occur when the press order winning is possible, but also a state in which the transition to the AT mode where press order notification can occur. Shifting to the CZ mode, which is easier to use, is also set as a notification start condition. It should be noted that a configuration may be adopted in which press order notification can occur in the CZ mode, and the transition to the CZ mode itself may be a state in which press order notification can occur when a press order win is established, and the notification start condition may be satisfied.

If it is determined in step S2008 that the AT mode flag or the CZ mode flag is set, then in step S2009, the section indicator starts displaying by lighting the eighth display segment N8. In addition, in the main control device 101, when the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is turned on and the display is started, a predetermined sound effect (for example, a mechanical sound "Gago!") is emitted from the speaker 64. A sound output command is output to the display control device 81 so that a sound) is output. The display control device 81 controls the speaker 64 to emit the predetermined sound effect based on the sound output command. Note that when the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started, the auxiliary display section 65 or another display section may be configured to generate an effect. In this case, a corresponding command is output to the display control device 81, and It is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the auxiliary display section 65 and the like are controlled so that the display control device 81 performs a corresponding effect.

If it is determined in step S2001 that the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is being displayed, it is determined in step S2010 whether or not the normal mode is in progress. If the mode is the normal mode, in step S2011, processing is executed to end the display during the advantageous section. Specifically, processing is performed to switch the eighth display segment N8 from the lit state to the unlit state. On the other hand, if the normal mode is not in step S2010, the display in the advantageous section continues. Specifically, processing is performed to continue the situation in which the eighth display segment N8 is in the lit state.

In the case where it is determined that the advantageous section winning game flag is not set in step S2003, in the case where it is an advantageous section winning game (after executing the process in step S2007), the situation where press order notification may occur and the press order Transition to a state in which notification occurs If the situation is not such that it is easy to win the lottery (if it is determined that neither the AT mode flag nor the CZ mode flag is set in step S2008), and the section display in step S2011 If the display of the device is finished, the process advances to step S2012. Further, after executing the display start process in step S2009 and after determining that the mode is normal mode in step S2010, it is determined in step S2013 whether or not the CZ mode flag is set, and the CZ mode flag is set. is set, the process also advances to step S2012. In step S2012, a process of adding 1 to a first win ratio counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The first hand ratio counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which push order notification does not occur, that is, the number of games in the normal section and the non-specific section.

If it is determined in step S2013 that the AT mode flag is set instead of the CZ mode flag, the process advances to step S2014. In step S2014, a process of adding 1 to a second win ratio counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The second hand ratio counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which push order notification can occur, that is, the number of games in a specific section.

After executing the process of step S2012 or step S2014, a win ratio calculation process is executed in step S2015. In this process, the value of the second hand ratio counter is divided by the added value (total number of games) of the first hand ratio counter and the second hand ratio counter. That is, the hand ratio calculation process is a process of calculating the ratio of the number of games in which press order notification can occur among the total number of games. Then, in step S2016, processing is executed to display the result of the arithmetic processing in step S2015 on the winning ratio monitor 77.

As shown in FIG. 5, the hand ratio monitor 77 has a plurality of 7-segment display sections each consisting of seven display segments. Specifically, the role ratio monitor 77 has a first display section 77a, a second display section 77b, a third display section 77c, a fourth display section 77d, and a fifth display section 77e as 7-segment display sections. There is. The display segments in the first display section 77a to fifth display section 77e have individual light sources made of LEDs, similar to the display segments N1 to N7 of the instruction monitor 68, and these individual light sources can be controlled to turn on and off. By doing so, only one arbitrary display segment can be lit, and any combination of display segments can be lit. As a result, each of the role ratio monitors 77 can individually display predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers), and in particular, the role ratio monitor 77 can display 5-digit numbers. There is.

In step S2016, the result of the arithmetic processing in step S2015 is output to the winning ratio monitor 77, and each display section 77a to 77e on the winning ratio monitor 77 is displayed so that a four-digit number is displayed on the winning ratio monitor 77. Perform display control. Specifically, the ratio of the number of games in which push order notification can occur out of the total number of games is a number smaller than 1 and up to four decimal places, such as "0.5012". The numbers are displayed on the winning ratio monitor 77. After executing the process of step S2016, the first section display process ends.

Note that the display control of the winning ratio monitor 77 may be performed after rounding off the fifth digit after the decimal point in the arithmetic processing of step S2015. In addition, since the first display section 77a of the role ratio monitor 77 basically displays "0", the first display section 77a may not be provided, or the first display section 77a may be printed, etc. The configuration may be such that "0" is always displayed. Further, it is preferable that a decimal point is displayed by printing or the like between the first display section 77a and the second display section 77b.

<Second section display process>
Next, the second section display process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 48. As already explained, the second section display process is a process executed in step S516 of the reel control process, and upon the end of one game, the payout of medals (payout determination process) and the transition of the gaming state based on the winning results are performed. etc. (bonus status processing, winning result corresponding processing) are performed.

In step S2201, it is determined whether the advantageous section flag is set. If it has not been set, the second section display process ends. If the advantageous section flag is set, in step S2202, processing for counting the number of games during the advantageous section is executed. Specifically, a process of adding 1 to the number of advantageous zone games AG is performed. After executing the process in step S2202, in step S2203, a process for updating the number of increase/decrease tickets MY (MY counter) in advantageous sections provided in various counter areas 106e is executed.

In the MY update process in step S2203, the number of coins inserted (number of bets) is subtracted from the number of coins paid out, and the result of the subtraction is calculated as the increase/decrease number of coins MY in the advantageous section, on the condition that the playing result of the current game is not a replay winning prize. The advantageous section increase/decrease number MY is updated by adding the number MY.

After executing the MY update process in step S2203, a remaining game number management process is executed in step S2204, and a remaining game number management process is executed in the subsequent step S2205. The remaining number of games management process is a process for managing whether or not the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games (1500 games) with the current number of remaining games, based on the number of remaining games in AT mode, etc. be. In the remaining game number management process, for example, if the number of games in the advantageous section AG is 1450 at the start of the AT mode, even if the AT mode is continued as it is, the end condition of the AT mode (any BB is at least 1 Ascertain whether the situation is such that the maximum number of games in the advantageous section will be reached before the maximum number of games played in the advantageous section is reached. If such a situation exists, a first excess flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d as a flag for specifying the situation. In addition, the remaining number of coins management process is a process for managing whether the advantageous section reaches the upper limit increase number (2400 coins) with the current number of remaining games based on the number of remaining games in AT mode, etc. It is. In the remaining payout number management process, for example, when starting the AT mode, the number of increased/decreased coins in the advantageous section MY is 2300. ), it is determined whether the situation is such that the upper limit increase in the number of advantageous sections is reached before the above. If such a situation exists, a second excess flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d as a flag for specifying the situation.

In the subsequent step S2206, it is determined whether the number of games in the advantageous section AG has reached the upper limit of the number of games, 1500, or whether the number of increased/decreased coins in the advantageous section MY has reached the upper limit of the number of increases, 2400 or more. If any of these forced termination conditions is satisfied, the number of games AG in the advantageous section and the number of increase/decrease coins MY in the advantageous section are cleared to zero in step S2207. In the following step S2208, processing is performed to end the display of the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator. Then, in step S2209, parameters and information such as various flags and counters in the advantageous section are initialized, and then the second section display process is ended.

More specifically, the data initialization process in step S2209 is a process of returning the flags and counters set upon transition to the current advantageous section, and the flags and counters set during the current advantageous section to their initial values. . For example, if the advantageous section flag, AT mode winning flag, AT mode flag, continuation flag, etc. have not been cleared but have been set, these flags are cleared. Furthermore, if the number of advantageous section games AG, the number of increase/decrease tickets in the advantageous section MY, the omen counter for the omen mode, the counter for the number of continuous games such as the CZ mode, etc. are larger than 0, these counters are all reset to 0. In other words, the initialization process initializes all variables and parameters that affect the performance related to press order notification regarding the advantageous section as an advantageous state using press order notification, and clears the RAM regarding such variables and parameters. This is a process that performs

Incidentally, the process of initializing the advantageous section information in step S205 in the main process is also to clear the RAM regarding the variables and parameters regarding the advantageous section, similarly to step S2209.

If it is determined in step S2206 that the number of advantageous section games AG has not reached the upper limit, and that the number of increase/decrease tickets MY in the advantageous section has not reached the upper limit increase, the process proceeds to step S2210, and any BB winning game flag is By determining whether or not is set, it is determined whether any BB winnings have been achieved in the current game. If any BB winning is established, it is determined in step S2211 whether any of the AT mode winning flag, AT mode flag, and various CZ mode flags is set. That is, the processing in steps S2210 and S2211 is a process for determining whether or not the BB winning game is in the normal mode and before the AT mode winning.

If the game is in the normal mode and is a BB winning game before winning the AT mode, the process advances to step S2207, performs the processing for ending the advantageous section from step S2207 to step S2209, and then ends the section display second processing. . On the other hand, if the game is in the normal mode and is not a BB winning game before winning the AT mode, the second section display process is ended without ending the advantageous section. That is, in this embodiment, a game in which a BB prize is achieved may or may not be a trigger for ending the advantageous section depending on the internal mode in the advantageous section, and may not be an opportunity for the end of the advantageous section in the AT mode during the normal mode in the advantageous section. If the player wins a BB prize before winning, it will be a trigger for ending the advantageous section, but if it is in a mode other than normal mode or in AT mode in normal mode before winning, it will not be a trigger for ending the advantageous section. By doing this, it is possible to draw attention to the timing (internal mode) of establishing a BB win, and it is possible to draw attention to the timing (internal mode) of making a BB win, such as simply winning a BB, winning a prize, and receiving benefits associated with the BB. It becomes possible to realize novel gameplay that is significantly different from conventional slot machines.

If it is determined in step S2210 that the game is not a BB winning game, in step S2212 it is determined whether any BB end game flag is set, thereby determining that the current game is an end game in the BB state. Determine whether or not. If it is a BB state ending game, it is determined in step S2213 whether or not a continuation flag is set. As described above, the continuation flag is a flag that is set when transitioning to AT mode, and is cleared when the bonus AT state starts when the AT mode is not continued.

If it is a BB winning game in a situation where the continuation flag is set, the second section display process is ended without ending the advantageous section. If it is a BB ending game in a situation where the continuation flag is not set, the process advances to step S2214, and it is determined whether the transition completed flag is set. The transition completed flag is a flag that is set when the vehicle has transitioned to an advantageous section during the BB state (step S2106). If the migrated flag is set, the migrated flag is cleared in step S2215, and then the second section display process ends. In this case, the advantageous section does not end.

On the other hand, if it is a BB ending game in a situation where the continuation flag is not set and the transition completed flag is not set, the process for ending the advantageous section in steps S2207 to S2209 is performed. After that, the second section display process ends.

That is, in the present embodiment, depending on whether the AT mode continuation condition is met, the end of the BB state may or may not be the trigger for ending the advantageous section, and the AT mode continuation condition may not be the trigger for ending the advantageous section. If the BB ends in a situation where the condition is not satisfied, it will be a trigger for ending the advantageous section, and if the BB ends in a situation where the continuation condition is satisfied, it will not be a trigger for ending. In this way, when the continuation conditions for AT mode are not met, not only the BB state ends, but also the advantageous section ends, so that the bonus AT state due to the overlap between the BB state and AT mode Since we created a series of extreme situations in which the advantageous section could end immediately after an advantageous situation, the advantage of the bonus AT state stands out, and the difference in advantage makes the bonus AT state more attractive. It becomes possible to suitably increase the degree of attention.

<About the display of the push order indicator and section indicator and the progress of the game>
The relationship between the start and end of the advantageous section and the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator will be explained with reference to FIG. 49.

In the present slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. 49, the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is off (not lit) in a normal section that is not an advantageous section. In this normal section, press order notification is not performed. In other words, it can be said that the normal section is a section that does not have the performance related to the instruction function, as opposed to the advantageous section that has the performance related to the instruction function such as push order notification. A situation where the display mode is the normal mode mainly corresponds to the normal section.

In the normal section, for example, if you win the lottery to move to the advantageous section by winning the second small prize (watermelon), the advantageous section will start with the game in which the game result that triggered the winning is established (the game is advantageous). From this game, the counting of the number of games executed in the advantageous section (counting of the number of games AG in the advantageous section) is started. Note that the process for the advantageous section transition game (FIG. 46) described above is a process that is carried out after the game transfers to the advantageous section in a game that transfers to the advantageous section based on the winning of the watermelon.

Then, if you win the lottery to switch to AT mode during the advantageous section, and the winning notification and AT mode flag are set, etc., and a push order notification can occur, the condition for starting the display on the section indicator is met. As a result, the eighth display segment N8 lights up.

Thereafter, in a situation where the eighth display segment N8 is lit, press order notification using the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 occurs. In this case, as described above, press order information ("1" to "6") is displayed by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7, and the player presses the button based on the press order information. Be able to understand the order. In the press order notification, the display of the press order information starts when the start lever 41 is operated in the game, and the display ends when the third reel stop ON operation is performed in the game. If such a game is not the last game of the advantageous section, when the third reel stop ON operation is performed, only the display of the push order information by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 ends, and the eighth display The display of the advantageous section by segment N8 continues. If the player wins the push order combination again in the next game or later, the push order information corresponding to the push order combination is displayed in the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7.

When the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit or the number of increased medals in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit increase, etc., and the final game of the advantageous section is reached, the eighth display segment N8 also turns off to notify the user of the advantageous section. ends. In the present embodiment, in the final game of the advantageous section, the eighth display segment N8 is turned off at the timing when the medal payout ends (by the section display second process which is the process after the payout determination process). Note that if no medals are paid out in the final game, the eighth display segment N8 is turned off at the time of the third reel stop OFF operation. This allows the player to clearly understand that the game is the final game in the advantageous section.

As described above, the number of games in the advantageous section is counted starting from the game that wins the lottery for transition to the advantageous section, while the push order notification occurs only during the period when the eighth display segment N8 is lit. In other words, even if it is an advantageous section, the push order notification does not occur in the section where the eighth display segment N8 is off (non-specific section). In other words, by checking whether or not the 8th display segment N8 as a section indicator is lit, it is possible to at least enjoy the benefits of press order notification among advantageous sections (specific section, substantial increase section). It is now possible to clearly understand the By doing this, there is no difference in the degree of advantage between a player who ends the game without knowing that he is in a situation where he can enjoy the benefits of press order notification and a successor player who takes his seat afterwards. You can do it like this. In other words, in a situation where the eighth display segment N8 is not lit, press order notification does not occur, so it is possible to gracefully end the game.

<Production setting process>
Next, the effect setting process executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 50. The effect setting process is a process activated by the CPU 181 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 2 msec cycle).

In the effect setting process, first in step S2301, it is determined whether a new command has been received from the main control device 101. If a new command has been received, processing for storing the received command in the RAM 183 is executed in step S2302. The RAM 183 is provided with a command storage area, and the command storage area is configured as a ring buffer that can individually store a plurality of commands and read out the previously stored commands.

If a negative determination is made in step S2301, or after executing the process in step S2302, it is determined in step S2303 whether or not the newly received command is a bet time command. The bet command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on a bet operation, and is a bet command set in step S306 of the normal process. If it is a bet time command, a bet time performance setting process is executed in step S2304. In the bet performance setting process, processing is performed to control the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 so that a performance based on the current bet operation is performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2303, or after executing the process in step S2304, it is determined in step S2305 whether the newly received command is a start command. The start command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41, and includes a lottery result command set in step S411 of the lottery process as well as a command corresponding to the lottery result. There are precursor commands, pseudo precursor commands, stock commands, winning permission commands, press order notification commands, etc. that are set in the process (FIG. 30). If it is one of these start time commands, start time effect setting processing is executed in step S2306.

If a negative determination is made in step S2305, or after executing the process in step S2306, it is determined in step S2307 whether the newly received command is a command for each stop operation. Each stop operation command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the stop operation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and is a command output from the main controller 101 in step S505 of the reel control process (FIG. 21). This is a stop command that is set in . If it is a stop instruction command as the command at each stop operation, a production setting process at each stop operation is executed in step S2308. In each stop operation performance setting process, processing is performed to control the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 so that a performance based on the current stop operation is performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2307, or after executing the process in step S2308, it is determined in step S2309 whether or not the newly received command is a full stop command. The all-stop command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the fact that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, and is a command that is output from the main controller 101 based on the fact that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, and is a command that is output from the main controller 101 based on the fact that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, and is a command that is output from the main controller 101 based on the fact that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped. In addition to commands, there are AT start commands, CZ end commands, AT winning notification commands, continuation commands, non-continuation commands, AT end commands, etc. that are set in the winning result handling process (FIG. 42). If it is one of these all-stop commands, a full-stop effect setting process is executed in step S2310.

If a negative determination is made in step S2309, or after executing the process in step S2310, other processes are executed in step S2311, and then the effect setting process is ended. In step S2311, effects are set based on commands from the main controller 101 other than when betting, starting, and stopping (for example, effects based on the operation of the settlement switch 59), and connections are made without going through the main controller 101. Based on the signal from the detected sensor (effect switch detection sensor, etc.), settings for effects, settings for error notification, etc. are performed.

The start effect setting process and the full stop effect setting process will be described below. Note that each effect setting process will be explained with reference to the schematic diagrams of display effects shown in FIGS. 55 to 57.

<Start production setting process>
The start effect setting process in step S2306 will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 51.

In step S2401, display mode setting processing is performed. In this process, it is determined whether the display mode currently set on the main controller 101 side is the normal mode, CZ mode, or AT mode, and the display on the auxiliary display section 65 is changed in the corresponding display mode. Set so that the performance will take place. Specifically, in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183 on the display control device 81 side, an area is provided for setting a CZ mode flag and an AT mode flag as flags for understanding the display mode. The corresponding flag is set at the start of the process, and the corresponding flag is cleared at the end of the process. In step S2401, by understanding these various mode correspondence flags, the current display mode is specified, and the auxiliary display section 65, speaker 64, upper lamp 63, etc. are controlled so that the corresponding effect is performed.

In the following step S2402, based on the received lottery result command, it is determined whether the lottery result of the game to be started this time is a winning combination. If the pressing order winning combination is determined, it is determined in step S2403 whether or not a pressing order notification command has been received. If the push order notification command has been received, it is determined in step S2204 whether the lottery result of the current game is one of normal reply A to normal reply C. If the press order notification command is set in a game that is normal reply A to normal reply C, it means that it is a starting game of AT mode, and in this case, the second replay winning is supported in step S2405. The auxiliary display section 65, speaker 64, etc. are controlled so that the press order notification effect is performed.

A negative determination in step S2404 means that the lottery result of the current game is a push order bell win, and in this case, in step S2406, a push order notification effect corresponding to the winning of the first minor prize is performed. The auxiliary display section 65, speaker 64, etc. are controlled so that the display is performed.

If it is determined in step S2402 that the lottery result of the current game is not a push-based winning combination, it is determined in step S2407 whether or not the lottery result of the current game is a specific winning combination. The specific winning combination is a lottery result called a so-called rare winning combination that is difficult to appear (hard to win) as a lottery result of each game.In this embodiment, the specific winning combinations are Chance Eye A~Chance Eye C, Cherry A~. Cherry C and watermelon are set. As shown in FIG. 34, in the AT mode shift lottery triggered by these lottery results, it is set so that the AT mode shift lottery is more likely to result in an AT mode shift win than if triggered by a lottery result other than a specific combination. If the lottery result of the current game is a specific winning combination, a specific winning combination notification process is executed in step S2408. In the specific winning combination notification process, control is performed so that the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 are notified that the lottery result of the current game is one of the above specific winning combinations. As a specific winning combination notification, for example, as shown in FIG. 55(b), three exclamation mark characters are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 in correspondence with the three stop switches 42 to 44 provided. A performance has been set up. As mentioned above, the probability of winning the AT mode shift differs depending on the type of specific winning combination, so there is a high level of interest in the type of specific winning combination, and if the specific winning combination is announced as described above, which It is thought that an attempt is being made to determine whether the winner is the winner.

Here, among the specific combinations, especially for Cherry A, Cherry B, and Cherry C, if the former Cherry A and Cherry B are won, the 9th replay prize, which is a weak cherry replay, will be possible. , if the latter Cherry C is won, there is a difference that in addition to winning the 9th replay, which is a weak cherry replay, it is possible to win the 11th replay, which is a strong cherry replay. Even if there is, there is a common point that it is possible to win the 10th replay, which is a cherry spill replay. In other words, if the 9th replay win or the 10th replay win is achieved, there is a possibility of winning any of Cherry A to Cherry C, and if the 11th replay win is achieved, Cherry A to Cherry C is possible. It is confirmed that Cherry C out of Cherry C was the winner. In this case, in order to determine which of Cherry A to Cherry C has been won, aim at the symbol that corresponds to the 11th re-game winning and make sure that the symbol stops on the active line to win Cherry C. It can be determined that it is Cherry A or Cherry B if the corresponding symbol does not become an active line even though it is aimed. On the left reel 32L, the symbol corresponding to the 11th re-game winning is the "BAR" symbol. That is, in this case, it is possible to determine whether or not it is a cherry C by at least aiming at the 9th "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L and performing a stop operation. In addition, the stop operation of the left stop switch 42 was performed from the timing when the 5th "Replay" symbol on the left reel 32L reached the middle row to the timing when the 8th "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L reached the middle row. In this case, it is possible to stop the "BAR" symbol in the middle of the left reel 32L.

By the way, when operated in this manner, the "White 7" symbol corresponding to the 1st BB or 2nd BB on the left reel 32L cannot be stopped on the active line, and the "Akakai" symbol corresponding to JAC on the left reel 32L cannot be stopped. The symbol cannot be stopped on the active line either.

If a negative determination is made in step S2403 or step S2407, or after executing the processing in step S2405, step S2406, or step S2408, the process advances to step S2409. In step S2409, continuous effect setting processing is executed. Then, in step S2410, the process for bonus AT is executed, and in step S2411, other start effect setting processes are performed, and then the start effect setting process is ended. In step S2411, for example, a process is performed to set an effect suggesting the lottery result in response to the start of the game, to turn off a lamp around the start lever 41 to notify that the operation has been accepted, and the like.

<Continuous production setting process>
The continuous effect setting process in step S2409 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 52. The continuous effect setting process is a process for executing a continuous effect before the number of games reaches 0 in the omen mode or the pseudo omen mode. A continuous performance is a series of performances performed over a plurality of games, and is a performance in which either an advantageous result notification or an unfavorable result notification is notified as a result notification in the series of performances. For example, the result notification is set to be performed at the final game of a series of performances, and more specifically, for example, in a continuous performance as a confrontation performance in which a protagonist character and an enemy character confront each other, multiple The confrontation performance is carried out throughout the game, and a performance in which the main character wins is an advantageous result notification, and a performance in which the main character loses is a disadvantageous result notification. For example, in a continuous performance that notifies the winner of the AT mode, when an advantageous result is announced, the AT mode win is announced, and when an unfavorable result is announced, the AT mode non-win is announced.

Now, in the continuous effect setting process, first in step S2501, it is determined whether or not a precursor command is included as the start command currently received. If an omen command is included, in step S2502, processing is performed to input the number of omen games in the omen mode included in the omen command into a continuous effect counter provided in the various counter areas 183b. The continuous performance counter is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of remaining games in the portent mode or pseudo portent mode and the starting game of the continuous presentation. Then, when the continuous performance counter reaches a value corresponding to the start of continuous performance, the continuous performance is started. After executing the process of step S2502, a process of setting a precursor flag in the various flag storage areas 183a is executed in step S2503. The precursor flag is a flag used by the CPU 181 to determine that the CPU 181 is in the precursor mode.

If it is determined in step S2501 that no precursor command has been received, it is determined in step S2504 whether or not a pseudo precursor command is included as the start command currently received. If a pseudo-harbinger command is included, in step S2505, the number of pseudo-harbinger games in the pseudo-harbinger mode included in the pseudo-harbinger command is input into the continuous effect counter. Then, in step S2506, a process of setting a pseudo precursor flag in the various flag storage area 183a is executed. The pseudo-harbinger flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to recognize that the pseudo-harbinger mode is in effect.

If a negative determination is made in step S2504, or after executing the process in step S2503 or step S2506, the process advances to step S2507. In step S2507, it is determined whether the omen flag or the pseudo omen flag is set. If any of these flags is set, a process of subtracting 1 from the continuous effect counter is performed in step S2508. Then, in step S2509, it is determined whether the continuous performance counter is a number corresponding to continuous performance. In this embodiment, for example, a continuous performance that is performed over four games is set, and in this case, in step S2509, if the continuous performance counter is 0 to 4, it is determined that the number corresponds to the continuous performance. judge.

If the continuous performance counter is a number corresponding to continuous performance, it is determined in step S2510 whether or not a precursor flag is set. If the omen flag is set, the process advances to step S2511, and the omen effect table is acquired from the various table storage area 182a. Then, in step S2513, the performance data of the corresponding continuous performance is specified from the omen performance table and the continuous performance counter, and the corresponding performance data is acquired from the performance data storage area 182b of the ROM 182, and as the current continuous performance. Perform the processing to set. As for the performance data of the continuous performance specified from the harbinger performance table, if the continuous performance counter is 1 to 3, it is the performance data that indicates that the continuous performance will continue until the next game, and if the continuous performance counter is 0. If so, the performance data indicates that the current continuous performance will end as an advantageous result notification.

If it is determined in step S2510 that the precursor flag is not set, that is, if the pseudo precursor flag is set, the process advances to step S2512. In step S2512, a pseudo omen effect table is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a. Then, in step S2513, the performance data of the corresponding continuous performance is specified from the pseudo-harbinger performance table and the continuous performance counter, the corresponding performance data is acquired from the performance data storage area 182b of the ROM 182, and the current continuous performance is Perform the processing to set as . If the continuous performance counter is 1 to 3, the continuous performance performance data specified from the pseudo-foreshadowing performance table is performance data indicating that the continuous performance will continue until the next game or performance data indicating that the continuous performance will not continue. , and if the continuous performance counter is 0, the performance data indicates that the current continuous performance will be terminated as an unfavorable result notification.

After performing the process of step S2513, it is determined in step S2514 whether the continuous effect counter is 0 or not. If the continuous effect counter is 0, the process of clearing the omen flag or the pseudo omen flag is performed in step S2515, and then the present continuous effect setting process is ended. If a negative determination is made in step S2507, step S2509, or step S2514, the continuous effect setting process is directly ended.

<Bonus AT processing>
Next, the bonus AT process executed in step S2410 will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 53.

In step S2601, it is determined whether the AT mode is in effect. If the AT mode is not in progress, the bonus AT process is immediately terminated. If it is in the AT mode, it is determined in step S2602 whether it is in the BB state. The state of being in AT mode and not in BB state means waiting for the start of bonus AT.More specifically, the state from the start of AT mode to BB winning, There is a situation where the state has once ended and the player is waiting for the next BB win, and a situation where the player is waiting for permission to win after winning the BB. In this case, in step S2603, the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled to perform a performance for the BB prize waiting state. The presentation for the BB prize waiting state is, for example, in addition to the presentation corresponding to the lottery result of each game (a presentation suggesting the lottery result), the presentation is such that the player can clearly recognize that he or she is in the waiting state for the bonus AT. , is set as a presentation that is different from the presentation in other states.

In the following step S2604, it is determined whether or not a prize winning permission command has been received. As already explained, the winning permission command is a command output from the main control device 101 in a game where any BB can be won while waiting for the bonus AT to start. This is a command that is output when the lottery result of the game is a loss in a situation where the player has won the BB and is waiting for the start of the bonus AT. If the winning permission command has been received, a BB winning permission notification process is executed in step S2605. In the BB winning permission notification process, for example, as shown in FIG. It notifies you of the type of BB that is being targeted, and also displays a male character shouting "Aim for it!" When announcing the type of BB that has been won, for example, in the 1st BB notification when the 1st BB has been won, the stop roll that makes the 1st BB winning (the "white 7" symbols are aligned on the middle line L2) In the 2nd BB notification when the 2nd BB is won, the 2nd BB winning is displayed (the 2nd BB winning is realized from the left with a "white 7" symbol on the middle line L2, a "white 7" symbol, It is preferable to display the symbol, ``Red 7'' (a stop roll in which the symbol stops).

If it is determined in step S2602 that the state is in the BB state and the current state is in the bonus AT state, the process advances to step S2606. In step S2606, a process of adding 1 to the BB counter provided in the various counter areas 183b is executed. The BB counter is a counter for the CPU 181 to keep track of the number of games in the bonus AT mode.More specifically, in a situation where the AT mode and the BB state are present, the AT mode ends when the current BB state ends. This is a counter for determining the performance content of each game in order to notify whether or not to play.

Here, an overview of the performance during the bonus AT state in this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57.

In this embodiment, a battle effect between the main character and the enemy character is performed in the bonus AT state, and if the AT mode continues, a continuous effect is performed in which the main character defeats all enemy characters and wins, and the AT mode continues. When the mode ends, an ending effect is performed in which the main character is defeated without defeating the enemy characters. For example, in the first game in the bonus AT state, the main character holding a machine gun is displayed as shown in FIG. 56(a1), and then three zombie enemy characters are displayed as shown in FIG. 56(a2). is displayed. In this case, if all three zombies can be defeated by the end of the battle performance, the performance will continue, and if even one zombie remains, the performance will end.

For example, in the second game in the bonus AT state, as shown in Figure 56 (b1), the main character launches an attack with a machine gun, and then as shown in Figure 56 (b2), the attack A state in which the number of enemy characters has been reduced by one (defeated) is shown. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 56 (c1), in the third game in the bonus AT state, the main character launches an attack, and as shown in Figure 56 (c2), the number of enemy characters is further reduced by one. is shown.

After that, in the fourth game in the bonus AT state, either the above-mentioned continuous performance or end performance is displayed as a result notification of the battle performance. In the case of continuous production, as shown in FIG. 57(a1), the last enemy character is blown away by the main character's attack, and as shown in FIG. 57(a2), the main character gives a battle cry and The player is shown celebrating the victory, and the characters "WIN" are displayed to clearly indicate that the result of the battle performance is a continuation performance. This allows the player to clearly understand that the AT mode will continue even after the current bonus AT state. In the case of the end effect, as shown in FIG. 57(b1), the enemy character is shown attacking, and as shown in FIG. 57(b2), the main character is shown falling on his back. At the same time, the character display such as "LOSE" clearly indicates that the result of the battle performance is the end performance. This allows the player to clearly understand that the AT mode will also end with the end of the current bonus AT state.

Returning to the explanation of the bonus AT process, after the BB counter addition process is executed in step S2606, it is determined in step S2607 whether a continuation flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. The continuation flag is set based on receiving a continuation command from the main controller 101 at the start of the bonus AT state (when winning a BB), and is cleared based on not receiving a continuation command at the start of the next bonus AT state. This flag is used by the CPU 181 to determine whether or not the battle performance during the bonus AT state is to be continued. If the continuation flag is set, in step S2608, a continuation effect table is acquired from the various table storage area 182a. Then, in step S2609, the corresponding performance data for the bonus AT state is specified from the continuation performance table and the BB counter, the corresponding performance data is acquired from the performance data storage area 182b of the ROM 182, and the current performance is Perform the processing to set as . As the performance data for the bonus AT state specified from the continuous performance table, especially when the BB counter is 4 corresponding to the fourth game in which the result is announced, the continuous performance shown in FIG. 57(a) is set. There is.

On the other hand, if the continuation flag is not set in step S2607, it is determined in step S2610 whether a revival flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. The restoration flag is set based on the fact that a continuation command is received from the main controller 101 during the bonus AT state (during the BB state), and is set based on the fact that the continuation command is not received at the start of the next bonus AT state. This is a flag that is cleared. If the revival flag is set, in step S2611, a revival effect table is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a. Then, in step S2609, the corresponding performance data for the bonus AT state is specified from the revival performance table and the BB counter, the corresponding performance data is acquired from the performance data storage area 182b of the ROM 182, and the current performance is Perform the processing to set as . As the effect data for the bonus AT state specified from the effect table for revival, especially when the BB counter is 4 corresponding to the fourth game in which the result is announced, the end effect shown in FIG. 57(b) is set. At the same time, a revival effect is set in which the main character stands up and faces the battle again until the bet operation at the start of the next game after the BB ending game when the BB counter is a value greater than 4. ing. For example, if the revival effect is set during the BB ending game, as shown in FIG. After the number of acquired medals is notified, as shown in FIG. 57(c2), the above-mentioned revival effect is performed, and the player can clearly understand that the AT mode will continue.

If neither the continuation flag nor the revival flag is set in step S2710, a non-continuation effect table is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a in step S2712. Then, in step S2609, the corresponding performance data for the bonus AT state is specified from the non-continuation performance table and the BB counter, the corresponding performance data is acquired from the performance data storage area 182b of the ROM 182, and the current performance data is obtained from the performance data storage area 182b of the ROM 182. Perform processing to set as a performance. As performance data for the bonus AT state specified from the non-continuation performance table, especially when the BB counter is 4 corresponding to the fourth game for which the result is announced, the ending performance shown in FIG. 57(b) is set. ing.

Here, the effect data obtained using the effect data table for revival and the effect data obtained using the effect data table for non-continuation, the results are announced from the starting game of the battle effect. The content up to the game is set to be the same, and the data table is set to obtain the same performance data. Therefore, efforts are being made to share performance data.

After setting the performance for the bonus AT state in step S2609, it is determined in step S2613 whether or not the lottery result of the current game is a JAC win. If the JAC is won, a JAC avoidance notification process is executed in step S2614. The JAC avoidance notification process is a process for making notifications to avoid JAC winnings, and more specifically, it is a process for making winning avoidance notifications on the auxiliary display section 65 and the like. As mentioned above, a JAC prize is established when the "red shell" symbol, "white shell" symbol, and "white 7" symbol stop on the active line from the left, and the "red shell" symbol appears on the active line (middle row) of the left reel 32L. It is possible to avoid winning a JAC prize by operating the stop switch 42 at a timing when it becomes impossible to stop. In more detail, you can avoid JAC winnings by avoiding the timing when the 0th "Replay" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the middle row and the timing when the 4th "Aka Shell" symbol reaches the middle row. be.

As shown in FIG. 55(b), the winning avoidance notification includes an effect in which three exclamation mark characters are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 in correspondence with the three stop switches 42 to 44. is set. As described above, even when the lottery result of each game is a specific winning combination, the notification shown in FIG. 55(b) is performed as the specific winning combination notification. The winning avoidance notification for avoiding a JAC winning has the same content as the specific role notification, and the production data is shared. This is because the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44 for avoiding JAC winnings and the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44 for determining the type of specific winning combination overlap. In other words, in this embodiment, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are stopped at the timing for determining the type of specific winning combination, it is possible to avoid winning the JAC prize.

If a negative determination is made in step S2604 or step S2613, or after executing the process in step S2605 or step S2614, the process advances to step S2615. In step S2615, it is determined whether a stock command has been received. If a stock command has been received, stock notification processing is executed in step S2616. In the stock notification process, the main controller 101 controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 to notify that the main controller 101 has won the stock lottery (see FIG. 36). As an effect for stock notification, for example, the auxiliary display section 65 displays characters such as "V stock!!", and the speaker 64 is set to emit an intense electronic sound such as "kyupipi kyiiiin!" This allows players to clearly understand that they have won the stock lottery. In addition, by making the performance for stock notification intense as described above, not only the player who is playing the game machine, but also the game machines installed near the game machine (for example, 3 machines) Players who are playing the game machine next to them can also understand that the above-mentioned stock notification performance is being performed, and through this, it is possible to increase the sense of superiority of the players who are playing the game machine in question. It becomes. If a negative determination is made in step S2615, or after executing the process in step S2616, the bonus AT process ends.

<Processing for setting effects when fully stopped>
Next, the full stop effect setting process executed in step S2310 will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 54. The full-stop performance setting process is a process for setting a performance to be performed at the end of one game.

In step S2701, it is determined whether an AT winning notification command has been received. If the AT mode winning notification command has been received, AT mode winning notification processing is executed in step S2702. In the AT mode winning notification process, for example, the auxiliary display section 65 displays "AT
GET! ! ” is displayed, and a corresponding sound effect is output from the speaker 64.

If it is determined in step S2701 that an AT winning notification command has not been received, it is determined in step S2703 whether or not an AT start command has been received. If an AT start command has been received, AT mode start notification processing is executed in step S2704. In the AT mode start notification process, the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that an AT mode start effect is performed according to the continuation rate of the AT mode to be started this time. For example, in the AT mode start effect, characters such as "AT START!!" are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, and the color of the character display and the effect of the character display are changed depending on the continuation rate.

Here, in this embodiment, after transitioning to AT mode, transition to bonus AT state is allowed, and then, when the bonus AT state ends without a continuation flag, the advantageous section temporarily ends, but When transitioning to the section again, the CZ mode is set. Then, in CZ mode, if the AT mode transition lottery is not won within the set number of games, the mode will be set to normal mode. However, a series of advantageous conditions are implemented. The above AT mode start performance is a performance for starting such a series of advantageous states.

If it is determined in step S2703 that an AT start command has not been received, it is determined in step S2705 whether an AT end command has been received. If an AT end command has been received, AT mode end notification processing is executed in step S2705. In the AT mode end notification process, an AT mode end effect (see FIG. 57 (c1)) is performed that notifies the end of the AT mode and also notifies the number of consecutive games and the number of medals acquired in the AT mode that will end. , controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64.

After the AT mode termination notification process is executed in step S2705, the CZ mode start notification process is executed in step S2706. As already explained, in this embodiment, when the BB state ends in a situation where the continuation flag is not set, the AT mode and advantageous section end. Then, after the advantageous section ends when the BB state ends, when re-transferring to the advantageous section, if the BB carryover flag is not set and the BB state is not (step S2101 and step S2105: NO), the CZ The configuration is such that the mode changes. The CZ mode start notification process in step S2706 is a process for setting the CZ mode start effect to be performed at the start of the next game (for example, as a bet time effect). In the process for notifying the start of CZ mode, although the AT mode itself has ended, a transition to CZ mode, which has a high probability of a lottery to transition to AT mode, has occurred, and it is notified that this is a chance to pull back from AT mode. In order to do this, for example, the auxiliary display section 65 displays characters such as "Aiming for revival!!", and the speaker 64 outputs a corresponding sound effect.

Here, the AT mode end effect set in step S2705 and the CZ mode start effect set in step S2706 are set to be executed seamlessly.More specifically, the AT mode end effect is as follows. The bet operation at the start of the game is carried out, and the effect is switched to the CZ mode start effect based on the bet operation at the start of the next game. In this case, as the effect data for the bonus AT state specified from the above-mentioned revival effect table, the AT mode end effect is executed in the end game of the bonus AT state, and then the bet operation at the start of the next game is performed. A pattern is set based on which the revival effect is executed. In other words, even if the AT mode end effect is executed, the end of AT mode will not be confirmed until the bet operation at the start of the next game, and if the revival effect is performed at the time of the bet operation, the AT mode will continue and the bet operation will continue. If a CZ mode start effect is performed at the same time, the AT mode ends. By doing this, in a configuration in which the advantageous section ends if the continuation condition is not satisfied with the end of the BB state, it is possible to avoid a situation where it is clearly understood from the production content that the continuation condition is not satisfied. be able to.

In addition, as mentioned above, CZ mode is set by moving to an advantageous section in a situation where the BB carryover flag is not set, but the CZ mode start effect is set before the CZ mode is set. This is to notify the transition to the CZ mode. By doing this, it is possible to make it seem as if AT mode and CZ mode are a series of advantageous sections, and the advantageous section when shifting to CZ mode is as if the information in the previous advantageous section was used. can be made to think that it has been inherited.

Incidentally, the eighth display segment N8 serving as the section indicator ends the display indicating that the advantageous section is in progress when the medal payout is completed in the bonus AT state end game where the advantageous section ends. Then, based on the CZ mode flag being set, the display is started by display start processing (step S2009). In other words, the advantageous effect of a series of advantageous states on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 from the start of the AT mode to the end of the CZ mode is performed seamlessly even when the mode shifts to the normal section. The section display once stops displaying when the section shifts to the normal section, and starts displaying again based on the shift to the advantageous section. By doing so, it becomes possible for the manager of the gaming hall and the like to appropriately identify fraudulent acts that take advantage of the continuity of advantageous sections, while also making it possible to suitably expect a performance effect for the players.

If it is determined in step S2705 that an AT termination command has not been received, it is determined in step S2708 whether or not a CZ termination command has been received. If a CZ end command has been received, a CZ mode end notification process is executed in step S2709.
In the CZ mode end notification processing, the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 are activated so that a CZ mode end effect (for example, display of text such as "It's a shame" and its sound effect) is performed to indicate that the CZ mode has ended. Control. Note that when the CZ mode ends, the series of advantageous states described above ends, and the CZ mode end performance can be said to be a performance that is executed at the end of the advantageous performance in the series of advantageous states.

If it is determined in step S2708 that a CZ end command has not been received, it is determined in step S2710 whether a continuation command has been received. As already explained, the continuation command is output from the main controller 101 at the start of the bonus AT state in which the continuation condition is met, as well as a command that is output when the continuation condition is met during the bonus AT state. It is. If the continuation command has been received, the process advances to step S2711, and it is determined whether or not the current game is the starting game of the bonus AT state, that is, whether or not it is a game in which any BB winning has been achieved. If the starting game is in the bonus AT state, a process of setting a continuation flag is executed in step S2712. By performing such processing, effect setting using the continuation effect table is performed in the subsequent bonus AT process (FIG. 53).

If it is determined in step S2711 that it is not the start of the bonus AT state, this means that the continuation condition is satisfied during the bonus AT state. In this case, a process of setting a restoration flag is executed in step S2713. By performing such processing, performance settings using the revival performance table are performed in the subsequent bonus AT processing (FIG. 53).

If it is determined in step S2710 that a continuation command has not been received, the process advances to step S2714, and it is determined whether a non-continuation command has been received. As already explained, the non-continuation command is a command output from the main controller 101 at the start of the bonus AT state in which the continuation condition is not satisfied. If a non-continuation command has been received, processing to clear the continuation flag and restoration flag is executed in step S2715. Specifically, if the continuation flag is set, it is cleared, and if the continuation flag is not set, that state is maintained. Further, if the resurrection flag is set, it is cleared, and if the resurrection flag is not set, that state is maintained. By performing this process, in the subsequent bonus AT process (FIG. 53), performance settings are performed using the non-continuation performance table.

After executing any of the processes in step S2702, step S2704, step S2707, step S2709, step S2712, step S2713, and step S2715, or after making a negative determination in step S2714, in step S2716, when all other stops After performing the performance setting process, the main full-stop performance setting process is ended. In step S2716, for example, the upper lamp 63 is controlled to light up in a color corresponding to the winning combination, the sound effect corresponding to the number of payouts of the winning combination is emitted from the speaker 64, or during replay. The speaker 64 may control the sound effect corresponding to the automatic bet to be emitted from the speaker 64.

<Game progress>
The flow of the game will be explained with reference to the timing charts of FIGS. 58 to 60.

First, the start and end of the advantageous section will be explained.

If the settings are changed at timing t1, such as before the gaming hall starts business, the advantageous section flag is cleared in the advantageous section information initialization process (step S205) of the main process (FIG. 16). As a result, the advantageous section ends and is set as a normal section. However, even if the above settings are changed, the information indicating that various BBs have been won (BB carryover flag) is not cleared, and the BB carryover state is maintained. The game is started, and the game moves to the advantageous section by winning the advantageous section shift lottery at timing t2. In this case, since the BB carryover flag is set, in the advantageous section transition game processing (FIG. 46), the transition to the normal mode is performed, and the ceiling game number setting processing (steps S2102 to S2404) is performed. . If, at timing t3, the AT mode is entered, for example, when the ceiling number of games is exhausted, a continuation flag is set at the start game of the AT mode (step S1707). Although there is a slight difference between the timing at which the AT mode winning flag is set and the timing at which the transition to AT mode occurs, they are collectively indicated as t3 in the figure. In addition, when shifting to AT mode, display of the eighth display segment N8 is started as a section indicator, and an AT mode start effect is performed on the auxiliary display section 65 and speaker 64, and an advantageous effect of the effect during AT mode. is started.

Thereafter, winning of the BB carried over in the game resulting from the timing error at t4 is allowed. In this case, in the second section display process (FIG. 48), the AT mode flag is set and the BB winning is in a situation where the transition permission condition is satisfied, so the advantageous section is not ended (step S2211: NO). ). Further, when the BB winning is established, in the AT continuation setting process (FIG. 44), the continuation determination at the time of the BB winning (steps S1901 to S1908) is carried out. For example, if the stock counter is 1 (step S1902: NO) or if you win the continuation lottery even if the stock counter is 0 (step S1906: YES), the continuation flag is maintained and the continuation command is sent to the main controller. 101 and is output to the display control device 81 . As a result, in the bonus AT state starting from the timing t4, a performance is performed using the continuation performance table.

When the BB state ends at timing t5, in the continuation determination at the end of BB (steps S1914 to S1918), processing is performed to continue the AT mode, and the continuation flag is maintained (step S1916: YES). ). As a result, in the second section display process (FIG. 48), since the continuation flag is set and the BB ends in a situation where the continuation condition is satisfied, the advantageous section is not ended (step S2213: YES).

Shortly after the BB state ends at timing t5, one of the BBs wins at timing t6. Thereafter, in the game resulting from the timing error at t7, the winning BB at t6 is allowed to win. In this case as well, the advantageous section does not end because the BB prize is won in a situation where the AT mode flag is set. However, in the AT continuation setting process at timing t7, the continuation lottery is not won, indicating that the continuation condition is not satisfied, and in this case, the continuation flag is cleared (step S1907) and the non-continuation command is issued. It is output from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81. As a result, in the bonus AT state starting from timing t7, a performance is performed using a non-continuation performance table.

If the BB state ends at timing t8 and the stock lottery is not won by the timing of t8, the AT mode flag is cleared in the continuation determination at the end of BB at t8 (step S1917). ). Then, in the second section display process (FIG. 48), since the continuation flag is not set and the BB ends in a situation where the continuation condition is not satisfied, processing for ending the advantageous section is performed (step S2213). :NO). Note that during the BB state that ends at timing t8, no transition to the advantageous section occurs, so the transition completed flag is not set. Further, at the end of the advantageous section, the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator ends. On the other hand, at timing t8, an AT end command is output from the main controller 101 to the display control device 81, so the AT mode end effect is performed, the CZ mode start effect is performed, and the auxiliary display A series of advantageous effects from the AT mode start effect on the section 65 and the speaker 64 to the effect during the CZ mode are continued.

Shortly after the BB state and the advantageous section end at t8, the process re-transfers to the advantageous section by an advantageous section transfer lottery process (t9). In this case, the transition is to the advantageous section before the first BB or the second BB is carried over, and in the advantageous section transition game process (FIG. 46), the CZ mode transition process (step S2107 and step S2108) is performed. In other words, the advantageous section transitioning at t9 is set to the CZ mode. After that, at timing t10, one of the BBs wins, and the BB carries over. Furthermore, when a shift to the CZ mode occurs at timing t9, the display on the section display is also restarted. Note that the advantageous presentation on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 continues including the timing from t8 to t9.

In the CZ mode, the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery is set higher than in the normal mode. Therefore, for example, if the AT mode transition lottery is won at timing t11 during the CZ mode, transition to the bonus AT state is allowed again (t12). The figure shows a case where it is determined that the continuation is not continued in the continuation determination (steps S1901 to S1908) at the time of BB winning, and the continuation flag set at timing t11 is cleared at timing t12. .

Since the continuation flag is not set at the timing t13 when the BB state ends, when the BB state ends at t13, the advantageous section also ends. Then, at timing t14, if the first BB or the second BB is won, that is, if the first BB with repeated repetition or the second BB with repeated repetition is won, the game shifts to an advantageous section. In this case, the CZ mode is set because the transition is to an advantageous section in a situation where the BB winning has not been carried over. Note that the BB carryover flag is set when a BB winning game is not achieved in a BB winning game, when the game ends. Therefore, from the next game after t14, which has shifted to the advantageous period, the BB will be carried over (t15). Further, similarly to the timings from t8 to t9 described above, the display of the section display ends at the timing of t13, and the display of the section display resumes at the timing of t14. On the other hand, a series of advantageous presentations between the AT mode and the CZ mode are continued on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64, including the timing from t13 to t14.

If the CZ mode that was shifted to at t14 ends at timing t16 without winning the AT mode shift lottery, the advantageous section is maintained but the mode shifts to the normal mode. In this case, upon transition to the normal mode (when ending the CZ mode), a process for setting the number of ceiling games is performed (step S1806). In the normal mode, the game will transition to the AT mode depending on whether the set ceiling number of games is played or if the AT mode transition lottery is won. Further, since the mode shifts to the normal mode at timing t16, the display on the section display ends, and the advantageous effects on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 also end.

When the setting is changed at the timing t17, the advantageous section flag is cleared as described above, so the game starts from the normal section after the setting is changed. In this case as well, since the BB winning information (BB carryover flag) is not cleared by changing the settings, the game will be started in a carryover state. Then, when shifting to the advantageous section at timing t18, the advantageous section is set as the normal mode instead of the CZ mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 59, a description will be given of a situation in which a BB winning is achieved in a situation where the BB winning permission condition is not satisfied (a situation other than AT mode).

When transitioning to the advantageous section at timing t21 in the BB carryover state, the normal mode is set and the ceiling number of games is set. As mentioned above, the transition to AT mode occurs when the ceiling number of games is exhausted (t24), but here the case is shown in which the BB winning is achieved at timing t22, which is before the ceiling number of games is exhausted. . In this case, in the second section display process, processing for ending the advantageous section is performed as a BB win in a situation where the winning permission condition is not satisfied (step S2211: YES).

Even in the BB state, the lottery for moving to an advantageous section is carried out, but soon after the shift to the BB state, the lottery for moving to an advantageous section is won at timing t23, and a shift to the advantageous section occurs. In the advantageous section transition game process (FIG. 46) in this case, as an advantageous section transition during the BB state, a transition completion flag is set and a ceiling game number setting process is performed (step S2105: YES).

Here, during the BB state, the AT mode transition lottery is not performed (step S1201: YES). Furthermore, in the BB state, the number of ceiling games is not counted (step S1216). Therefore, no matter how long the BB state continues, the transition to the AT mode will not occur in the BB state, and each game in the BB state will not contribute to the ease of transition to the AT mode. Moreover, in the BB state, which is not in the AT mode, the push order notification does not occur as described above, so the number of medals held decreases. In other words, if the game is shifted to the BB state without shifting to the AT mode, a disadvantageous event will occur for the player. Incidentally, the BB state continues until 140 medals, which is the upper limit number of medals, are paid out.

When the BB state ends at timing t25, although the continuation flag is not set, the advantageous section does not end due to the transition completed flag set in step S2106 as described above. Then, shortly after the BB state ends, the BB is won at timing t26, and the BB carryover state again occurs.

Similarly, if a BB win is established at the timing t27, which is before the timing t31 when the number of ceiling games set at t23 is reached and before the transition to AT mode occurs, the advantageous section ends. . Then, at timing t28 during the BB state, the game shifts to the advantageous section, and the transition completed flag and the number of ceiling games are set. Then, when the BB state ends at timing t29, the state shifts to the BB carryover state again shortly thereafter at timing t30.

The AT mode winning flag is set by playing the normal mode games until the timing t32 when the number of ceiling games set at t28 is reached. However, since the number of ceiling games is not counted during the BB state from t28 to t29, the games that contribute to the subtraction of the number of ceiling games are the games from t29 to t32. Also, as mentioned above, when the AT mode winning flag is set, the portent mode is set, but if a BB win is established at t33 before the AT mode winning flag is announced (before shifting to AT mode), the advantageous section ends. Therefore, the AT mode winning flag is not cleared. However, the BB state in which the prize was won at t33 is not a BB in AT mode, so it is not a bonus AT state, no increase in medals is expected, and the precursor mode does not proceed during the BB state. In this case, the precursor mode is restarted from the timing t34 when the BB state that won the prize at t33 ends, and the AT mode winning notification is performed at the timing t35 when the number of games in the precursor mode becomes 0.

Next, a mechanism for increasing medals in the bonus AT state will be described with reference to FIG. 60.

When a shift to the advantageous section occurs during the BB carryover state at timing t41, the normal mode is set as described above. As described above, if a BB win is established during the normal mode at the timing t42, the advantageous section ends and the advantageous section re-enters the advantageous section at the timing t43 during the BB state.

As already explained, the BB state is set to the BB 1st state before winning the JAC, the BB 2nd state after winning the JAC and carrying over the JAC winning, and the BB 3rd state after winning the JAC. . When the BB state is started at t42, first the BB first state is entered. In this BB first state, it is possible to win the JAC in addition to the pressing order bell. In a situation where the JAC carryover flag is not set, symbol number priority control is performed (see Figure 29), so even if the push order at the time of winning the push order bell matches the first minor combination, Winners of the 4th to 27th minor roles, which pay out one piece other than the 1 minor role, are given priority. In other words, the first small winning combination, in which 15 coins are paid out when the push order bell is won, is not established.

If a JAC prize is won at timing t44, but the JAC prize cannot be established in the JAC winning game, the BB second state is assumed as a JAC carryover state. In this case, since the JAC carryover flag is set, number priority control will be performed (see Figure 29), and if the pressing order when the pressing order bell is won matches the first minor winning combination, the first The winning of the small role is achieved, and it becomes possible to receive 15 medals. However, since this situation is in the normal mode and the push order is not announced, it is rare (1/6 probability) that the push order when the push order bell is won matches the first minor winning combination. Many medals are not expected to increase.

If a bonus (1st BB, 2nd BB, JAC) and a small role or replay are won at the same time, the small role or replay will be given priority, and in the BB 2nd state, there will be no winning result. (See Figure 27), it is difficult to win a JAC prize in the BB 2nd state, and basically, once the BB 2nd state is reached, the BB state at the timing of t45. The BB second state is maintained until the end of the period. Incidentally, the case where a JAC winning occurs in the BB second state is a case where the winning small winning combination is missed and the JAC symbol can be stopped on the active line.

Shortly after the BB state ends at t45, the state shifts to the BB carryover state again at timing t46. When the game shifts to the AT mode at the timing t47 and the BB winning is established at the timing t48, the bonus AT state is started as the BB state in the AT mode. This bonus AT state starts from the BB first state as described above. If the JAC is won at timing t49, the winning avoidance notification (FIG. 55(b)) is generated in the JAC avoidance notification process (step S2614) as described above. Here, a case is shown in which a JAC winning is established without following the winning avoidance notification, and in this case, the BB third state is entered from the timing t48.

In the BB third state, the winning probability of the no-questions-asked bell improves, making it easier to win the first small winning combination. Since only the first minor role is associated with the no-questions-asked bell, the first minor role will be won regardless of the order of pressing or priority control at the time of winning. The appearance rate of the first minor role when the unquestioned bell is won in the BB third state is higher than the first minor role appearance rate when the push order bell is won in the BB first state or the BB second state. Under a situation where forward notification does not occur, the BB third state can be said to be more advantageous than the BB first state and the BB second state.

The BB state ends at timing t50, and here the case is shown in which the continuation condition is not satisfied and the advantageous section also ends. Thereafter, a re-transition to the advantageous section occurs at timing t51, and since it is a transition to the advantageous section in a situation where the BB winning has not been carried over, the CZ mode is set. If you win BB at timing t52 and achieve a BB win at timing t53, which is before the transition to AT mode occurs, as in the case of t43, you will be in the BB state where press order notification does not occur. .

However, since the BB winning at the timing t53 is a BB winning during the CZ mode, the advantageous section does not end and the CZ mode is maintained. Furthermore, counting of the number of games in the CZ mode is stopped during the BB state. Note that during the BB state, the AT mode transition lottery is not performed.

Since the press order notification is not generated, if the JAC prize cannot be established when the JAC prize is won at the timing t54, the BB second state will occur. That is, from t53 to t54 is the BB first state, and from t54 to t55 when the BB state ends is the BB second state. If the push order matches the first minor role in the BB second state, the first minor role win can be achieved, but since the press order notification does not occur in the first place, the appearance rate of the first minor role win is lower than that of the BB third state.

As mentioned above, even if the BB state has transitioned to the CZ mode, the AT mode transition lottery will not be held during the BB state, but the number of CZ mode games will not be counted (see Figure 43). Even at the timing t55 when the BB state ends, the CZ mode can continue again.

If a BB win is won at timing t56 and a shift to AT mode occurs at timing t57, when a BB win is established at t58, a bonus AT state is started. If the JAC is won at timing t59, a winning avoidance notification (FIG. 55(b)) is generated by the JAC avoidance notification process. Here, a case is shown in which a JAC win is avoided in accordance with the win avoidance notification, and in this case, the BB second state is entered from the timing t59.

In the BB second state during the bonus AT state, it is possible to achieve the first small winning combination by following the press order notification when the press order bell is won. In this case, the appearance rate of the first minor winning combination is six times that of the second BB state in which press order notification does not occur, and many medals can be expected to be won until the timing t60 when the BB state ends.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

In the second section display process, if the 1st BB win or 2nd BB win is achieved during AT mode, the advantageous section is not ended and the transition is made to the bonus AT state. By configuring the advantageous section to end when a winning is achieved, in AT mode each BB state can be used as a bonus AT state to enjoy the benefit of increasing the number of medals, and in normal mode This makes it possible to prevent the player from enjoying the benefits of the bonus AT state, and to greatly vary the profit in the BB state depending on the timing of the BB win. Therefore, it is possible to increase interest in the timing of BB winnings, and to play a game in which even if a BB winning is won in the normal mode, the player waits so that no BB winnings are made until the transition to the AT mode.

After making a BB win in the normal mode and moving to the normal section, when moving again to the advantageous section, the normal mode is set. That is, since the advantageous section transfer lottery process and the section display first process for advantageous section transfer are performed even during the BB state, after the advantageous section ends based on the BB win, the advantageous section transfer during the BB state is performed. If a shift to an advantageous section is won in the lottery process, a shift to the advantageous section occurs. In this case, the configuration is such that the normal mode is set even if the transition is to an advantageous section in a situation where the BB carryover flag is not set. In this way, even if a player wins a BB prize in the normal mode, it is possible to prevent an event from occurring in which the advantageous section that re-enters after that becomes advantageous, and to encourage the player not to win a BB prize in the normal mode.

Moreover, when the advantageous section ends, the advantageous section information is initialized and the number of ceiling games is erased (initialization processing of the ceiling counter), and when transitioning to normal mode, the number of ceiling games is When the setting process is performed, if a BB is won during the normal mode, the ceiling number of games is reset, and the number of games up to that point is wasted. For this reason as well, it is possible to urge the player not to win a BB prize during the normal mode.

In the bonus AT state, which occurs when a BB win is made during AT mode, the JAC carryover flag is set by avoiding a JAC win that could be won during the BB state, and the JAC carryover flag is set when the JAC carryover flag is set. The structure is such that the first small winning combination, in which 15 coins are paid out, can be achieved based on the winning of the first bell. In other words, in the BB state, in order to achieve the first minor prize winning with 15 coins paid out, it is not enough for the push order notification to occur when the push order bell is won, and it is also necessary that the JAC carryover flag is set. Become. By doing this, even if you make a BB win in a situation other than AT mode, and the order of operations happens to correspond to the first minor win when the push order bell is won, the JAC carryover flag must be set. In this case, the first small winning prize will not be established. In addition, even if the JAC carryover flag is set, the first minor prize winning will not be achieved unless the operation order corresponding to the first minor prize winning is matched, so the first minor prize winning will not be achieved in the BB state in the normal mode. It is now possible to raise the hurdle for winning small prizes, prevent BB winnings in normal mode, and increase the difference in advantage with BB state (bonus AT state) in AT mode. Become.

The AT lottery process is configured to be able to execute the AT mode transition lottery in the BB carryover state where the BB carryover flag is set, and furthermore, the process for transitioning to the AT mode in the BB carryover state can also be executed in the winning result handling process. With this configuration, when a BB win is won in a normal section or a normal mode, it is possible to suitably realize a gaming property in which the BB win is maintained without being established until a shift to the AT mode occurs.

In the normal gaming state, the 1st BB is won by the 1st BB with repeated reps, and the 2nd BB is won by the 2nd BB with repeated reps, and the winning probabilities of these are approximately 1 in 20.1 and approximately 6.7, respectively. 1/5, and the total is about 1/5. This probability is higher than the probability (approximately 1 in 7.30) of winning any of the replays from Normal Reply A to Normal Reply C, Chance A to Chance C, and Cherry A to Cherry C, After the BB state ends, it can be said that the configuration is such that there is a relatively high probability of winning any BB. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably achieve consecutive winnings in the bonus AT state.

Cherry A to Cherry C, which trigger the AT mode transition lottery, have greatly different winning probabilities in the AT mode transition lottery. Therefore, it is highly likely that players will be interested in which cherry triggered the AT mode transition lottery. Cherry A to Cherry C have different winning modes, and in order to determine which cherry won, it is necessary to aim at the "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L and perform a stop operation. The operation mode performed by aiming at the "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L is an operation mode in which the "white 7" symbol corresponding to the first BB winning or the second BB winning cannot be stopped on the active line. By doing so, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of an event in which a player who is looking forward to the transition to the AT mode mistakenly wins the first BB prize or the second BB prize.

If the AT mode winning flag is set, the advantageous section is not ended even if the BB winning is in the normal mode. By doing this, you can avoid inconveniences such as when you accidentally win a BB prize even though you won in AT mode, the advantageous period ends and your AT mode win disappears. It can be done. However, even if the AT mode winning flag is set, if a BB win is established, the AT mode flag has not yet been set, so the bonus AT state cannot be enjoyed. By doing this, fairness is ensured between players who were able to detect AT mode winnings early on and players who were not able to do so. This allows you to enjoy the performance to the very end.

In this embodiment, when the BB state ends, the advantageous section is terminated and the transition is made to the normal section. However, when re-transferring to the advantageous section, the CZ mode is set on the condition that the BB carryover flag is not set. It is configured to do this. By doing this, when the bonus AT state ends, if you temporarily end the advantageous section and then re-enter the advantageous section immediately after, the BB carryover flag is not set, so the CZ mode is set. This makes it possible to set the CZ mode after the bonus AT state.

If the BB carryover flag is set at the time of transition to an advantageous section, the normal mode is set.For example, if a game hall closes during the AT mode, the advantageous section can be changed by changing the settings. If the initialization processing of the information for the AT mode is executed, it is possible to delete the information in the AT mode and prevent the information in the AT mode from being carried over to the next day. Even if it is set, as long as the BB carryover flag is maintained, it is possible to avoid being set to the CZ mode first thing in the morning.

On the other hand, if you turn on the power of the gaming machine while operating the reset switch 72, RAM clearing processing is executed in the main processing, so not only the advantageous section information but also the BB carryover flag, BB status flag, etc. Various information stored in RAM 106 is initialized. In this case, after the power is turned on, the vehicle will be in a normal section and the BB carryover flag will not be set, so if a shift to an advantageous section occurs thereafter, there is a high possibility that the CZ mode will be set. By doing this, the game hall manager can make settings to make it more difficult to set to CZ mode or to make it easier to set to CZ mode first thing in the morning, etc., and to adjust the specifications of the game machine. It becomes possible to make game settings by making good use of it.

In addition, even if it is necessary to temporarily cut off the power to the gaming machine (put it in a power-off state), for example, if a malfunction occurs with the gaming machine in AT mode while the gaming hall is open, the settings If no changes are made (unless the setting key insertion hole 73 is turned on), the initialization process of advantageous section information will not be executed in the main process, so the information in AT mode will be maintained, and the BB carryover flag will be will also be maintained. In this case, it is possible to restart the game while inheriting the information in the AT mode before the power was shut off.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the advantageous section is ended when the BB state ends in a situation where the continuation flag is not set. By doing this, when the AT mode ends, the advantageous section ends in a situation where the BB carryover flag is not set, and when moving to the advantageous section again, the advantageous section transition without the BB carryover flag is performed. , the CZ mode will be set. This makes it possible to realize a pullback mode after the end of AT mode while temporarily ending the advantageous section, and to continue a state that is substantially more advantageous than normal mode (AT mode and CZ mode) across the advantageous section. It is possible to realize gameplay such as By creating a configuration in which a substantially advantageous state can continue across such an advantageous section, even in an advantageous section where forced termination is performed due to forced termination conditions such as the maximum number of games and the maximum number of increased coins, It is now possible for the above-mentioned advantageous state to exceed the upper limit number of games and the upper limit increased number of coins.

When ending the advantageous section at the end of the BB state, the CZ mode start effect is performed following the AT mode end effect. That is, the configuration is such that the CZ mode start effect is executed in the BB end game before the transition to the CZ mode. By doing so, it becomes possible to enjoy the game without making the player conscious that the advantageous state continues across the advantageous section.

On the other hand, when the advantageous section ends at the end of the BB state, the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator ends, and when the CZ mode is set at the time of transition to the advantageous section, the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator ends. The configuration is such that the display starts. In other words, as mentioned above, while the advantageous display regarding the advantageous state on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 continues across the advantageous section, the display on the section display does not continue across the advantageous section; At the end of the section, the display is temporarily ended. By doing this, for example, the administrator of the game hall can confirm that the advantageous period has ended, and the number of games and the number of increase/decrease in which the advantageous period has ended is the upper limit of the advantageous period. It is possible to assist in discovering fraudulent activities that take advantage of the fact that the number of games and the number of increased maximum coins can be exceeded without being restricted.

If the continuation flag is set, the advantageous section will not end when the BB state ends, so by winning the BB again after the BB state ends, you can re-enter the bonus AT state. It is possible to realize an interesting game in which the first BB state and the second BB state, which are bonus states in which the small win probability (JAC probability) can change, are used as bonus AT states to win consecutive wins.

In a configuration where the advantageous section ends when the BB state ends in a situation where the continuation flag is not set, if the advantageous section is ended at the time of winning a BB prize, the advantageous section will be restarted at the end of the BB state in which the prize was won. I tried not to let it terminate. More specifically, if the transition is made to an advantageous section during the BB state, the advantageous section ends when the prize is won. Even if the continuation flag is not set, if the transition completed flag is set, the advantageous section will not end. This makes it possible to eliminate unnecessary processing and simplify the processing configuration without unnecessarily terminating the advantageous section.

When moving to an advantageous section in a situation where the BB carryover flag is not set, in a configuration set to CZ mode, the first replay, such as the repeat overlap 1st BB and the repeat overlap 2nd BB, as a trigger for the shift to the advantageous section. The configuration is such that each BB is won based on the overlap result, and the game shifts to an advantageous zone in the winning game of the first BB or the second BB in the normal zone. By doing this, even if you are in a normal section and the BB carryover flag is not set, you can move to an advantageous section triggered by the overlap result of the 1st BB or 2nd BB. Even if a transition to an advantageous section is triggered by another advantageous section transition trigger result that does not overlap with the second BB (normal reply A, etc.), the CZ mode will be set in both cases. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of not being set to CZ mode even though the advantageous section has ended when AT mode ends. Despite this, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of not being set to CZ mode.

<Modification 1>
In this modification, the ease with which the BB winning permission condition is satisfied in the AT mode differs depending on the type of winning BB. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing bonus AT start processing in this modification. As already explained, the bonus AT start process is a process (step S1006) that is executed in the lottery result corresponding process (FIG. 30) in a situation where the AT mode has been won.

In step S2801, it is determined whether the state is BB. If it is in the BB state, the process for starting the bonus AT is immediately ended. If it is not in the BB state, the process advances to step S2802, and it is determined whether or not it is in the AT mode. If the AT mode is not in progress, the process for starting the bonus AT is immediately ended. If it is not in the BB state and is in the AT mode, the process advances to step S2803, and it is determined whether the transition permission flag is set.

If the transfer permission flag is not set, it is determined in step S2804 whether any BB winning flag is set. If the BB has been won, the process advances to step S2805 to execute processing for determining the type of BB that has been won. If none of the BB winning flags are set in step S2804, and after executing the process in step S2805, the current stock amount is determined by checking the stock counter in step S2806. Then, in step S2807, a process of acquiring a transfer permission lottery table from the various table storage areas 105a is executed, and in step S2808, a transfer permission lottery process is executed. In the transfer permission lottery process, a transfer permission lottery is performed to determine whether or not the BB winning permission condition is satisfied.

As shown in FIG. 62, the transfer permission lottery table is based on whether or not a BB has been won, and if a BB has been won, the type of BB that has been won, the number of stocks, and the game lottery results. have different winning probabilities. Specifically, it is easier to win the transfer permission lottery when you win the BB than when you do not win the BB, and when you win the BB, it is easier to win the transfer permission lottery than when you win the 1st BB. It will be easier to win the transfer permission lottery if you have won 2BB, and it will be easier to win the transfer permission lottery if you have less stock (if there is none) than if you have a lot of stock (if there is). is set to . In other words, if you have won the 2nd BB and have less stock, it is easiest to win the transfer permission lottery, and if you have not won any BB and have stock, it is the least likely to win the transfer permission lottery. It has become.

Note that in this embodiment, the probability of winning the transfer permission lottery is the same regardless of the lottery result of the game, but the winning probability may be different depending on the lottery result. In addition, in this embodiment, the transfer permission lottery is performed even if the result is an incorrect result, but it may be configured such that the transfer permission lottery is not performed in the case of an incorrect result.Conversely, while the transfer permission lottery is performed in the case of an incorrect result, the transfer permission lottery is performed when the result is an incorrect result. A configuration may be adopted in which the transfer permission lottery is not performed for winning combinations or replay results.

After executing the transfer permission lottery process in step S2808, it is determined in step S2809 whether or not the transfer permission lottery has been won. If the winner has been selected, a process for setting a transfer permission flag is executed in step S2810.

If it is determined in step S2803 that the transition permission flag is set, if it is determined in step S2809 that the transition permission lottery has not been won, or after the process of setting the transition permission flag is executed in step S2810. If so, the process advances to step S2811. In step S2811, it is determined whether any BB winning flag is set. If it has not been set, the process for starting the bonus AT is immediately terminated. If any BB has been won, it is determined in step S2812 whether or not the lottery result of the current game is a losing result. The process of step S2812 is similar to the process of step S1504 described above, and is a process of determining whether the game is a game in which a BB win can be established.

If the result is not a loss, the process for starting the bonus AT is immediately ended. If the result is a failure, it is determined in step S2813 whether the above-mentioned transfer permission flag is set. If it has been set, in step S2814 a process is executed to set the winning permission command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the bonus AT start process is ended. If the transfer permission flag is not set, in step S2815 a process is executed to set the winning avoidance command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the bonus AT start process is ended.

That is, in this modification, even if the mode is shifted to the AT mode, unless the shift permission lottery is won, the winning permission command during the BB carryover state is not output. In addition, the migration permission lottery will be held before the BB is won.

Next, the process for consecutive ATs in this modification will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 63.

In step S2901, it is determined whether the camera is in any BB state. If it is not in the BB state, it is determined in step S2902 whether the transition permission flag is set. If the transfer permission flag is not set, stock lottery processing is executed in steps S2903 to S2918. The processing from step S2903 to step S2918 is similar to the processing from step S1403 to step S1418 described above.

However, in this modification, if the transfer permission flag is set in step S2902, it is determined in step S2919 whether any BB winning flag is set, and if not set, the transfer permission flag is set. , the process advances to step S2907. As already explained, step S2907 is a process of acquiring the stock lottery table after the AT mode winning notification and before the transition to AT mode, and is a process for performing the stock lottery on a table with a relatively high probability of winning the stock lottery. This is the process (FIG. 37).

As described above, in this modification, the transition permission flag can be set by winning the transition permission lottery that is conducted before the BB is won. Then, by making it relatively easier to win the stock lottery in a situation where the transfer permission flag is set before winning the BB, by becoming a transfer permission winner before winning the BB, there will be fewer opportunities to receive the stock lottery. It can be used as compensation for

In addition, as mentioned above, in this modification, it is easier to win the transfer permission lottery in the situation where the 1st BB is won and the situation where the 2nd BB is won. It has become. Therefore, in the situation where the second BB is won, the bonus AT state will start relatively quickly, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the number of medals held due to the situation of waiting for the BB prize between the bonus AT states. . However, even when waiting for the start of the bonus AT state, the stock lottery is performed as described above, so if you compare the situation where the first BB is won and the situation where the second BB is won, the stock lottery From the viewpoint of receiving more lottery tickets, it is preferable for the player to win the first BB. By doing this, for example, when the number of stocks is small or in the early stage of the transition to AT mode, it will make people expect to win the first BB to increase the number of stocks, and the number of stocks will be sufficient. In a situation where there are many medals or near the upper limit of the advantageous section, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the number of medals held during the bonus AT state and make the player look forward to winning the second BB. By doing so, it is possible to vary the expected BB depending on the situation, diversify the games, and provide games that meet the various needs of the players.

FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing bonus AT processing in this modification.

In this modification, the contents of the process in the BB win waiting state are different from the bonus AT process in the first embodiment. That is, steps S3001 to S3003 are similar to steps S2601 to S2603 described above, and effect setting processing is performed in the AT mode and not in the BB state (step S3003). Thereafter, in step S3004, it is determined whether or not a winning permission command has been received, and if it has been received, a BB winning permission notification process is executed in step S3005. In this case, the winning permission notification shown in FIG. 55(a) is performed on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64.

If the winning permission command has not been received, it is determined in step S3006 whether or not a winning avoidance command has been received. If the winning prize avoidance command has been received, in step S3007, a BB winning prize avoidance notification process is executed. The BB avoidance notification process is a process for making notifications to avoid BB winnings, and more specifically, it is a process for making winning avoidance notifications on the auxiliary display section 65 and the like. As mentioned above, when the "white 7" symbol, "white shell" symbol, and "cherry" symbol stop on the active line from the left, the 1st BB winning is established, and from the left, the "white 7" symbol, the "white shell" symbol, and the "cherry" symbol stop. When the "BAR" symbol stops, the 1st BB winning is established, but by performing the stop operation of the stop switch 42 at the timing when the "White 7" symbol becomes unstoppable on the active line (middle row) of the left reel 32L, the 1st BB and It is possible to avoid winning the second BB. More specifically, by avoiding the timing when the 19th "White Shell" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the middle row and the timing when the third "White 7" symbol reaches the middle row, you can stop the 1BB and the 1st BB. It is possible to avoid winning 2BB.

As the notification for avoiding BB winning, the auxiliary display section 65, speaker 64, etc. are controlled so that the winning avoidance notification shown in FIG. 55(b) is performed. As mentioned above, the notification shown in FIG. 55(b) is also performed when the lottery result of each game is a specific winning combination, or when the notification is to avoid winning a JAC prize. The winning avoidance notification for avoiding a BB winning is also the same as the winning avoidance notification for avoiding a JAC winning and the specific role notification, so that the performance data can be shared. This is based on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44 to avoid winning the 1st BB or the 2nd BB, the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44 to distinguish the type of specific combination, and the timing of operating the stop switches 42 to 44 to avoid winning the JAC prize. This is because the operation timings of the stop switches 42 to 44 overlap. In other words, in this embodiment, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are stopped at the timing for determining the type of specific winning combination, it is possible to avoid not only the JAC winning but also the 1st BB winning and the 2nd BB winning. .

In this way, by operating in an operation mode that allows the type of specific combination to be determined, it is possible to avoid not only JAC but also the first BB and second BB winnings. This makes it possible for players who are not accustomed to playing games to avoid being disadvantaged by erroneously winning the first BB prize or the second BB prize.

As described above, in this modified example, in a situation where the first BB or the second BB is won, the transition to the bonus AT state is not allowed immediately, but by winning the transition permission lottery, the bonus AT state Since we have adopted a configuration that allows transition to , it is possible to obtain more medals due to the consecutive winnings of the bonus AT state, but by skillfully adjusting the winning probability of the transition permission lottery, we can increase the speed of increase in medals. It becomes possible to skillfully adjust the speed at which medals decrease while waiting for permission to transition between bonus AT states.

In this case, although the probability of winning the 1st BB and the situation of winning the 2nd BB are the same as the probability of a losing result that makes it possible to win each BB, winning the transfer permission lottery mentioned above By making the probabilities different, it is possible to vary the speed at which medals are increased or decreased when each BB is won, without individually setting a lottery table for the carryover state of each BB.

Note that the probability of a winning result that makes it possible to win each BB does not have to be completely the same in the situation where the first BB is won and the situation where the second BB is won, and it may be difficult for the player to discern. may differ to a certain extent. In this case, the probability difference between winning the 1st BB and winning the 2nd BB is greater than the probability difference between winning the 1st BB and winning the 2nd BB. It is preferable that the probability difference between the probability of winning the migration permission lottery and the current situation is larger.

Here, since the configuration is such that the transition from the normal mode to the AT mode can occur through the AT mode transition lottery, and after the transition to AT mode, the transition to the bonus AT state can occur through the transition permission lottery, the transition to the bonus AT state is possible. In order to make this happen, it is necessary to win in multiple draws such as the AT mode shift lottery and the shift permission lottery. By doing this, it becomes more difficult to transition to the bonus AT state, and there may be situations where you have not even won the AT mode transition lottery (normal mode), or a state where you have won the AT mode transition lottery but are allowed to transition. It is possible to fully enjoy the transition to the bonus AT state through multiple states, including each state, such as the state where you have not won the lottery (AT mode and before the bonus AT state). Become.

In the configuration in which the state is transferred to the bonus AT state through multiple stages, in the above modification, it is easier to win the transfer permission lottery in a situation where the second BB is carried over than in a situation where the first BB is carried over. For example, after shifting to AT mode in a situation where the 2nd BB is being carried over, the bonus AT state will be reached relatively earlier than when shifting to AT mode in a situation where the 1st BB is being carried over. A transition to will occur. Moreover, even between the bonus AT states, if you win the second BB, you will transition to the bonus AT state earlier than if you win the first BB, so the continuous transition in the bonus AT state Sho Speed is better when he wins the 2nd BB. By doing this, it becomes possible to adjust the number of games played and the decrease in the number of held medals after transitioning to AT mode or during the bonus AT state depending on the winning BB, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game by diversifying the game. .

Since the stock lottery will not be held after winning any BB and winning the transfer permission lottery, the easier it is to win the transfer permission lottery, the fewer times the stock lottery will be held, and the more likely you are to win the stock lottery. It becomes difficult. In other words, the harder it is to win the transfer permission lottery, the easier it is to win the stock lottery. By doing this, it is possible to effectively track the point where the number of medals held may decrease due to the lengthening of the number of games after transitioning to the AT mode or between bonus AT states, by the number of consecutive games (stock number). In addition, for example, in a situation where the number of stocks is small, it is difficult to win the transfer permission lottery, and you may expect to win the 1st BB (winning the 1st BB), which is likely to receive a large number of stock lottery tickets, and stock In situations where there are many medals, the type of BB that you expect to win depends on the number of medals in stock, such as expecting to win the 2nd BB (winning the 2nd BB) to prevent the decrease in the number of medals you have. This increases the fun of the game.

In the lottery process of each game, the winning probability of the 1st BB and the winning probability of the 2nd BB are different, and by adjusting the winning probabilities of the 1st BB and 2nd BB, the number of medals held during the bonus AT state can be reduced. It is possible to adjust or adjust the number of consecutive hits. Incidentally, as mentioned above, in this embodiment, it is easier to win in the 2nd BB than in the 1st BB, so a situation where it is easy to win the transfer permission lottery and difficult to receive the stock lottery is likely to occur during the 2nd BB carryover. This is a configuration in which the number of medals held between bonus AT states decreases less, and the expected increase in the number of medals per game during AT mode is relatively large, including games between bonus AT states. It can be done. On the other hand, if the 1st BB is configured to be easier to win than the 2nd BB, the gameplay will tend to be carried over to the 1st BB where it is difficult to win the transfer permission lottery and it is easy to receive the stock lottery. If a transition occurs, the setting is such that the user can enjoy the AT mode for a relatively long time.

Since the probability of winning the transition permission lottery is higher after the BB is won than before the BB is won, it is possible to shift to the bonus AT state relatively quickly after the BB is won. In addition, the probability of winning the stock lottery is set to be higher before winning the BB than after winning the BB, so before winning the BB, you can expect to win the stock lottery, and after winning the BB, you can reach the bonus AT state. The content of the game can be greatly different before and after winning the BB, such as making the player expect to win the transfer permission lottery in order to suppress the decrease in medals, and the interest in the game can be improved.

As described above, in a situation where the transfer permission lottery has not been won, in the push order notification process (FIG. 41), the push order notification when the push order bell is won is generated on condition that the push order bell is not in the BB state. That is, if the transition to the BB state is made in a situation where the transition permission lottery has not been won, the push order notification when the push order bell is won will not occur even in the AT mode. As a result, the player will not be able to enjoy the benefits of the bonus AT state, and more specifically, there will be a disadvantage for the player, such as a decrease in the number of medals he has. By doing so, it is possible to delay the BB winning after shifting to the AT mode or between the bonus AT states until the shift permission lottery is won.

<Modification 2>
In this modification, when winning the AT mode transition lottery, the winning of the first BB or the second BB may be allowed before the AT mode winning notification is performed. First, with reference to FIG. 65, changes to the winning mode and lottery table set in this modification will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 65(a), in this modification, in addition to the winning modes of the first embodiment, a 12th replay and a 13th replay are set. In the 12th replay, a winning is achieved when the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line. In the 12th re-game, the corresponding symbols on the left reel 32L are different from the corresponding symbols on the first BB, and the corresponding symbols on the middle reel 32M and right reel 32R are the same as the corresponding symbols on the first BB. Therefore, the 12th re-game can also be referred to as a winning mode in which the player loses the first BB tenpi.

In the 13th replay, a winning is achieved when the "Replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "White Shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line. In the 13th re-game, the corresponding symbols on the left reel 32L are different from the corresponding symbols on the second BB, and the corresponding symbols on the middle reel 32M and right reel 32R are the same as the corresponding symbols on the second BB. Therefore, the 13th re-game can also be referred to as a winning mode in which the player loses the second BB tenpai.

As shown in FIG. 65(b), in this modification, if the normal reply A and normal reply B with index values IV = 1 and 2 are won, each replay etc. of the first embodiment In addition, you will also win the 12th re-game and the 13th re-game. More specifically, if you win the normal reply A, you will win the 12th replay in addition to the 1st replay and the 2nd replay, and if you win the normal reply B, you will win the 1st replay, the 2nd replay, etc. In addition to the re-game and the third re-game, the player also wins the 13th re-game. The 12th re-game and the 13th re-game are set in such a way that a winning is achieved when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated to stop from the right reel 32R when the normal reply A and the normal reply B are won. ing.

FIG. 66 shows a part of the flowchart of the AT lottery process in this modification.

In this modification, if the advantageous section flag is set in step S1206, after the advantageous section winning game flag is set in step S1207, or if the ceiling counter is 0 in step S1217, The process advances to step S3101. In step S3101, similarly to step S1208, an AT mode winning flag is set. In the following step S3102, a continuation rate lottery process is executed as in step S1209, and in step S3102, as in step S1210, a process for setting a continuation rate flag is executed.

In step S3104, it is determined whether the CZ mode is in effect by determining whether the CZ mode flag is set. If the CZ mode is not in progress, in steps S3105 to S3108, similarly to steps S1211 to S1214, the process for setting the omen mode is performed, and then the AT lottery process is ended.

If it is in the CZ mode, the process advances to step S3109 and a direct transition lottery process is executed. The direct transition lottery process is a process of executing a direct transition lottery to enable the start of the bonus AT state directly without going through the precursor mode or the AT mode winning notification effect when the AT mode winning flag is set. be. In the direct transfer lottery process, a direct transfer lottery table is obtained from the various table storage areas 105a, and a direct transfer lottery is performed according to the type of winning BB. As shown in FIG. 66(b), the direct transfer lottery table is set so that it is easier to win the direct transfer lottery when the first BB is won than when the second BB is won. ing. It should be noted that if the player has not won any BB at the time when the direct transfer lottery process is performed, it is set so that the player will not win the direct transfer lottery.

After executing the direct transfer lottery process in step S3109, it is determined in step S3110 whether or not the direct transfer lottery has been won. In the case of non-winning, the process advances to step S3105, and after performing the above-mentioned process for setting the omen mode, the AT lottery process ends. If the direct transfer lottery has been won, the direct transfer notification flag is set in step S3111, and then the AT lottery process is ended. The direct transfer notification flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the above-mentioned direct transfer lottery has been won.

The bonus AT start process in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 67.

In this modification, the processing when the AT mode flag is not set is different. That is, in the case where it is determined in step S3201 that the state is not BB state, and it is determined in step S3202 that the BB winning flag is set, if the AT mode flag is set in step S3203, the above-mentioned step S1504 ~Similar to the process in step S1506, in steps S3204 to S3206, a transition permission flag is set and a winning permission command is set to be output.

The case where the AT mode flag is not set in step S3203 means that the AT mode winning flag is set, which means that the situation is before the start of the AT mode. In this case, the process advances to step S3207, and it is determined whether the direct transfer notification flag is set. The case where the direct transfer notification flag is set is the case where the above-mentioned direct transfer lottery is won. In this case, the process advances to step S3208, and it is determined whether the game is a game in which a BB prize is possible. This process is similar to the process in step S1504 described above, and is a process for determining whether or not the lottery result of the current game is a losing result. If the result is a failure, the process advances to step S3209, where a process for setting an AT start flag is executed, and a process for setting a transition permission flag is executed at step S3210. Thereafter, in step S3211, a process is executed to set the winning suggestion command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the bonus AT start process is ended.

The winning result handling process in this modification will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 68.

After the number of games management process is executed in step S3301, it is determined in step S3302 whether the AT start flag is set. The case where the AT start flag is set means a game in which the AT mode winning notification effect is performed and the AT notification flag is set, and then normal reply A to normal reply C are won, as described above. This is either a game in which you can win a BB prize after winning the direct transfer lottery. If the AT start flag is set, the process advances to step S3303, and it is determined whether the game result of the current game is a winning of any of the normal returns A to normal returns C. If the winning is from normal reply A to normal reply C, in steps S3304 to S3309, similarly to steps S1703 to S1708 above, the process for starting the AT mode is executed, and then the winning result is handled. Finish the process.

The case where it is determined in step S3303 that the prize is not a prize of normal reply A to normal reply C is the case where the direct transfer lottery has been won, and in this case, the process advances to step S3310. In step S3310, it is determined whether or not a BB winning game is established by determining whether any BB winning game flag is set. If the BB winning is established, processing for starting the AT mode is performed in steps S3311 to S3317.

That is, in step S3311, the AT mode winning flag is cleared. In the following step S3312, the direct transfer notification flag is cleared. Then, in step S3313, the AT start flag is cleared. In step S3314, an AT mode flag is set, and in step S3315, a continuation flag is set. In step S3316, processing is performed to set the AT start command as an output target to the display control device 81. Then, in step S3317, the AT continuation setting process is executed, and then the winning result handling process is ended. The AT continuation setting process in step S3317 is a process for checking whether the continuation condition is satisfied at the start of the bonus AT state, and more specifically, the processes in steps S1901 to S1908 in FIG. 44 are executed. That will happen.

If it is determined in step S3310 that a BB win has not been established, in step S3318, the AT start flag is cleared, and then the winning result handling process is ended. In this case, the AT mode will not be started until the game becomes a game where BB winnings are possible again.

If it is determined in step S3302 that the AT start flag is not set, it is determined in step S3319 whether the AT mode flag is set. If the AT mode flag is set, the AT continuation setting process is executed in step S3320, and then the winning result handling process is ended. Further, if the AT mode flag is not set, the winning result handling process is immediately terminated.

In this way, if the AT mode winning flag is set during CZ mode and you win the direct transition lottery, you will be able to win without going through the precursor mode, AT mode winning notification production, or the waiting state from the start of AT mode to the start of bonus AT state. , the bonus AT state is started directly. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the number of medals that may occur before the start of the bonus AT state.

In this modified example, as described above, there are provided a 12th re-game in which a winning mode of losing the first BB is set, and a 13th re-gaming in which a winning mode of losing the second BB is set. Then, using these 12th re-games and 13th re-games, an expectation effect is performed that makes the player expect a direct transition to the above-mentioned bonus AT state. This expected performance is set in the winning suggestion notification process executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81. The winning suggestion notification process is, for example, a process executed in the process for setting other start effects (step S2411) in the start effect setting process (FIG. 51).

In the winning suggestion notification process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 69(a), first, in step S3401, it is determined whether or not a winning suggestion command has been received. The winning suggestion command is a command output from the main control device 101 in a game where a BB prize is possible in a situation where the player has won the direct transfer lottery as described above. If a winning suggestion command has been received, in step S3402, the current notification content is set by ascertaining the winning BB, and in step S3403, a process for setting a winning suggestion notification effect is performed. After that, the winning suggestion notification process is ended. As shown in FIGS. 70(a1) and 70(b1), the winning suggestion notification effect includes, in addition to the winning permission notification shown in FIG. An arrow pointing to the left will appear.

For example, if the 1st BB is won, the notification for the 1st BB is set in step S3402, and the winning suggestion notification is performed in step S3403, the stop operation is performed from the right reel 32R with the aim of winning the 1st BB. When this is done, as shown in FIG. 70(a2), the symbols corresponding to the first BB winning stop on the active line on the right reel 32R and middle reel 32M. In addition, in the figure, the "White 7" symbol is displayed as an easy-to-identify bonus symbol, but if the "White 7" symbol stops in the middle of the right reel 32R as shown in the diagram, the active line of the right reel 32R When the "Cherry" symbol stops on the upper row, which is the middle reel 32M, and the "White 7" symbol stops on the middle row of the middle reel 32M, the "White Shell" symbol stops on the upper row, which is the active line of the middle reel 32M. ing.

Also, for example, if you have won the 2nd BB, the notification for the 2nd BB is set in step S3402, and the winning suggestion notification in step S3403 is performed, if you aim to win the 2nd BB from the right reel 32R. When the stop operation is performed, the symbols corresponding to the 2nd BB winning stop on the active line on the right reel 32R and middle reel 32M, as shown in FIG. 70(b2). In addition, in the figure, the "Red 7" symbol and the "White 7" symbol are displayed as easy-to-identify bonus symbols, but if the "Red 7" symbol stops in the middle of the right reel 32R as shown in the diagram, The "BAR" symbol stops on the upper row of the active line of the right reel 32R, and when the "White 7" symbol stops on the middle row of the middle reel 32M, the "White 7" symbol stops on the upper row of the active line of the middle reel 32M. The ``shellfish'' pattern has stopped.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3401 that the winning suggestion command has not been received, the process advances to step S3404, and it is determined whether or not the BB carryover state exists. If it is in the BB carryover state, it is determined in step S3405 whether or not the CZ mode is in progress. If the CZ mode is in progress, it is determined in step S3406 whether the lottery result of the current game is a win for either normal reply A or normal reply B. If either normal reply A or normal reply B has been won, a pseudo winning suggestion notification lottery process is executed in step S3407. The pseudo winning suggestion notification lottery process is a process for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to execute the pseudo winning suggestion notification performance as the above winning suggestion notification performance in a situation where the player has not won the direct transfer lottery. In the pseudo winning suggestion notification lottery process, a pseudo winning suggestion table is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a, and a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a pseudo winning suggestion notification performance. As shown in FIG. 69(b), the pseudo winning suggestion table has the winning probability set for the pseudo winning suggestion notification performance for the 1st BB and the pseudo winning suggestion notification performance for the 2nd BB. is set so that it is easier to win than the second BB.

After executing the pseudo winning suggestion notification lottery process in step S3407, it is determined in step S3408 whether or not the lottery has been won, and if the lottery has been won, in step S3409 it is determined which BB is selected. After grasping whether or not the player has won the pseudo winning suggestion notification performance, the process for setting the pseudo winning suggestion notification performance is performed in step S3403, and then the main winning suggestion notification process is ended.

In this case, when the pseudo winning suggestion notification effect for the first BB is set, the effect shown in FIG. 70(a1) occurs, and when the pseudo winning suggestion notification effect for the second BB is set, the effect shown in FIG. The effect of (b1) occurs. In other words, the contents of the presentation on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 are the same between the pseudo winning suggestion notification performance and the winning suggestion notification presentation, and the player wins the direct transfer lottery and wins the 1st BB prize or the 2nd BB prize. It is difficult to determine from the content of the performance whether the situation is such that it is permissible to do so.

Moreover, in the case where a pseudo winning suggestion notification performance for the 1st BB is performed, the current winning result is normal reply A, and the winning result is won in the 12th replay, and the 1st BB prize is won from the right reel 32R. When the stop operation is performed aiming at , the symbols corresponding to the first BB winning will stop on the active line on the right reel 32R and middle reel 32M, as shown in FIG. 70(a2). In addition, if a pseudo winning suggestion notification performance for the 2nd BB is performed, and the current winning result is the normal reply B and the 13th replay is won, the 2nd BB prize is won from the right reel 32R. When the stop operation is performed aiming at , the symbols corresponding to the 2nd BB winning will stop on the active line on the right reel 32R and middle reel 32M, as shown in FIG. 70(b2). In other words, between the case where a winning suggestion notification performance is performed and the case where a pseudo winning suggestion notification performance is performed, it is determined from the stopped symbols on the right reel 32R and the middle reel 32M which one is the performance. It is difficult to determine whether a 1BB prize or a 2nd BB prize will be achieved.

Thereafter, when the left reel 32L is stopped, if the winning suggestion notification performance is performed, the first BB winning or the second BB winning is established, and the bonus AT state is started as described above. On the other hand, if the pseudo winning suggestion notification performance is performed, the 12th re-game winning and the 13th re-gaming winning are established and the bonus AT state is not started.

As described above, according to this modification, in the game where the first BB or the second BB has been won and the user waits for the AT mode transition lottery to win, if the AT mode transition lottery is won, the precursor mode The bonus AT state is set so that the winning suggestion notification performance may be performed without going through the AT mode winning notification performance, and when the corresponding BB winning is achieved when such a winning suggestion notification performance is performed. I made it. By doing this, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the number of medals until the bonus AT state starts by not using the omen mode, etc. By doing so, it is possible to diversify the game in the manner in which the number of medals held is increased or decreased and in the situation where the player is waiting for permission to win the first BB or the second BB.

On top of that, we provide a 12th re-game where the first BB loses tenpai and a 13th re-game where the second BB loses tenpai as winning modes, so that a pseudo winning suggestion notification performance can occur, so the above-mentioned precursor mode The probability of a pattern in which the bonus AT state starts without going through the process (probability of winning a direct lottery, occurrence rate of winning suggestion notification presentation) is not increased too much, and the game can be played in a situation where the player is waiting for winning permission for the 1st BB or 2nd BB. It is possible to improve the interest of children.

In a situation where you have not won the 1st BB or 2nd BB, even if you have won the direct lottery, the winning suggestion notification performance will not occur. It is possible to more appropriately increase the significance of trying to improve interest in the competition through prize-winning suggestion announcements. In other words, if the configuration is such that the winning suggestion notification performance can occur even in situations where the player has not won the 1st BB or the 2nd BB, the winning suggestion notification performance will include whether or not he or she has won the 1st BB or the 2nd BB. There are concerns that the significance of the outbreak may be diluted as it now includes points that suggest something. In this regard, by adopting the above configuration, it is possible to concentrate the significance of the occurrence of the winning suggestion notification performance on whether or not winning is permitted in the 1st BB or 2nd BB, and it is possible to more appropriately increase the attention level when it occurs. can.

As already explained, if the 1st BB or 2nd BB prize is achieved in a situation where the AT mode winning flag is not set in the normal mode, the advantageous section can end. By configuring the system to generate a winning suggestion notification effect, the effect of making the player feel that the winning permission condition (AT mode transition winning) of the first BB and the second BB is satisfied can be further enhanced. In other words, in a situation where the winning permission conditions are not met, if a 1st BB or 2nd BB winning is achieved, the situation will shift to a disadvantageous situation. To more appropriately heighten expectations when a winning suggestion notification performance or a pseudo winning suggestion notification performance is performed by utilizing the player's psychology that there is no way a performance indicating that a 2BB winning will be achieved will be performed. I can do it.

Moreover, in CZ mode, where winning suggestion notification performances and pseudo winning suggestion notification performances can occur, since the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery is higher than in normal mode, winning suggestion notification performances and pseudo winning suggestion notification performances occur. In some cases, it is easy to make people think that this is due to the fulfillment of the winning permission conditions (this is a winning suggestion notification presentation).

If a pseudo-winning suggestion announcement occurs and a BB prize is not won, the user may mistakenly believe that the prize was not won due to a failure in the stop operation, and the player may win the first BB prize or win the first BB prize again in the next game or later. There is also a concern that these BB winnings may be achieved through manipulation with the aim of winning a 2BB prize, but winning suggestion notification performances and pseudo winning suggestion notification performances may cause BB winnings to be established in situations where the winning permission conditions are not met. The configuration is such that this occurs during the CZ mode in which the end of the advantageous section is restricted. By doing this, while increasing expectations when a winning suggestion notification performance or a pseudo winning suggestion notification performance is performed, it also reduces the player's frustration in the event that a BB win is erroneously established due to these performances. It is possible to reduce profits.

However, even if you are in CZ mode, if you win a BB prize in a situation where the winning permission conditions are not met, the transition to the bonus AT state will not occur, so the significance of the winning suggestion notification performance and pseudo winning suggestion notification performance. is guaranteed.

Generally, on the premise that operations are often performed from the left reel 32L in normal times, the 12th replay and the 13th replay are made different from the 1st BB and 2nd BB only by the corresponding symbols on the left reel 32L, By making the corresponding symbols of the middle reel 32M and right reel 32R the same as those of the 1st BB and 2nd BB, and by having a configuration in which the operation is performed from the right reel 32R when a pseudo winning suggestion notification effect occurs, the 1st BB is normally used. It is possible to increase expectations when a pseudo-winning suggestion notification performance occurs without creating expectations that a prize or second BB prize will be won.

<Modification 3>
In the first embodiment, when winning the 1st BB or the 2nd BB, the winning is done as a duplicate win with the first replay, but in this modified example, the win is a duplicate win with the 1st BB and the 2nd BB. The presence or absence of is different.

As shown in FIG. 71(a), in this modification, in addition to each prize winning mode of the first embodiment, a 28th small winning combination is set. The 28th small role is won when the "Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Watermelon" symbol or "Ark shell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line. holds true. When the 28th small winning combination is achieved in the 3-bet game, one medal is paid out.

As shown in FIG. 71(b), in the lottery table for the normal game state of this modification, when a winning is achieved when the index value IV=25, in addition to the 1st BB winning flag, the 28th minor winning A flag is set. On the other hand, if the winning occurs when the index value IV=26, only the second BB winning flag is set. The first BB and the second BB cannot be won with index values other than those IV=25 and 26. That is, in a game where the 1st BB is won, the 28th minor prize is also won, and in a game where the 2nd BB is won, no other minor prizes or replays are won.

FIG. 71(c1) shows an example of a stop roll of a game that results in a first BB win, and FIG. 71(c2) shows an example of a stop roll of a game that results in a second BB win. As mentioned above, in the game in which the first BB is won, the 28th minor prize is also won. Then, in the stop control when the small winning combination and BB are won repeatedly, the symbols corresponding to the small winning combination are controlled to be stopped on the active line with priority, so in the game where the first BB winning occurs, the first BB winning is Even if the stop operation is performed aiming at the symbol corresponding to the 1BB winning, the 28th small prize winning will be established. In addition, by winning the 28th minor prize in the normal section, an advantageous section transfer lottery is performed, and the winning probability of the transfer lottery is set to 100% in this modification. By the way, the 28th minor prize is set so that the winning flag will not be set if it is won at another index value IV, and the game in which the 28th minor prize is achieved is the 1BB winning game. limited to. In other words, the 28th small winning combination not only informs you that you have won the 1st BB, but also serves as a so-called reach winning combination that prevents you from winning the 1st BB in the winning game. Then, in the 1st BB winning game, the 28th minor prize is established, and in the subsequent 1BB carryover state, if the game is a losing result, if you aim at the symbol corresponding to the 1st BB winning and perform the stop operation. Although a first BB winning can be achieved, if a stop operation is performed at a timing when the symbol corresponding to the first BB winning cannot be stopped on the effective line, no winning will be achieved as a result, and a so-called missed hit will stop on the effective line. In addition, it may be possible to win the 28th small winning combination even in a carryover state after the first BB winning game or during the BB state, and in that case, it is preferable that the probability of winning does not vary depending on the gaming state.

On the other hand, in the 2nd BB winning game, only the 2nd BB winning flag is set, and if the stop operation is performed aiming at the symbol corresponding to the 2nd BB winning, the 2nd BB winning will be established, but the 2nd BB winning flag will be set. If a stop operation is performed at a timing when the corresponding symbol cannot be stopped on the active line, no winning will be achieved as a result, and a so-called missed hit will stop on the active line. And, not only in the 2nd BB winning game, but also in the subsequent 2nd BB carryover state, if the game is a loss result, the 2nd BB winning will be achieved by aiming at the symbol corresponding to the 2nd BB winning and stopping the operation. However, if the stop operation is performed at a timing when the symbol corresponding to the second BB winning cannot be stopped on the active line, the missed symbol will stop on the active line.

Therefore, assuming that the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is not stopped with the aim of winning, it is possible to determine whether or not the 1st BB has won from the stopping result, while the 2nd BB can be determined from the stopping result. It becomes difficult to determine whether a candidate has won or not.

As mentioned above, in this slot machine 10, if the continuation condition is not satisfied at the end of the bonus AT state, the advantageous section ends with the end of the bonus AT state, and then there is a case where the advantageous section is re-entered. Since the BB win is not carried over, a shift to the CZ mode may occur. In the first embodiment, both the 1st BB winning game and the 2nd BB winning game are won over and over again with the 1st replay, and if in the normal section, the duplicate reply 1BB or duplicate reply is won before the shift to the advantageous section. Even if you win the 2nd BB, you will move to the advantageous section by playing the first replay where you won twice in the game, and the winning flag for the 1st BB and 2nd BB will only be set in the game. The configuration was such that the carryover flag was not set and transition to the CZ mode was permitted.

On the other hand, in this modified example, when winning the 1st BB in the normal section, the 28th minor prize win is used as an opportunity to move to the advantageous section in the game, while when winning the 2nd BB, the game In this case, the configuration will not shift to the advantageous section.

Hereinafter, the shift to the advantageous section and the mode during the shift in this modification will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 72.

For example, if the game is started in a situation where the first BB winning is carried over and the game shifts to the advantageous section at timing t71 with the first BB carried over, the normal mode is set as described above. Assume that the AT mode is entered at timing t72, the bonus AT state is started at timing t73, and the bonus AT state ends at timing t74 without the continuation condition being satisfied. In this case, as described above, the advantageous section ends at timing t74.

At timing t75, when the index value IV=25, the game is won and the 1st BB winning flag and the 28th minor prize winning flag are set, the game is won in the advantageous section transition lottery of the game and the game moves to the advantageous section. In this case, since the first BB winning game will shift to the advantageous section, the shift will occur in a situation where the carryover flag is not set, and the CZ mode will be set. In the figure, the first BB winning game and the game in which the first BB carryover flag is set are displayed at the same timing t75. Then, in the game where the 1st BB is won, the 28th small prize is established as a reach target, and the player clearly states that he has won the 1st BB and that the CZ mode is set. It becomes possible to understand the

Assume that the AT mode is entered at timing t76, the bonus AT state is started at timing t77, and the bonus AT state ends at timing t78 without the continuation condition being satisfied. In this case as well, the advantageous section ends at timing t78.

At timing t79, when the index value IV=26 results in a win and the second BB winning flag is set, the game does not win in the advantageous section shift lottery of the game and does not move to the advantageous section. Then, if an advantageous section transition lottery is subsequently held at timing t80 and a winner is won, the advantageous section transition will be made in a situation where the second BB carryover flag is set, and the normal mode will be set. Then, in the game where the second BB is won, the 28th small prize winning as a reach prize is not established.

Assume that the AT mode is entered at timing t81, the bonus AT state is started at timing t82, and the bonus AT state ends at timing t83 without the continuation condition being satisfied. In this case as well, the advantageous section ends at timing t83.

After that, when the 1st BB winning flag and the 28th small winning combination winning flag are set at the timing t84, the game shifts to an advantageous section in the same way as described above, and the CZ mode is set.

As described above, according to this modification, the degree of advantage when moving to an advantageous section is different between the 1st BB, which is won twice with the 28th minor prize, and the 2nd BB, which is not won twice with the 28th minor prize. , If you win the 1st BB that is a duplicate win with the 28th minor prize, it will be set to CZ mode, and if you win the 2nd BB that is not a duplicate win with the 28th minor prize, the game will not shift to the advantageous section. , and then may be set to normal mode. By doing this, the interest in which BB will be won will be increased, and the player will be able to determine whether the CZ mode or the normal mode has been set, using the 28th small prize win as a guide. becomes possible.

By the way, even if you win the 2nd BB that does not overlap with the 28th small role, if the shift to the advantageous section occurs earlier due to another result that does not overlap with the BB, The CZ mode will be set as a transition to an advantageous section in a situation where the BB carryover flag is not set.

In other words, by providing not only a reach target overlap BB where transition to an advantageous section and setting of a BB carryover flag is performed, but also a single BB where only a BB carryover flag is set and no transition to an advantageous section occurs, in a normal section. , it becomes possible to allow a situation in which the BB carryover flag is set to occur even after the bonus AT state. As a result, after the bonus AT state, there are cases where the mode is set to CZ mode and cases where it is set to normal mode. It becomes possible to suitably increase the amount.

In other words, if other results other than the 1st BB and 2nd BB (1st re-gaming to 11th re-gaming, 1st minor role to 28th minor role) are used as the trigger result for transition to the advantageous section, the trigger result is By having a configuration that has overlapping results and BBs, and single results that include trigger results but do not include BB, it is possible to shift to an advantageous section using the duplicate results as a trigger, and when moving to an advantageous section using the single result as a trigger. The advantage of the advantageous section to transfer to is different depending on the case, and when moving to the advantageous section based on a duplicate result win, it is set to CZ mode, and when moving to the advantageous section based on a single result win. , the configuration is such that the normal mode is set on condition that the BB has been won before that. With such a configuration, interest in the result that triggers the transition to the advantageous section is increased, and the interest in the game is improved.

In this case, when moving to the advantageous section based on a single result win, if the BB win has not been won before then, the mode will be set to CZ mode instead of the normal mode, so after the BB win and the single result win, It is possible to increase interest in the timing of shifting to an advantageous section and the opportunity to shift to an advantageous section, including the future.

<Modification 4>
In this modification, the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery from the normal mode is made different depending on whether the first BB is carried over or the second BB is carried over.

FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the AT mode lottery table acquisition process in this modification.

In step S3501, it is determined whether the advantageous section flag is set. If the advantageous section flag is not set and it is a normal section, the AT mode lottery table for the normal section is acquired in step S3502, and then the main acquisition process is ended.

If it is determined in step S3501 that the advantageous section flag is set, it is determined in step S3503 whether or not the CZ mode flag is set. If the CZ mode flag is not set, it is determined in step S3504 whether the 1st BB carryover flag is set, and if it is not set, in step S3505, the 1st BB carryover flag for normal mode is set. After acquiring the AT mode lottery table, the main acquisition process ends. If the first BB carryover flag is not set, the AT mode lottery table for the second BB carryover for normal mode is acquired in step S3506, and then the main acquisition process is ended. If it is determined in step S3503 that the CZ mode flag is set, an AT mode lottery table for the CZ mode is acquired in step S3507, and then the main acquisition process is ended.

As shown in FIG. 74, the AT mode lottery table at the time of carrying over the 1st BB and the AT mode lottery table at the time of carrying over the 2nd BB are both more effective than when using the AT mode lottery table for CZ mode. It is set so that it is difficult to win, and it is easier to win the AT mode transfer lottery than when using the AT mode lottery table for the normal section, and furthermore, when using the AT mode lottery table for the 1st BB carryover. It is set so that it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery than when using the AT mode lottery table at the time of carrying over the second BB. In other words, in the normal mode where it is difficult to win the AT mode shift lottery, it is easier to shift to AT mode when the first BB is carried over than when the second BB is carried over.

As described above, in this modified example, the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery is different depending on the type of BB carried over, so that the interest in which BB will be won after the bonus AT state ends is reduced. This will increase the interest in the game.

The AT mode transition lottery may be held in a situation where the BB winning has been carried over, and it will be disadvantageous if you win the BB prize without winning the AT mode transition lottery (if the advantageous section ends or the bonus AT status In a configuration in which the transition to AT mode does not occur), the gameplay is to wait for the AT mode shift winning while preventing BB winnings from occurring, and in such a gameplay, the winning probability of the AT mode shift lottery is determined depending on the type of BB carried over. By making the difference, it is possible to increase interest in the AT mode transition lottery even before the BB winning. In other words, assuming that the BB carries over, no matter which BB is won, it is not possible to immediately win the prize, so it is conceivable that interest in the type of BB may decrease. On that point, if the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery is made different depending on the type of BB winning that is the starting line of the AT mode transition lottery, as in the above configuration, even if it is a BB that cannot immediately win a prize. It becomes possible to attract the attention of players.

Here, the situation where the BB carryover flag is not set is mainly a normal section, and the situation where the BB carryover flag is set is an advantageous section, and the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery is higher in the advantageous section. It is set to be higher (Figure 34), and considering that the ceiling number of games is set in advantageous sections, the BB carryover flag is set higher than the situation where the BB carryover flag is not set. It can be said that the situation where the transition to AT mode is more likely to occur. Based on this premise, by making the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery during the advantageous section different depending on the type of BB carried over, it is possible to win the AT mode transition lottery by simply changing the number of BB types. The probabilities can be made different, and games in situations where the BB carryover flag is set are diversified.

In the advantageous section transition game process, the CZ mode is set in a situation where the BB carryover flag is not set, so the BB carryover flag is set after the transition to the CZ mode. Even with this configuration, the AT mode lottery table is only different, so when setting the CZ mode, it is possible to predict in advance which BB will be won, or to check in advance whether or not there will be a BB prize when a BB is won. It becomes possible to vary the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery during the CZ mode without using a complicated configuration such as prediction.

In this case, for example, as in Modification 1 of the first embodiment, the transition is made from the normal mode or CZ mode to the AT mode through the AT mode transition lottery, and after transition to the AT mode, the bonus AT state is entered through the transition permission lottery. In a configuration where the transition to AT mode can occur, the probability of winning the transition permission lottery differs depending on the type of winning BB, and if the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery in this modification differs depending on the type of BB that is carried over. If the configuration is applied, both the first-stage lottery and the second-stage lottery to enter the bonus AT state will have a configuration in which the lottery probability differs depending on the type of winning BB.

In the above modification, it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery in a situation where the first BB is carried over than in a situation where the second BB is carried over, and in such a structure, for example, in the above first modification If we assume a configuration in which it is easier to win the transition permission lottery in a situation where the 2nd BB is carried over than in a situation where the 1st BB is carried over, in a situation where the 1st BB is carried over, it is easier to shift to AT mode, After transitioning to AT mode, the number of games to reach bonus AT state tends to be long, and in situations where the second BB is carried over, it is difficult to transition to AT mode, but after transitioning to AT mode, it will transition to bonus AT state relatively quickly. , etc., the gameplay will vary greatly depending on the BB carried over, and the interest in the game will be improved through diversification of the game.

On the other hand, for example, contrary to the first modification example above, this modification example is applied to a configuration in which it is easier to win the transfer permission lottery in a situation where the 1st BB is carried over than in a situation where the 2nd BB is carried over. Then, in a situation where the 1st BB is carried over, it is easier to shift to AT mode, the number of games until the bonus AT state is likely to be shorter, and the path from switching to AT mode to the bonus AT state is easier than in a situation where the 2nd BB is carried over. is in a relatively advantageous state. Even in this case, the gameplay will greatly differ depending on the BB carried over, and the interest in the game will be improved through diversification of the game.

<Second embodiment>
In this embodiment, the end timing of the advantageous section is different from that in the first embodiment. That is, in the first embodiment, the advantageous section ends when the BB state ends in a situation where the conditions for continuation of AT mode are not satisfied, but in this embodiment, the conditions for continuation of AT mode are satisfied. If you win the BB in a situation where you have not done so, the advantageous section ends. Note that, in the normal mode, when a BB win is established, the advantageous section is ended, as in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, changes in the processing configuration due to the above changes will be explained.

<AT continuation setting process>
FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the AT continuation setting process in this embodiment.

The AT continuation setting process in this embodiment is different from that in the first embodiment above in that the AT mode flag is not cleared at the end of BB in a situation where the continuation condition is not satisfied, and other points. is similar to that of the first embodiment.

That is, if it is determined in step S3614 that any BB end game flag is set, the transition permission flag is cleared in step S3615, and then the presence or absence of a continuation flag is determined in step S3616. If the continuation flag is set and the continuation conditions are met, the AT continuation setting process is ended. Such processing is similar to the first embodiment described above. On the other hand, if the continuation flag is not set in step S3616 and the continuation condition is not satisfied, the AT end command is sent to the display control device in step S3617 without clearing the AT mode flag. After executing the process of setting the AT continuation setting process as an output target to 81, the AT continuation setting process ends.

<Second section display process>
The second section display process in this embodiment will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 76.

The second section display process in this embodiment is different from that in the first embodiment described above in terms of ending conditions for advantageous sections, and is otherwise similar to that in the first embodiment.

That is, if it is determined in step S3706 that the upper limit number of games or the upper limit increased number of coins in the advantageous section has not been reached, it is determined in step S3710 whether any BB winning game flag is set. If it is a BB winning game, it is determined in step S3711 whether or not it is a BB winning game before the AT mode winning in the normal mode. If it is a BB win before the AT mode win in the normal mode, processing for ending the advantageous section is performed in steps S3707 to S3709. If a negative determination is made in step S3711, the advantageous section is not ended. These processes are the same as those in the first embodiment.

If it is determined in step S3710 that the BB winning game flag is not set, it is determined in step S3712 whether any BB winning game flag is set. Each BB winning game flag is a flag that is set in each BB winning game and cleared when the winning game ends. If it is a BB winning game, it is determined in step S3713 whether a continuation flag is set. If the continuation flag is not set and the continuation condition is not satisfied and the winning is BB, processing for ending the advantageous period is performed in steps S3707 to S3709. If the game is not a BB winning game, or if the continuation conditions are met even if it is a BB winning game, the advantageous section is not ended.

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, in the process for the advantageous section transition game described below, a process (step S2105 and step S2106) for setting a transition completed flag when transitioning to an advantageous section during the BB state is not provided. Therefore, the second section display process in this embodiment also does not include a process for checking the transition completed flag when ending the advantageous section. As mentioned above, in the first embodiment, the advantageous section ends when the BB is won (the advantageous section is re-transferred to the advantageous section during the BB state), and the advantageous section does not end when the BB is won. It was necessary to distinguish between cases (in which no transition to the advantageous section occurs during the BB state) at the end of the BB, but in this embodiment, since the advantageous section does not end at the end of the BB, such a case does not occur. This is because there is no need to distinguish between

<Advantageous section transition game processing>
Next, changes for causing a transition to the CZ mode after the end of the bonus AT state will be explained. In the first embodiment, the advantageous section ends when the BB ends, so if the advantageous section ends with the end of the bonus AT state, the situation is such that the BB has not been won. Therefore, if a transition to an advantageous section occurs in a situation where BB winnings have not been carried over, set it to CZ mode, and if a transition to an advantageous section occurs in a situation where BB winnings have been carried over, set it to normal mode. The configuration was set to .

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the advantageous section is configured to end when the BB is won, if the BB win that triggered the end of the advantageous section is carried over, the situation where the BB win ends is the one where the BB win ends. The situation has been carried over. Therefore, in this embodiment, the configuration is opposite to that of the first embodiment, in which the CZ mode or the normal mode is set depending on whether or not the BB winning is carried over at the time of transition to the advantageous section.

That is, in the process for the advantageous section transition game in this embodiment, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 77, it is determined in step S3801 whether any BB carryover flag is set. Then, if any of the BB carryover flags is set, processing for setting the CZ mode is performed in steps S3802 to S3805, and if no BB carryover flag is set, steps S3806 to S3805 are executed. The configuration is such that processing for setting the normal mode is performed in step S3808, which is the opposite of the first embodiment.

Specifically, if it is determined in step S3801 that any BB carryover flag is set, it is determined in step S3802 whether or not the first BB carryover flag is set. If the situation is such that the first BB winning is carried over, a process of setting the first CZ mode flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed in step S3803. On the other hand, if the situation is such that the second BB winning is carried over instead of the first BB winning, a process of setting the second CZ mode flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is executed in step S3804. In this embodiment, the first CZ mode and the second CZ mode are set as the CZ modes, and the first CZ mode flag and the second CZ mode flag indicate that the CZ mode is set and which CZ mode is selected. This flag is used by the CPU 102 to determine whether the flag has been set. After executing the process in step S3803 or step S3804, in step S3805, "32" corresponding to the number of games in the CZ mode is input into the CZ counter, and then the process for advantageous section transition games is ended.

If the BB carryover flag is not set in step S3801, a ceiling game number table is acquired in step S3806, a lottery process for the number of ceiling games is executed in step S3807, and a ceiling game is displayed on the ceiling counter in step S3808. After executing the process of inputting the number, the process for the advantageous section transition game ends. The processing from step S3806 to step S3808 is similar to the processing from step S2102 to step S2104 described above.

<AT mode lottery table acquisition process>
The AT mode lottery table acquisition process in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 78.

In step S3901, it is determined whether the advantageous section flag is set. If the advantageous section flag is not set and it is a normal section, the AT mode lottery table for the normal section is acquired in step S3902, and then the main acquisition process is ended.

If it is determined in step S3901 that the advantageous section flag is set, it is determined in step S3903 whether or not the second CZ mode flag is set. If the second CZ mode flag is not set, it is determined in step S3904 whether the first CZ mode flag is set, and if it is not set, the AT mode lottery table for normal mode is set in step S3905. After acquiring, the main acquisition process ends. If the first CZ mode flag is set in step S3904, the AT mode lottery table for the first CZ mode is acquired in step S3906, and then the main acquisition process is ended. If it is determined in step S3903 that the second CZ mode flag is set, the AT mode lottery table for the second CZ mode is acquired in step S3907, and then the main acquisition process is ended.

As shown in FIG. 79, the AT mode lottery table for the first CZ mode and the AT mode lottery table for the second CZ mode are both larger than when using the AT mode lottery table for the normal section or the normal mode. It is set so that it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery, and furthermore, when using the AT mode lottery table for the 1st CZ mode, it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery than when using the AT mode lottery table for the 2nd CZ mode. It is set to make it easier to win the mode transition lottery. In other words, it is better to move to the advantageous section and set to the 1st CZ mode in a situation where the 1st BB win is carried over, than to move to the advantageous section and set to the 2nd CZ mode when the 2nd BB win is carried over. It is easier to win the AT mode shift lottery than if you were to enter the AT mode. Then, after the bonus AT state ends without the continuation condition being met, the AT mode will be restarted depending on whether you win the 1st BB and the advantageous section ends, or you win the 2nd BB and the advantageous section ends. The transition (pullback) probabilities are different, and the probability of re-shifting to AT mode is higher when the first BB is won and the advantageous section ends.

By the way, when set to the 1st CZ mode, the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery during the 1st CZ mode is approximately 70%, and when set to the 2nd CZ mode, the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery during the 2nd CZ mode is approximately 70%. The probability of winning the lottery is approximately 40%.

<Main processing>
As mentioned above, in this embodiment, when moving to an advantageous section in a situation where BB winnings are carried over, the CZ mode is set, and when moving to an advantageous section when BB winnings are not carried over, the mode is set to normal mode, so the power supply If the information for the advantageous section is initialized at the time of input, etc., and the information indicating that the BB has been won (BB carryover flag) remains, the CZ mode will be set when moving to the advantageous section immediately after the start of the game. It turns out. Therefore, in this embodiment, when initialization processing of advantageous section information is performed in the main processing, the BB carryover flag is also deleted.

That is, in the main process in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 80, when it is determined in step S4004 that the setting key is turned on, the process to initialize advantageous section information is executed in step S4005. After that, in step S4006, carryover information initialization processing is executed. The carryover information initialization process is a process of erasing the above-mentioned BB carryover flag. In other words, when the advantageous section information is initialized in step S4005, the BB carryover flag is also cleared. This prevents the event of shifting to the CZ mode immediately after the start of the game.

After executing the process in step S4006, a winning probability setting process is executed in step S4007. The processes from step S4001 to step S4003 and from step S4008 to step S4016 are the same as the processes from step S201 to step S203 and step S207 to step S215, so the description thereof will be omitted.

<Game flow>
The transition and termination of the advantageous section in this embodiment will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 81. Note that in this specification, although timing numbers in timing charts may overlap across embodiments, they are treated as numbers unique to each embodiment.

When the setting value of the slot machine 10 is changed (winning probability setting process) at timing t1, information indicating that it is an advantageous section (advantageous section flag) and BB carryover information (BB carryover flag) are deleted. . Suppose, for example, that the first BB with multiple repeats is won at timing t2 after the start of the game. In this case, since a shift to an advantageous section occurs in the game, the shift to an advantageous section occurs in a situation where the BB carryover flag is not set, so the normal mode is set.

For example, if the AT mode is entered at timing t3 due to the exhaustion of the ceiling number of games, a continuation flag is set, and thereafter, the bonus AT state is started at timing t4. When the bonus AT state ends at timing t5, if the continuation condition is met (the continuation flag is set), after the bonus AT state ends, you will win BB again at timing t6. However, the advantageous section does not end, and the bonus AT state starts from the timing t7 for the winning BB at the timing t6.

If the bonus AT state ends in a situation where the continuation condition is not satisfied at timing t8, if a BB is won at timing t9, the advantageous section in the winning game ends. Thereafter, when a shift to the advantageous section occurs at timing t10, the shift to the advantageous section occurs in a situation where the BB carryover flag is set, and the CZ mode is set.

When the AT mode is shifted to the AT mode at timing t11, for example, by winning the AT mode shift lottery while in the CZ mode, the continuation flag is set. Thereafter, the bonus AT state starts at timing t12, and ends at timing t13. When winning the BB again at timing t14, the continuation flag is not set, so the advantageous section ends at timing t14. Then, a transition to an advantageous section occurs immediately after at timing t15, and in this case, since the transition is to an advantageous section in a situation where the BB carryover flag is set, the CZ mode is set as in the case of t10. .

If the AT mode shift lottery is not won within the specified number of games (32 games) in the CZ mode, the CZ mode ends at timing t16 and shifts to the normal mode. In this case, the number of ceiling games is set. Thereafter, at timing t17, when the set value is changed (winning probability setting process), the information indicating that it is an advantageous section (advantageous section flag) and the BB carryover information (BB carryover flag) are deleted.

Incidentally, in this embodiment as well, when the advantageous section ends from t9 to t10 and from t14 to t15, the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator once ends. That is, the lighting state is from t3 to t9, t10 to t14, and t15 to t16, and the lighting state is from t9 to t10 and from t14 to t15. On the other hand, a series of advantageous performances from the AT mode start performance to the CZ mode end performance continue from t3 to t16. That is, when the bonus AT state ends at t8 or t13, an AT mode end effect is performed and a CZ mode start effect is performed, and the advantageous effect is continued across the advantageous section.

As described above, in this embodiment, when a transition to an advantageous section occurs in a situation where the BB carryover flag is set, the CZ mode is set. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the CZ mode that is set differs depending on the type of BB carryover flag (the type of winning BB) that is set at the time of transition to the advantageous section.

That is, in the timing chart of FIG. 82, assume that in the advantageous section that transitioned at timing t21, the AT mode is transitioned to timing t22, and the bonus AT state is implemented from t23 to t24. If the first BB is won at the timing t25, the advantageous section ends at the timing t25 because the continuation flag is not set. When shifting to the advantageous section at timing t26 immediately after that, the CZ mode set here becomes the first CZ mode because the shift is to the advantageous section in a situation where the first BB carryover flag is set. Then, when a transition to AT mode occurs at timing t27, such as by winning an AT mode transition lottery during the first CZ mode, a bonus AT state based on the first BB state is started from timing t28.

If the bonus AT state ends without the continuation condition being satisfied at the timing t29 and the second BB is won at the timing t30, the advantageous section ends at the timing t30 because the continuation flag is not set. When shifting to the advantageous section at timing t31 immediately after that, the CZ mode set here becomes the second CZ mode because the shift is to the advantageous section in a situation where the second BB carryover flag is set. Then, when a transition to AT mode occurs at timing t32, such as by winning an AT mode transition lottery during the second CZ mode, a bonus AT state based on the second BB state is started from timing t33.

If the bonus AT state ends without the continuation condition being satisfied at the timing t34 and the second BB is won at the timing t35, the advantageous section ends at the timing t35 because the continuation flag is not set. When shifting to the advantageous section at timing t36 immediately after that, the second CZ mode is set as in the case of t31.

If the AT mode shift lottery is not won within the specified number of games in the CZ mode, the second CZ mode ends at timing t37 and shifts to the normal mode. In this case, the number of ceiling games is set. For example, if the second BB winning is achieved at timing t38, which is before the AT mode winning, the advantageous section ends as in the first embodiment. Then, at the timing t39 in the second BB state, the vehicle shifts to the advantageous section again, and in this case, the shift to the advantageous section occurs in a situation where the BB carryover flag is not set, so the normal mode is set.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

In this embodiment, after the bonus AT state ends in a situation where the continuation condition is not satisfied, the advantageous section is ended based on BB winning and the transition is made to the normal section, but when re-transferring to the advantageous section , the CZ mode is set on condition that the BB carryover flag is set. By doing this, when you win a BB, if you temporarily end the advantageous section and then re-enter the advantageous section immediately after, the BB carryover flag will be set, so it will be set to CZ mode. , it becomes possible to set the CZ mode after the bonus AT state.

If the BB carryover flag is not set when moving to an advantageous section, it is configured to be set to normal mode, and when initialization processing of advantageous section information is performed due to a setting change, initialization processing of carryover information is also performed. For example, if a game hall closes while in AT mode, if the initialization process for advantageous section information is executed after the setting is changed, the information in AT mode will be erased and the information will be reset the next day. It is possible to prevent the information in the AT mode from being carried over, and at that time, the BB carryover flag will also be cleared, so even if it is set in the normal section, the BB carryover flag will not be set. The game will be started from a situation where the player is not in the CZ mode, and it is possible to avoid being set to the CZ mode first thing in the morning.

Depending on the type of BB carryover flag that is set when transitioning to an advantageous section, there are cases where the AT mode transition lottery is set to the first CZ mode and the second CZ mode, which have different winning probabilities. , it is not only sufficient if the BB carryover flag is set, but also the type of winning BB will be involved in whether or not the AT mode can be pulled back, making it possible to more appropriately increase the attention to the winning BB. Become.

In particular, the 1st CZ mode, which is entered when the carryover information of the 1st BB, which is difficult to win, is set, is better than the AT mode, than the 2nd CZ mode, which is entered when the carryover information of the 2nd BB, which is easy to win, is set. By configuring the transition lottery so that it is easy to win, it is possible to ensure a balance between the rarity of winning the 1st BB and its benefits. Therefore, it is possible to set a pullback zone in a so-called AT mode such as the CZ mode after the bonus AT state without increasing the advantage for the player too much.

Even in this case, the advantage of the bonus AT state is the same regardless of whether you win the 1st BB or the 2nd BB, and more specifically, the end conditions for the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state are The maximum number of payouts is the same. By doing this, once you switch back to AT mode, you can standardize the advantage in AT mode no matter which CZ mode you are in, creating a more equal chance of increasing medals. can be done. In other words, even when re-transferring to AT mode via the second CZ mode, the same degree of benefit can be enjoyed as when re-transferring to AT mode via the first CZ mode. It becomes possible to suppress a decrease in the desire to play during the mode.

Note that, as in the first embodiment, after transitioning to the AT mode or after the bonus AT state, a configuration may be adopted in which the carryover BB winnings are allowed through the transition permission lottery, and in this case, the 1st BB winning The probability of winning the transfer permission lottery may be different depending on whether the second BB is carried over or carried over. By doing this, the advantages of the bonus AT state itself can be made common between when re-transferring to AT mode via the first CZ mode and when re-transferring to AT mode via the second CZ mode. Also, it is possible to change the number of medals (number of games) required to transition to the bonus AT state at each stage (CZ mode, AT mode). Therefore, it can greatly contribute to the diversification of games.

In this embodiment as well, since the case where the first BB or the second BB is won is triggered by the repeat duplicate 1st BB or the repeat duplicate second BB which is a duplicate win with the first replay, when winning the BB, When an advantageous section ends, it is restricted that a BB win can be achieved in the game at the end of the advantageous section. By doing so, it is possible to more reliably make the next game after the end game of the advantageous section a game in which the BB carryover flag is set. In other words, if you end the advantageous section based on a BB win and also achieve a BB win in the game, the BB state will be exhausted in the normal section, and the transition to the advantageous section will occur during the BB state. can occur. In this case, the normal mode will be set as a shift to an advantageous section in a situation where the BB carryover flag is not set. On that point, as in the above configuration, by making at least the next game after the game at the end of the advantageous period a situation in which the BB carryover flag is set, if a win is won in the game that triggers the transition to the advantageous period, It becomes possible to set the CZ mode as an advantageous section shift with the BB carryover flag.

Incidentally, as in the first embodiment, a predetermined mode (normal mode) is set when transitioning to an advantageous section during a BB state regardless of the presence or absence of the BB carryover flag, and this embodiment Then, the configuration may be such that the CZ mode is set if the camera is in the BB state. However, in this case, if you end the advantageous section based on a BB win in the normal mode and are in that BB state, or if you end the advantageous section in a BB winning game and win a BB prize, and you are in the BB state. There is a concern that the configuration will become complicated.

In addition, the second section display process in this embodiment includes a process in which the advantageous section is not ended if the BB winning game is mainly in a mode other than the normal mode, and a process in which the advantageous section is ended in the BB winning game. The configuration is such that processing for not ending an advantageous section in a winning game is executed with priority over processing for ending an advantageous section for a BB winning game. Therefore, if a BB winning is achieved in a BB winning game, the advantageous section will not end because the BB winning is in a situation where the AT mode flag is set. However, as described above, by winning the first BB and the second BB twice in the first replay, it is guaranteed that a BB prize will not be achieved in the BB winning game.

<Modification 1>
In this modification, the relationship between the advantageous section and the forced termination condition will be explained. As already explained, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated when the upper limit number of games (1500 games) is exhausted or the upper limit number of coins (2400 coins) is increased (section display second process). For example, if the forced termination condition is satisfied during the bonus AT state, the slot machine 10 ends the advantageous section when the forced termination condition is satisfied, regardless of whether or not the player is in the BB state. In this case, there is a high possibility of transitioning to the advantageous section again during the BB state, and if this happens, the transition will be made to the advantageous section in a situation where the BB carryover flag is not set, so the normal mode will be set. . Furthermore, if the forced termination condition is met during the BB state, even if the configuration is such that the advantageous section is terminated after waiting for the end of the BB, the advantageous section will normally be transferred in a situation where the BB carryover flag is not set. mode will be set. Therefore, in this modification, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, the advantageous section is terminated before the forced termination condition is satisfied.

That is, in the second section display process in this modification, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 83, if it is determined in step S4112 that any BB winning game flag is set, the continuation flag is set in step S4113. Determine whether it is set. If it is a BB win when the continuation flag is not set, similarly to the second embodiment, processing for ending the advantageous section is executed in steps S4107 to S4109.

In the case of a BB win in a situation where the continuation flag is set, in step S4114, the number of games in the advantageous section AG and the number of increase/decrease tickets in the advantageous section MY are ascertained, and the number of games in the advantageous section AG is greater than the upper limit number of games. Check whether the specified number of games (1400 games) has been reached, which is less by the specific number of games (100 games), or whether the number MY of increased/decreased coins in the advantageous section has reached the predetermined number (2200 coins), which is less than the upper limit number by the specific number (200 coins). judge. If the predetermined number of games has not been reached and the predetermined number of sheets has not been reached, the second section display process is directly ended. In this case, the advantageous section does not end.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4114 that either the predetermined number of games has been reached or the predetermined number of coins has been reached, it is determined in step S4115 whether or not the BB won this time is the first BB. do. If the first BB has been won, the process advances to step S4107, and processes for ending the advantageous section are executed in steps S4107 to S4109. If the winning BB this time is the second BB (step S4115: NO), the second section display process is ended without ending the advantageous section.

As mentioned above, if the pre-termination conditions such as either the predetermined number of games or the predetermined number of coins are met, even if you continue in AT mode, the advantageous section will soon be forcibly terminated. This means that there is a high possibility that the advantageous section will be forcibly terminated due to the conditions. Therefore, in this modification, if such a prior termination condition is satisfied, the advantageous section is temporarily terminated on the condition that the first BB is won. In this case, a re-transition to the advantageous section will occur in a situation where the 1st BB winning has been carried over, so when re-transferring to the advantageous section, the 1st CZ mode, which has a relatively high probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery, will be set. be done.

Here, in this modification, when setting the pre-termination condition, the increase in the number of medals (specific number) that can be expected if the advantageous section continues for a specific number of games is greater than the increase in the number of medals (specific number). A specific number of games and a specific number of medals are set so that the number of medals that can be expected to increase due to migration is greater. In other words, as described above, if the player re-enters the first CZ mode in a situation where the predetermined number of games and the predetermined number of medals are reached, the average number of medals that can be expected to increase will be larger. Moreover, if you switch to the first CZ mode again, the number of games in the advantageous section (number of games in the advantageous section AG) and the number of increased coins (the number of increase/decrease tickets in the advantageous section MY) will be reset, and then the transition to the AT mode will occur again. It is possible to do so, and the maximum number of medals that can be acquired will be overwhelmingly large. Note that even if the mode is shifted to the first CZ mode as described above, there may be a case where the shift to the AT mode does not occur during the first CZ mode and the mode shifts to the normal mode.

In this modification, even if the pre-termination condition is met, if the second BB is won, the advantageous section is not terminated. If the 2nd BB is won, when moving again to the advantageous section, the 2nd CZ mode is set where the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery is relatively low. In this modified example, the number of increased medals (specific number) that can be expected if the advantageous section continues for a specific number of games is greater than the number of increased medals that can be expected by re-transferring to AT mode via the second CZ mode. A specific number of games and a specific number of coins are set so that the number of games is greater than the number of cards. In other words, as described above, the average number of medals that can be expected to increase will be larger if the AT mode is continued as is, rather than by re-transferring to the second CZ mode when the predetermined number of games or medals have been reached. Therefore, as mentioned above, even if the preliminary termination conditions are met, if the second BB is won, the advantageous section will not end, so it is possible to end the advantageous section midway. Care has been taken to ensure that players are not disadvantaged.

In addition, in the above modification, the advantageous section may be terminated if the prior termination condition is satisfied, but if any of the excess flags is set when the preliminary termination condition is satisfied. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the advantageous section may be terminated if there is a problem.

That is, in the remaining game number management process in the second section display process, for example, the sum of the product of the stock counter value and the number of games required to complete the bonus AT state and the current number of advantageous section games AG is the upper limit game. If it is determined after the fact that the maximum number of games will be reached before the maximum number of games is reached, such as when the number of games exceeds the maximum number of games, the first excess flag is set. In addition, in the remaining number management process in the second section display process, for example, if the sum of the product of the stock counter value and the increased number of sheets in the BB state and the current advantageous section increase/decrease number MY exceeds the upper limit number. If it is later determined that the number of sheets will reach the upper limit before the number of sheets reaches the upper limit, such as when the number of sheets reaches the upper limit, the second excess flag is set.

If the first excess flag or the second excess flag is set, for example, even if you win a stock lottery and increase the stock counter, you will not be able to enjoy the benefit of the increase due to forced termination. Therefore, for example, if the player wins a stock lottery in a situation where the first excess flag or the second excess flag is set, in addition to or instead of increasing the stock counter, the player will be forced to enter the advantageous section as another benefit. It may also be configured to terminate the game before the termination condition is satisfied and challenge again from CZ mode (first CZ mode). More specifically, for example, if you win a stock lottery in a situation where the first excess flag or the second excess flag is set, special information about the winning will be stored and the above pre-termination conditions will be met. In such a situation, if the special information is stored, the advantageous section may be terminated based on the BB winning.

In the above modification, if the pre-termination condition is satisfied, the advantageous section is terminated based on the 1st BB winning, but if the pre-terminating condition is met, not only the 1st BB winning The advantageous section may be configured to end even if the second BB is won. In this case, by configuring the continuation flag to be cleared even if it is set when the pre-termination condition is met, it is possible to execute the AT mode termination effect at the end of the first BB state or the second BB state. Become.

In addition, in the above modification, the advantageous section is ended in the BB winning game in a situation where the prior termination condition is satisfied, but in the first embodiment, the advantageous section is terminated in the BB winning game in the situation where the preliminary termination condition is satisfied. It may also be configured to end the advantageous section (based on the end) in the end game of the state. That is, in the second section display process in FIG. 48, after an affirmative determination is made in step S2213, the process proceeds to step S4114. In this case, even if the BB end game flag is set in step S2212 and the continuation flag is set in step S2213, if the preliminary end condition is satisfied (step S4114: YES) ), the process moves to steps S2207 to S2209 for ending the advantageous section. In this case, since the BB has not been won at the end of the advantageous period, it is preferable not to perform the process of step S4115. As described above, in the first embodiment, in the advantageous section transition game process, if the transition is to an advantageous section in a situation where the BB carryover flag is not set, the CZ mode on the advantageous side is set. However, by doing the above, the BB state ends when the pre-termination condition is met, and the advantageous section ends when the BB carryover flag is not set. Even when re-transitioning to CZ mode, there is an increased possibility that the BB carryover flag is not set, and it becomes possible to try again from CZ mode.

<Modification 2>
As described above, this embodiment is configured to terminate the advantageous section if the BB is won in a situation where the continuation condition is not satisfied. However, in the second section display process, before the process for determining whether or not there is a BB win, it is determined whether or not there is a BB win in the normal mode. Furthermore, in this embodiment, if the BB state ends without the continuation condition being met, the AT mode flag is not cleared, so the AT mode will remain at least until the next BB win and the advantageous section ends. It turns out that there is. Then, if you win a BB after the bonus AT ends, even if the continuation conditions are not met, if you succeed in making a BB win in the game, it will be determined whether you have won a BB or not. The advantageous section does not end because the second section display process is ended (because it is determined that it is a BB win in the AT mode). In this modification, gameplay is created using such phenomena.

FIG. 84(a) shows a part of the lottery table for the normal game state in this modification. As for the changes in this modification, in addition to the repeat duplicate 1st BB with index values IV=25, 26 and the repeat duplicate 2nd BB as winning opportunities for the 1st BB and 2nd BB, the single BB with index values IV=28, 29 The point is that a first BB and a single second BB are set. In other words, in this modification, when the first BB of repeat duplication or the second BB of repeat duplication is won, the first replay winning flag is set in addition to the 1st BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag, and the single repeat winning flag is set. When winning the 1BB or the single 2nd BB, only the 1st BB winning flag and the 2nd BB winning flag are set. In this case, if you win the 1st BB with duplicate reps or the 2nd BB with duplicate reps, you will not be able to win the 1st BB or 2nd BB in the winning game as described above, but you will be able to win the single 1st BB or the single 2nd BB. In the case of winning, it is possible to achieve the first BB winning or the second BB winning in the winning game by aiming at the symbol corresponding to the winning and performing a stop operation. Incidentally, in this modification, the probability of winning for the individual first BB and the individual second BB is approximately 1/32.8, which is the same probability.

FIG. 85(a) is a flowchart showing bonus AT start processing in this modification.

In step S4201, it is determined that the game is not in the BB state, in step S4202, it is determined that the BB has been won, and in step S4203, it is determined that the game is in AT mode. These steps S4201 to S4203 are similar to the processing of steps S1501 to S1503 described above.

In step S4204, it is determined whether the continuation flag is set. If the continuation flag is set, it is determined in step S4205 that the game is a game in which it is possible to establish a BB win (it is a losing result), a transition permission flag is set in step S4206, and the process proceeds to step S4205. After setting the winning permission command in S4207, the process for starting the bonus AT ends. The processing from step S4205 to step S4207 is similar to the processing from step S1504 to step S1506 described above.

The case where the BB is won in a situation where the continuation flag is not set during the AT mode means that it is the first BB winning game after the bonus AT state ends without the continuation condition being satisfied. In this case, a negative determination is made in step S4204, and a continuation chance flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d in step S4208. The continuation chance flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that this is the first BB winning game after the bonus AT state ends without the continuation condition being satisfied as described above. Then, in step S4209, processing is executed to set the continuation chance command as an output target to the display control device 81. When the display control device 81 receives the continuation chance command, the display control device 81 displays a message as a continuation chance effect, such as in FIG. As shown in (b), the symbol combination that will result in a winning of the first BB and the second BB is displayed, and characters such as "Aim for it!!" are displayed.

In this modification, the CPU 102 performs the continuous chance process shown in FIG. 85(b) during the winning result handling process or every time the winning result handling process is executed.

In the continuation chance process, it is determined in step S4211 whether the continuation chance flag is set, and if it is not set, the continuation chance process is ended. If the continuation chance flag is set, it is determined in step S4212 whether any BB winning game flag is set. If the BB winning game flag is set and the corresponding BB winning game is successfully established in the BB winning game, processing for starting the bonus AT state is performed in steps S4213 to S4215. That is, in step S4213, a transfer permission flag is set, and in step S4214, a continuation flag is set. Then, in step S4215, AT continuation setting processing is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S4212, or after executing the process in step S4215, the continuation chance flag is cleared in step S4216, and then the continuation chance process ends.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 85(c1) and FIG. 85(c2), if the first BB winning is successful in the game where the continuous chance effect is performed, the bonus AT state due to the first BB state is started, and if the second BB winning is successful, a bonus AT state based on the second BB state is started. Here, in the first BB and the second BB, the corresponding symbols for winning are common on the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M, and are different on the right reel 32R. On the right reel 32R, the symbol corresponding to the first BB is a "cherry" and the symbol corresponding to the second BB is a "BAR" symbol. On the right reel 32R, the "Cherry" symbol and the "BAR" symbol are spaced apart by a maximum of 4 symbols, and the "Cherry" symbol can be stopped at a timing that allows it to stop on the active line. If you do this, you will not be able to stop the "BAR" symbol on the active line, and if you perform the stop operation at a time when it is possible to stop the "BAR" symbol on the active line, the "Cherry" symbol will stop on the active line. It is a relationship that cannot be controlled.

That is, when a continuous chance performance occurs, the player needs to select which BB to aim for, relying on intuition, and then perform a stop operation. If the selection is correct, the corresponding BB winning is established and it is possible to continue the AT mode, but if the selection is incorrect or the current BB winning game is In the case of repeat duplicate 2nd BB, as shown in Figure 84 (c3), the symbol combination corresponding to the 1st BB winning or the 2nd BB winning does not stop on the active line, and the symbol corresponding to the miss stops on the active line. Otherwise, the symbol combination corresponding to the first re-game winning will stop on the active line.

As described above, according to this modification, by utilizing the fact that in the second section display process, the process of ending the advantageous section when winning the BB and the process of ending the advantageous section when winning the BB are set, A novel gameplay experience can be realized.

In other words, in the case of a BB win, in addition to the repeat-overlapping 1st BB and the repeat-overlap 2nd BB, which are duplicate winnings with the triggering role for transition to an advantageous section such as the 1st replay, there are also overlaps with the transition triggering role such as the 1st replay, etc. By providing a single 1st BB and a single 2nd BB that do not result in winnings, it is possible to achieve a BB prize in a BB winning game in a configuration where the advantageous section and AT mode end in the BB winning game after the bonus AT state ends. Become. In this case, if the AT mode flag is set when a BB winning is achieved, the advantageous section will not end if it is set, and the advantageous section will end in the BB winning game when there is no continuation flag. In this configuration, the processing to prevent the advantageous section from ending in the BB winning game is given priority, so if you succeed in winning the BB in the BB winning game, there is no continuation flag. It is possible to continue the AT mode (shift to the bonus AT state) without ending the advantageous section even if the player wins the BB. In this way, in a configuration where the advantageous section can end based on the BB win, which should originally be something to look forward to, it is possible to increase the benefits of the BB win.

Comparing the first BB and the second BB, the left reel 32L and middle reel 32M have the same corresponding symbols, and the right reel 32R has different corresponding symbols. With this configuration, when you perform a stop operation from the left reel 32L or the middle reel 32M with the aim of winning the 1st BB prize or the 2nd BB prize, it is not possible to determine which BB has won, and the right By stopping the reel 32R, it is possible to determine which BB has won, and the timing at which this determination becomes possible can be varied depending on the manner of the stopping operation. Therefore, the player himself can select the timing for checking whether his selection is correct or not, making the game more interesting.

Incidentally, in this embodiment, if a transition to an advantageous section occurs in a situation where the BB carryover flag is set, the advantageous section is set to the CZ mode. In other words, even if it is not possible to win a prize in the single BB winning game and the advantageous section ends, the CZ mode will be set when moving to the advantageous section again. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the disadvantage of the player from becoming too large due to the player's selection error when winning a single BB, and the advantageous period ends based on each repeat BB winning. In a configuration where there is a case where the advantageous section ends based on each individual BB winning, the advantageous degree of both can be made common.

In addition, by providing a single BB as described above, in this embodiment as well, other results other than the 1st BB and the 2nd BB (1st replay to 11th replay, 1st replay, 1st replay, If the trigger results are (1st minor win to 27th minor win), the configuration will have an overlapping result of the trigger result and the BB, and a single result that includes the trigger result but does not include the BB. In this embodiment, since it is more advantageous to shift to an advantageous section when the BB carryover flag is set, for example, settings are changed when the power is turned on, and advantageous section information and carryover information are initialized. When processing is carried out, if the game starts from the normal section, if the game moves to the advantageous section based on a duplicate result win, it will be set to the normal mode, and if the game moves to the advantageous section based on a single result win, the game will be set to the normal mode. is configured to be set to CZ mode if the above-mentioned single BB has been won before that. In other words, in the morning state, by winning the single BB before the trigger result, it is possible to start the advantageous section from the CZ mode. By doing so, it is possible to improve not only the gameplay when the AT mode ends, but also the gameplay during the normal section.

<Modification 3>
In this modification, a modification will be described in which an operation for changing settings is performed. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the main processing in this modification.

In the main process in this modification, when it is determined in step S4304 that the setting key has been turned ON, after initializing the advantageous section information in step S4305, the BB Executes state information initialization processing. In the BB state information initialization process, if the BB state flag is set, it is cleared, and various information for the BB state, such as the JAC winning flag, JAC carryover flag, each JAC counter, and BB counter, is cleared. This is a clearing process. Thereafter, carryover information initialization processing is executed in step S4307, and then winning probability setting processing is executed in step S4308.

The processing from step S4301 to step S4303 and step S4309 to step S4317 is the same as the processing from step S201 to step S203 and step S207 to step S215 described above, so a description thereof will be omitted.

That is, in this modification, if the hall closes during the BB state, by performing a setting change operation, it is also possible to erase the information that the hall is in the BB state. A case where the hall closes during the BB state means a case where the game hall closes during the bonus AT state, or a situation where the transition permission flag is not set in AT mode, CZ mode, or normal mode. It is conceivable that the system is moved to .

In particular, if the store closes while in the bonus AT state, if the advantageous section information is deleted but the information indicating that the BB state is in the BB state is not deleted, then after the power is turned on, it will return to the bonus AT state. Instead, it returns to the BB state instead of the bonus AT state. In addition, the BB state does not perform AT mode transition lottery, etc., and the BB state continues until the maximum number of payouts is reached, but in the BB state, which is not a bonus AT state, the maximum number of payouts does not reach the maximum number of payouts. It takes a large number of games to reach this point, and it becomes necessary to play that large number of games without executing the AT mode transition lottery. For example, in a game hall, ending the BB state before opening will cause a significant drop in work efficiency, and if the hall is opened while the BB state is maintained, it will cause a great disadvantage to the players. It's possible. In this regard, the above-mentioned inconvenience can be avoided by configuring the configuration in which the information indicating that the vehicle is in the BB state is also deleted along with the deletion of the advantageous section information as described above.

Note that the above modification is not limited to the second embodiment, but can also be applied to the first embodiment, and in the first embodiment, when erasing advantageous section information, BB winning information is erased. It is preferable that the information in the BB state is erased.

<Modification 4>
In this modification, a modification regarding management of the number of ceiling games will be described.

As already explained, the number of ceiling games is not counted during the BB state, and even if a BB win is achieved in the normal mode, the games during the BB state do not contribute to the number of ceiling games. In the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the advantageous section is ended based on a BB win during the normal mode, and the ceiling number of games is reset by the BB win during the normal mode. The system was configured so that it would be reset in the advantageous section that follows. In this modification, the number of ceiling games is not reset.

That is, in the second section display process in this modification, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 87, if it is determined in step S4406 that the upper limit number of games or the upper limit increase number of coins in the advantageous section has not been reached, in step S4410, It is determined whether any BB winning game flag is set. If it is a BB winning game, it is determined in step S4411 whether a completed flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The completed flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the advantageous section has been temporarily ended based on the BB winning in a situation where the continuation condition is not satisfied. If the completed flag is not set, it is determined in step S4412 whether the continuation flag is set, and if the continuation flag is not set, the completed flag is set in step S4413, and then the process proceeds to step S4412. , executes processing for ending the advantageous section in steps S4407 to S4409. Note that the completed flag is not included in the advantageous section information, and is not cleared in the process for ending the advantageous section. If the completed flag is set in step S4411 or if the continuation flag is set in step S4412, the second section display process is ended without ending the advantageous section.

In this modification, there is no processing for ending the advantageous section when winning a BB prize.

In the winning result corresponding process in this modification, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 88(a), an AT start flag is set (step S1702), and an AT mode start process (steps S1702 to S1708) At this time, after setting the continuation flag (step S1707), the process of clearing the completed flag described above is executed in step S4501. Thereafter, in step S1708, processing for setting an AT start command is executed.

In addition, in the advantageous section transition game process in this modification, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 88(b), if it is determined in step S3801 that any BB carryover flag is not set, in step S4502 , determine whether the above-mentioned completed flag is set. If not set, in steps S4503 to S4505, the process of setting the number of ceiling games in steps S2106 to S2108 is executed. On the other hand, if the completed flag is set, in step S4506, the values of the storage counters provided in the various counter areas 106e are input to the ceiling counter, and the values of the storage counters are cleared. Then, the process for the advantageous section transition game ends.

Although a detailed explanation using figures will be omitted, in this modification, in the main processing when the power is turned on (FIG. 80), the value of the ceiling counter is initialized (cleared to 0) during the initialization processing of advantageous section information. In this case, input the value of the ceiling counter into the storage counter. Note that the storage counter, like the completed flag, is not included in the advantageous section information, and is not cleared in the initialization process of the advantageous section information.

In other words, for example, even if the advantageous section information is initialized during the main processing (FIG. 80) when the power is turned on and the advantageous section is set to the normal section, the completed flag and storage Since the counter is not initialized, when the game starts and shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section, the number of ceiling games before initialization is inherited by the completed flag and the storage counter.

The manner in which the number of ceiling games is set will be explained with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 89.

Suppose that the AT mode is entered at timing t41 and the bonus AT state is started at timing t42, but the bonus AT state ends at timing t43 without the continuation condition being satisfied. In this case, if the BB is won at timing t44 immediately after, the advantageous section ends and the end flag is set as described above. Then, when shifting to the advantageous section again at timing t45, the CZ mode is set. If the CZ mode ends without transitioning to the AT mode at timing t46, a transition to the normal mode occurs and the number of ceiling games is set.

In the normal mode, when a BB winning is established at the timing t47 when the transition to the AT mode has not occurred, the advantageous section does not end at the time of the BB winning in this modification, so the advantageous section does not end at the timing t47. It is assumed that the BB state in which the prize was won at the timing t47 ends at the timing t48, and then the BB win is won again at the timing t49. In this case, since the completed flag is set as described above, the advantageous section does not end. Therefore, the advantageous section does not shift again, and the ceiling number of games is not reset. Note that in the game during the BB state from t47 to t48, the number of ceiling games is not counted. However, even in the game during the BB state from t47 to t48, the number of advantageous section games AG is counted.

At timing t50, when the ceiling number of games set at t46 is exhausted, a shift to AT mode occurs. In this case, the completed flag is cleared upon starting the AT mode. Then, the bonus AT state is started at timing t51. At the timing t52 when the bonus AT state ends, the continuation condition is satisfied, and even if BB is re-elected at the timing t53, the advantageous section does not end. Furthermore, in this case, the completed flag is not set either.

If the bonus AT state starts at the timing t54 and ends at the timing t55 without the continuation condition being satisfied, the advantageous section ends when the BB is won at the subsequent timing t56. In this case, the completed flag is set as described above. Thereafter, when re-transferring to the advantageous section at timing t57, the CZ mode is set.

As described above, according to this modification, when a BB is won after the end of the bonus AT, once the advantageous period has ended, even if a new BB is won by winning a BB in the normal mode, it will be advantageous. The period does not end and the ceiling number of games is maintained. Therefore, by repeating BB winnings in the normal mode, it is possible to prevent the phenomenon of being unable to reach the ceiling endlessly.

In addition, the completed flag is managed separately from the advantageous section information, and is not cleared when the advantageous section information is initialized, so that the advantageous section information is initialized when settings are changed. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the player from discovering the presence or absence of setting changes (the presence or absence of initialization processing) based on whether or not the advantageous section at the time of BB winning ends before the AT mode is won. More specifically, since the value of the ceiling counter is saved to the storage counter when initializing the advantageous section information, even if the number of ceiling games is reset due to a setting change, etc. After the transition, the number of ceiling games before the reset will be carried over. Therefore, by shifting to the AT mode from the ceiling number of games, it is possible to prevent the player from discovering whether or not the settings have been changed.

In addition, as mentioned above, even if you do not reset the number of ceiling games even if you win a BB prize in normal mode, the number of ceiling games will not be counted in the game in BB state, and in AT mode There will also be no transition lottery. On the other hand, the number of games in the advantageous section AG is counted, so if you later switch to AT mode, the number of games up to the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section will be the number of games in the BB state in which you won a prize midway through. will be reduced by the amount of In other words, while maintaining the premise that achieving a BB win during normal mode is basically an act that creates a disadvantageous situation for the player, do not just reset the ceiling number of games. ing. By doing this, it becomes possible to properly balance the act of erroneously winning a BB prize during the normal mode and the penalty thereof.

Although the configuration is such that the value of the ceiling counter is saved to the storage counter during the initialization process of the advantageous section information, it may be configured that the value is not saved. In this case, it is preferable that the process for setting the number of ceiling games is performed in the advantageous section transition game process even if the completed flag is set. In this configuration, when the information for advantageous sections is initialized when changing settings, etc., the information regarding advantageous sections is erased, and the number of ceiling games is then reset when moving to an advantageous section, while the completed flag is is not cleared during the initialization process, so if a BB is won after shifting to an advantageous section and before shifting to AT mode, the end of the advantageous section in the BB winning game is avoided.

The above modification is also applicable to the first embodiment, and in this case, the process of step S4410 is changed to a process of determining whether any BB end game flag is set, and the BB end game flag is set. If the game is a finished game, the finished flag is set in step S4413 on condition that the finished flag is not set (step S4412: NO) and there is no continuation flag (step S4413: NO). good. Even if you do this, even if a BB winning is established in the normal mode and the BB ending game occurs again as an opportunity to end the advantageous section, the above completed flag is set, so the advantageous section will be closed. It is possible to prevent it from terminating.

Further, the above-mentioned completed flag may be set when moving to an advantageous section. More specifically, a completed flag may be set in the advantageous section transition game process. By doing this, it is possible to treat the completed flag as information for advantageous sections, and clear the completed flag when forcibly terminating an advantageous section or when initializing advantageous section information when changing settings. It is also possible to do this, and there is no need to save the value in the storage counter by simply clearing the ceiling counter when initializing the advantageous section information. In this case, the number of ceiling games will also be cleared by initializing the advantageous section information in conjunction with the setting change.

In the above modification, when the advantageous section is once ended in the BB winning game, the completed flag is set, and the end of the advantageous section is restricted in the subsequent BB winning game. As in the second embodiment, it is assumed that the advantageous section may end in a BB winning game, and if the completed flag is set in the BB winning game, the advantageous section ends. However, if the completion flag is not set in the BB winning game, the advantageous section may be ended.

<Third embodiment>
In this embodiment, the advantageous section is terminated when a BB is won in a situation where the continuation condition is not satisfied as in the second embodiment, and the type of BB for which the advantageous section is to be terminated is specified in advance. The configuration is as follows.

<AT continuation setting process>
FIG. 90(a) is a flowchart showing the AT continuation setting process in this embodiment. As already explained, the AT continuation setting process is a process that is executed when the AT mode flag is set in the winning result corresponding process (FIG. 43).

In this embodiment, it is determined in step S4601 whether any BB end game flag is set. If it is not the BB end game, the AT continuation setting process is ended. If it is a BB ending game, the next BB lottery table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a in step S4602, and the next BB lottery is executed in step S4603. For the next BB lottery, specify the next winning BB after the BB state that ends this time, and if the winning BB is the specified BB, the advantageous section will continue, and if the winning BB is a different BB from the specified BB, then the winning BB will continue. This is a process for specifying the next winning BB in a configuration where the advantageous section ends. In addition, in the following explanation, the BB designated in the next BB lottery will also be referred to as the "next designated BB".

In the next BB lottery table, as shown in FIG. 90(b), the probability of being set as the next designated BB is different between the first BB and the second BB, and the first BB is more likely to be set as the next designated BB than the second BB. It is becoming easier to As shown in FIG. 90(c), in the normal gaming state lottery table (FIG. 19), the probability of winning the first BB is approximately 1/20.1, and the probability of winning the second BB is approximately 6.7. The second BB is easier to win than the first BB. In other words, when comparing the 1st BB and the 2nd BB, the 1st BB is more likely to be selected as the next designated BB, but has a lower winning probability, and the 2nd BB is less likely to be selected as the next designated BB, but has a higher winning probability. It is set.

After executing the next BB lottery in step S4603, it is determined in step S4604 whether the result of the next BB lottery is the first BB. If the next designated BB is the first BB, the flag for the first BB is set in step S4605, and the process of setting the command for the first BB as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step S4606. , the AT continuation setting process ends. Further, in step S4604, if it is the second BB instead of the first BB, a flag for the second BB is set in step S4607, and a command for the second BB is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S4608. After executing the process, the AT continuation setting process ends. The display control device 81 that has received the command for the 1st BB displays an effect corresponding to the next designated BB being set as the 1st BB (for example, a character display such as "Aim to win the 1st BB!!" and a corresponding sound effect) The auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that this is performed. In addition, the display control device 81 that has received the command for the second BB displays an effect corresponding to the next designated BB being set as the second BB (for example, a character display such as "Aim to win the second BB!!" or an effect corresponding thereto). The auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the sound (sound) is played. In this case, the performance corresponding to the next designated BB being set as the first BB and the performance corresponding to the next designated BB being set as the second BB are different so that the player can identify them.

However, it may be arranged so that it is not possible to clearly distinguish between the performance corresponding to the next designated BB being set as the first BB and the performance corresponding to the next designated BB being set as the second BB. For example, in a configuration in which each performance is determined by lottery, the next designated BB will be set as the first BB more when a command for the first BB is received than when a command for the second BB is received. The configuration may be such that the performance corresponding to the BB is easily selected, and the selection of the performance based on the lottery may include a case where a performance is performed in which it is not possible to determine which BB is set as the designated BB next time. Furthermore, regardless of the lottery result or the next designated BB, an effect may be performed in which it is impossible to determine which BB has been set as the next designated BB.

In addition, the lottery probability of which of the effects corresponding to the next specified BB being set as the first BB and the effects corresponding to the next specified BB being set as the second BB to be executed is determined according to the set next time specification. Regardless of the BB, a configuration may be adopted in which a performance to be performed is selected with a probability corresponding to the probability of the next BB lottery. In other words, the next time the specified BB is set as the 1st BB, the effect corresponding to it will be executed with about 70% probability, and the next time specified BB will be set as the 2nd BB, the effect corresponding to the case will be executed with about 30% probability. It is also possible to have a configuration in which Furthermore, it may be configured to execute a selection rate effect (specific effect) corresponding to the selection rate in the next BB lottery. That is, for example, the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 may be controlled so that characters such as "1st BB means continuation chance! 2nd BB means continuation pinch!!" or sound effects are emitted. .

<Second section display process>
Next, the second section display process in this embodiment will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 91.

In this embodiment, after the remaining number of coins management process is executed in step S2205, it is determined in step S4701 whether the upper limit number of games or the upper limit increased number of coins in the advantageous section has been reached. If any of the upper limits has been reached, processing for ending the advantageous section is executed in steps S4702 to S4704. If it is determined in step S4701 that none of the upper limits has been reached, it is determined in step S4705 whether or not any BB winning game flag is set, and if it is set, step S4706 In the normal mode, it is determined whether or not it is a BB win before the AT mode win. In the case of the BB winning before the AT mode winning in the normal mode, processing for ending the advantageous section is executed in steps S4702 to S4704. If it is a BB win in a mode other than the normal mode, the second section display process is ended without ending the advantageous section. The processing in steps S4701 to S4706 is similar to the processing in steps S2206 to S2211 described above.

If it is determined in step S4705 that it is not a BB winning game, it is determined in step S4707 whether any BB winning game flag is set. If it is a BB winning game, it is determined in step S4708 whether the first BB winning game flag is set. If it is a winning game for the first BB, the flag for the first BB is set in step S4709, and it is determined whether the next designated BB is the first BB. If the next designated BB is the first BB and the first BB is won, the flag for the first BB is cleared in step S4710, and the second section display process is ended. In this case, the advantageous section does not end. On the other hand, if the 2nd BB flag is set in step S4709 and the next designated BB is the 2nd BB, but the 1st BB is won, in step S4711 the flag for the 2nd BB is set. After clearing the flag, processing for ending the advantageous section is executed in steps S4702 to S4704.

If the first BB winning flag is not set in step S4708 and it is a winning game for the second BB, it is determined in step S4712 whether or not the second BB flag is set and the next designated BB is the second BB. judge. If the second BB flag is not set and the next designated BB is the first BB, but the second BB is won, the first BB flag is cleared in step S4713, and then step In steps S4702 to S4704, processing for ending the advantageous section is executed. If the next designated BB is the second BB and the second BB is won, the flag for the second BB is cleared in step S4714, and the second section display process is ended. In this case, the advantageous section does not end.

<Game flow>
The flow of the game in this embodiment will be explained with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 92.

Assume that the AT mode is entered in a situation where the first BB winning is carried over at timing t1, and the bonus AT state based on the first BB state is started at timing t2. If the bonus AT state ends at timing t3, the next BB lottery will be held. At t3, the next designated BB is set as the first BB, and the first BB flag is set. Then, if the first BB is won at timing t4, the next designated BB and the winning BB match, so the advantageous section does not end and the bonus AT state based on the first BB state starts at timing t5. .

When the bonus AT state ends at timing t6, the next BB lottery is similarly held, and in this case, the next designated BB is set as the second BB and the second BB flag is set. Then, if the second BB is won at timing t7, the next designated BB and the winning BB match, so the advantageous section does not end and the bonus AT state based on the second BB state starts at timing t8. .

When the bonus AT state ends at timing t9, the next BB lottery is similarly held, and in this case, the next designated BB is set as the second BB and the second BB flag is set. Then, when the first BB is won at timing t10, the advantageous section ends because the next designated BB and the won BB do not match. Thereafter, when shifting to the advantageous section at timing t11, the shift to the advantageous section occurs in a situation where the first BB carryover flag is set, so the first CZ mode is set.

When the shift to the AT mode occurs at timing t12, the bonus AT state based on the first BB state starts from timing t13. When the bonus AT state ends at timing t14, the next BB lottery is similarly performed, and in this case, the next designated BB is set as the first BB and the first BB flag is set. Then, when the second BB is won at timing t15, the advantageous section ends because the next designated BB and the won BB do not match. Thereafter, when shifting to the advantageous section at timing t16, the shift to the advantageous section occurs in a situation where the second BB carryover flag is set, so the second CZ mode is set.

Thereafter, when the second CZ mode ends without transition to the AT mode at timing t17, the mode transitions to the normal mode.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

During AT mode, set a BB for continuation (set the 1st BB flag and 2nd BB flag), and if the next winning BB is the corresponding BB, continue AT mode without ending the advantageous section. On the other hand, if it is a BB that does not correspond, the advantageous section is ended and the AT mode is terminated, so that depending on the type of BB won, you can enjoy the benefits of the bonus AT state as a BB state in AT mode. To increase interest in which BB will be won and to realize an unprecedentedly interesting game experience, in which there are cases where the AT mode ends and the benefits of the bonus AT state cannot be enjoyed. becomes possible.

In this case, the setting of the BB for continuation is performed between the winning of the BB and the end of the BB state, and more specifically, the setting of the BB for continuation is performed at the end of the BB state. Assuming that multiple BB wins do not overlap, if the continuation BB setting is done between the BB win and the end of the BB state, the continuation BB setting will be done before the BB win. will be executed reliably. By setting the continuation BB at the end of the BB, for example, when performing a performance for the continuation BB that has been set, the winning BB and the ongoing BB status and the continuation BB can be set. This makes it difficult to confuse the BB with the BB, making it possible to suitably enjoy the above-mentioned gameplay.

Here, as described above, there is no difference between the first BB state and the second BB state in the upper limit payout number and the lottery table during the BB state, and the advantages as the BB state are the same. However, since the first BB is more likely to be selected as the next designated BB, it can be said that the first BB is a more advantageous BB than the second BB as the winning BB after the bonus AT state ends. Then, the configuration is such that an effect is performed that the player cannot clearly grasp the set next designated BB, for example, the selection rate effect mentioned above ("If it is the 1st BB, there is a chance to continue!! If it is the 2nd BB, it is a continuation pinch!!") If the configuration is such that the bonus AT is over, it is considered that the player expects to win the first BB rather than the second BB after the bonus AT ends.

On the other hand, even if the first BB is won after the bonus AT state, if the second BB is set as the next designated BB, the advantageous section will end. In this case, the player's level of disappointment can be immeasurable.

Therefore, in the above embodiment, when the advantageous section ends based on the first BB win, the first CZ mode is set, which has a relatively high probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery, so the bonus AT After the state ends, the decrease in the desire to play due to the end of the advantageous section even though the 1st BB was won as expected can be suppressed by pulling back to the AT mode such as the 1st CZ mode. It is possible to follow.

Regarding the winning probability of each game, the second BB is more likely to win than the first BB. Therefore, after the bonus AT state ends, the probability of winning the advantageous 1st BB is suppressed, the balance of advantage is guaranteed, and it is possible to further improve the happiness when winning the 1st BB. becomes.

On the premise that the advantageous section information is initialized at the end of the advantageous section, and the information is reset for each advantageous section, the next time using the result information of the game that triggered the end of the advantageous section, By setting the degree of advantage of the advantageous sections, it becomes possible to associate consecutive advantageous sections with each other.

In particular, by adopting a configuration that uses the winning information of the 1st BB and 2nd BB as bonuses that can be carried over, it is possible to make good use of the existing configuration and associate advantageous sections with each other without using a complicated configuration. It becomes possible.

On the other hand, if you win the 1st BB or 2nd BB and the advantageous section ends, if you win the 1st BB or 2nd BB before moving to the advantageous section again, the 1st BB carryover flag and the 2nd BB carryover flag The transition will be to an advantageous section without a flag, and the normal mode will be set. In this case, the information on the previous advantageous section will not be carried over to the next advantageous section, and the next advantageous section will be in a more disadvantageous state than when the information on the previous advantageous section was inherited. Therefore, by preventing such disadvantageous events from occurring, it is possible to encourage players not to achieve the first BB win or the second BB win, and to successfully transfer information between advantageous sections. becomes possible.

<Modification 1>
In this modification, the type of the next designated BB to be selected in the next BB lottery may vary depending on the number of bonus AT states after transition to the AT mode. FIG. 93(a) is a flowchart showing the AT continuation setting process in this modification.

In step S4801, it is determined whether or not it is a BB end game, and if it is not a BB end game, the AT continuation setting process is ended. If it is a BB end game, in step S4802, processing is performed to add 1 to the consecutive game counters provided in the various counter areas 106e. The consecutive game counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to keep track of the number of bonus AT states after shifting to the AT mode. After performing the addition process of the consecutive game counter, the next BB lottery table is acquired in step S4803, and then the next BB lottery is performed in step S4804.

As shown in FIG. 93(b), the next BB lottery table in this modification is set so that the BB set as the next designated BB can vary depending on the value of the consecutive games counter. For example, if the consecutive game counter is 1 to 11, the 1st BB is more likely to be set as the next designated BB than the 2nd BB, and if the consecutive game counter is 13 to 23, the 2nd BB is more likely than the 1st BB. If the BB is likely to be set as the next designated BB and the successive game counter is 25 or more, the first BB and the second BB are set to have the same ease of being set as the next designated BB. Furthermore, in this modification, in addition to the case where either the first BB or the second BB is set as the next designated BB, there is also a case where both the first BB and the second BB are set as the next designated BB. (Successive home counter = 12, 24).

After the next BB lottery is performed in step S4804, it is determined in step S4805 whether both the 1st BB and the 2nd BB have been selected as the next designated BB (whether it was a double win with consecutive winnings counter = 12, 24 or not). ). If an affirmative determination is made in step S4805, the first BB flag is set in step S4806, the second BB flag is set in step S4807, and the common command is output to the display control device 81 in step S4808. After executing the process of setting the AT continuation setting process, the AT continuation setting process ends. In this case, in the second section display process, the AT mode is continued without ending the advantageous section, regardless of whether the first BB or the second BB is won. In addition, it is preferable to clear not only the BB flag corresponding to the winning BB but also the other BB flag upon completion of the second section display process. In addition, the display control device 81 that has received the common command displays effects corresponding to the next designated BB being set as the first BB and the second BB (for example, text display such as "Successive home confirmed!!" and effects corresponding thereto). The auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the sound (sound) is played.

If it is determined in step S4805 that it is not a double win, it is determined in step S4809 whether or not the first BB has been selected as the next designated BB, and if it is the first BB, the flag for the first BB is determined in step S4810. is set, and in step S4811, the process of setting the first BB command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the AT continuation setting process is ended. If it is the second BB, a flag for the second BB is set in step S4812, a process is executed to set the command for the second BB as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S4813, and then the AT Ends the continuation setting process.

By doing as described above, after the bonus AT ends, which of the first BB and the second BB should be won changes depending on the number of consecutive wins in the bonus AT state, thereby diversifying the game.

In particular, since the lottery process for each game is structured so that it is easier to win the second BB than the first BB, the second BB is more likely to be set as the next designated BB than the first BB (consecutive game counter = 13 ~ In 23), the AT mode continuation rate is higher than in a situation where the first BB is more likely to be set as the next designated BB than the second BB (consecutive shots counter=1 to 11). In this way, it is possible to change the continuation rate of the AT mode simply by changing the selection rate of the next designated BB using the consecutive game counter, and it is possible to easily improve the interest of the game in relation to the number of consecutive games. .

More specifically, in the above configuration, the goal is clarified such that if the bonus AT state is played up to 11 times in a row, the continuation rate of AT mode will be high. This makes the game even more interesting, as players manage to keep playing until the 11th time, and after that, they can play the game with a sense of superiority due to the high success rate.

<Modification 2>
A modification of the next BB lottery table will be explained based on the example shown in FIG. 94.

FIG. 94(a) shows an example in which the BB to be terminated this time also participates in the selection of the next designated BB. In this example, the 1st BB end game flag is set in the AT continuation setting process, and when the 1st BB state is ended, the 1st BB is more likely to be selected as the next designated BB than the 2nd BB, and the 2nd BB end game flag is set. The flag is set so that when the second BB state is terminated, the second BB is more likely to be selected as the next designated BB than the first BB. By doing this, the next designated BB is set in relation to the BB that won by the player's stop operation, so even if the next designated BB is set on the gaming machine side, the player It is possible to make the player feel as if he or she is involved in the game, and it is possible to successfully increase the degree of attention to the game.

FIG. 94(b) shows an example in which the setting value set by the winning probability setting process is involved in the selection of the next designated BB. In this example, the setting is such that the higher the setting value is, the higher the ratio of the second BB being selected as the next designated BB. As mentioned above, the second BB has a higher winning probability than the first BB in the lottery process of each game, so it is better to set the second BB as the next designated BB than to set the first BB as the AT mode. It is likely that this will continue. That is, as described above, by making the second BB more likely to be selected as the setting value becomes higher, it is possible to create a configuration in which the higher the setting value is, the higher the AT mode continuation rate becomes. In this way, even if the probability of winning the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is not changed by the set value, the ball payout rate can be changed by the set value while being associated with the gameplay such as the advantageous section may end based on the BB winning. can be well adjusted.

FIG. 94(c) shows an example in which the number of advantageous section games AG is involved in the selection of the next designated BB. In this example, the setting is such that the larger the value of the number of advantageous section games AG is, the higher the ratio of the second BB being selected as the next designated BB. In this slot machine 10, the gameplay is based on the assumption that the player is staying in the advantageous section, and the number of remaining games is such that the transition to AT mode does not occur until the number of remaining games reaches the upper limit of the number of games in the advantageous section at the time of transition to AT mode. This is a configuration that can reduce the number of times. On that point, by doing the above, if the transition to AT mode does not occur easily, the second BB will be more likely to be selected as the next designated BB from the beginning of AT mode, and the so-called stuckness will occur until the transition to AT mode. It is possible to compensate for this.

<Modification 3>
In the third embodiment, after the bonus AT state ends, the AT mode transition lottery is performed to compensate for the fact that the advantageous section ends even though the player wins an advantageous BB that is likely to be selected as the designated BB next time. Although the configuration is such that the transition to the CZ mode, which is easier to win, has been adopted, in this modification, the configuration for compensating for this is changed. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the advantageous section transition game process in this modification. The advantageous section transition game process is a process executed at the start of the game that caused the transition to the advantageous section (section display first process).

In step S4901, it is determined whether any BB carryover flag is set. If the transition is to an advantageous section in a situation where the BB carryover flag is set, the process advances to step S4902, and it is determined whether the first BB carryover flag is set. If the first BB carryover flag is set, in step S4903, a process is executed to set a high probability command of setting suggestion effect as an output target to the display control device 81. In step S4902, if the second BB carryover flag is set instead of the first BB carryover flag, in step S4904, a process is executed to set the low probability command of the setting suggestion effect as an output target to the display control device 81. . After executing the processing in step S4903 or step S4904, the CZ mode flag is set in step S4905, 32 is input to the CZ counter in step S4906, and then the processing for the advantageous section transition game is ended. If a negative determination is made in step S4901, the process for setting the number of ceiling games is performed in steps S4907 to S4909, and then the process for the advantageous section transition game ends. The display control device 81 that has received the high probability command for the setting suggestion effect sets the display to a high probability state in which the setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value occurs with a relatively high probability, and displays the display that has received the low probability command for the setting suggestion effect. The control device 81 sets a low probability state in which a setting suggestion effect occurs with a relatively low probability.

That is, in this modification, even if either the first BB or the second BB is won and the advantageous section ends, the same CZ mode is set when moving to the advantageous section thereafter. On the other hand, if you win the 1st BB and the advantageous section ends, you will be in a high probability state of setting suggestion effects, and if you win the 2nd BB and the advantageous section ends, you will be in a low probability state of setting suggestion effects. becomes.

The setting suggestion process of the display control device 81 for executing the setting suggestion effect will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 96(a). The setting suggestion process is, for example, a process carried out in the other start effect setting process of step S2411 of the start effect setting process (FIG. 51).

In step S5001, it is determined whether the lottery result of the game to be started this time is the lottery result that becomes an opportunity to execute special performance A. Special performance A is one of the suggestion notification performances that suggest a set value, and in this modification, cherry A is set as the lottery result that triggers the execution of special performance A. That is, in this modification, if Cherry A is won, special effect A as setting suggestion notification may occur.

If the lottery result of the current game is Cherry A, the process advances to step S5002, and a lottery process for setting suggestion performance for special performance A is executed. In the lottery process for setting suggestion effects for special effect A, as shown in FIG. The odds are set to win. In addition, in the low probability state of the setting suggestion effect, settings 2, 4, and 6 have a higher probability of winning than settings 1, 3, and 5, but the difference is smaller than in the high probability state. is set to .

In step S5003, it is determined whether or not the suggestion lottery in step S5002 has been won, and if the suggestion lottery has not been won, the setting suggestion process is directly ended. In the case of winning, the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the special effect A as a setting suggestion effect is executed in step S5004. As the special effect A, for example, a predetermined character (for example, a boy character) appears on the auxiliary display section 65 and a predetermined sound effect (for example, "YES!!") is emitted.

If it is determined in step S5001 that the lottery result is not an opportunity to execute special effect A, in step S5005, it is determined whether the lottery result of the game to be started this time is a lottery result that is an opportunity to execute special effect B. Determine whether Special performance B is one of the suggestion notification performances that suggest a set value, and is a performance that differs from special performance A in its performance content (at least one of display content, sound effects, and performance generation timing). In this modification, Cherry B is set as the lottery result that triggers the execution of special performance B. That is, in this modification, if Cherry B is won, special effect B as setting suggestion notification may occur.

If the lottery result of the current game is Cherry B, the process advances to step S5006, and a lottery process for setting suggestion performance for special performance B is executed. In the lottery process for the setting suggestion performance for the special performance B, as shown in FIG. 96(b), if the setting suggestion performance is in a high probability state, it is set such that the higher the setting, the higher the probability of winning. Furthermore, even in the low probability state of the setting suggestion performance, the higher the setting, the more likely you will win, but the difference is set to be smaller than in the high probability state.

In step S5007, it is determined whether or not the suggestion lottery in step S5006 has been won, and if the suggestion lottery has not been won, the setting suggestion process is directly terminated. In the case of winning, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that special performance B as a setting suggestion performance is executed in step S5008. As the special effect B, for example, a predetermined character (for example, a girl character) appears on the auxiliary display section 65 and a predetermined sound effect (for example, "Kyaha!!") is emitted. There is.

As described above, if the advantageous section ends when the first BB is won after the bonus AT state, by creating a high probability state of setting suggestion effect, it is easier to be set as the designated BB next time and win the advantageous BB. However, it is possible to compensate for the fact that the advantageous section ends despite the fact that the set value is easier to predict and specify. By doing this, it becomes possible to configure the compensation within a range that does not easily affect the ball output rate, and avoids the situation where the ball output rate becomes too high due to an attempt to make the compensation too generous. be able to.

Note that, as described above, the configuration in which the setting suggestion effect is set to a high probability state or a low probability state depending on the type of carryover flag set at the time of transition to an advantageous section may be implemented in other embodiments. May be applied. Also, if you move to an advantageous section in a situation where the 1st BB carryover flag is set, it will be set to a low probability state of setting suggestion effect, and if you move to an advantageous section in a situation where the 2nd BB carryover flag is set, it will be set. The relationship between the carryover flag that is set and the level of the set suggestive performance state may be reversed to that described above, such as setting the suggestive performance to a high probability state.

Furthermore, depending on the type of carryover flag set at the time of transition to an advantageous section, the setting suggestion effect is set to either a high probability state or a low probability state, and the setting is set to normal mode instead of CZ mode. You can also use it as That is, in FIG. 95, the configuration is such that the normal mode is set regardless of the presence or absence of the BB carryover flag, and when the first BB carryover flag is set, the high probability state of the setting suggestion effect is set, and the When the 2BB carryover flag is set, a low probability state of setting suggestion performance is set, and furthermore, no matter which state is set, the setting process of the number of ceiling games may be performed. In this case, if neither the first BB carryover flag nor the second BB carryover flag is set, the configuration sets the state to a state with a lower probability than the low probability state when the second BB carryover flag is set. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the state is set to be the same as the low probability state when the second BB carryover flag is set, and the state is even higher probability than the high probability state when the first BB carryover flag is set. The configuration may be such that the high probability state is set to be the same as the high probability state when the first BB carryover flag is set, and the high probability state is lower than the high probability state when the first BB carryover flag is set. It is also possible to set the state to a state with higher probability than the low probability state when the second BB carryover flag is set.

<Fourth embodiment>
In this embodiment, after the bonus AT state, if the second BB is won after a predetermined number of games, the advantageous period can end. FIG. 97(a) shows a part of the lottery table for the normal game state in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, if the winning occurs when the index value IV=25, the first BB winning flag is set, and if the winning occurs when the index value IV=26, the second BB winning flag is set, and these index values IV= In the case of winning on 25th and 26th, no winning flags other than the 1st BB winning flag and the 2nd BB winning flag are set. In other words, both the 1st BB and the 2nd BB are configured so that they are not won in combination with other winning combinations, but are won individually.

Regarding the winning probability of the 1st BB and the 2nd BB, in this embodiment, the probability of winning the 1st BB is about 1/6.7, the probability of winning the 2nd BB is about 1/20.1, It is set so that the first BB is easier to win than the second BB.

In addition, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the upper limit number of payouts is different in this embodiment. In the first BB state, the upper limit number of payouts is set as 140 coins, while in the second BB state, the upper limit number of payouts is 20 coins. The first BB state is set to be more advantageous to the player than the second BB state.

Furthermore, the reel control of each game is different depending on whether you win the first BB or the second BB, and especially in games where each BB winning flag is set, a BB winning is established. The reel control is different in the case where the winning combination cannot be achieved and the winning of other combinations cannot be achieved.

More specifically, in a game in which the 1st BB winning flag is set, that is, in a game that carries over from the 1st BB winning game and after that, and in which the result is a loss, it is possible to achieve the 1st BB winning. If the stop operation is performed at a timing that is not possible, as shown in FIG. 97(b1), the "bell" symbols are aligned on the middle line L2 and the machines stop. In this embodiment, a stopping mode in which the "bell" symbols are aligned and stopped on the middle line L2 (a stopping mode in which "bell" symbols, "replay" symbols, and "watermelon" symbols are stopped from the left on the active line) is a winning mode. This is not set as a stopping mode for the game, no transition of game status or replay is given, and no medals are paid out. In other words, in this embodiment, the stopping mode in which the "bell" symbols are aligned on the middle line L2 and stops serves as a so-called reach eye for notifying the winning of the first BB.

On the other hand, in a game in which the 2nd BB winning flag is set, that is, a game in which the 2nd BB winning game and subsequent games are carried over, and in which the result is a loss, the 2nd BB winning is established. If the stop operation is performed at a timing when it is not possible to do so, as shown in FIG. 97(b2), a so-called missed bet that can be stopped even when the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag are not set will be stopped.

In other words, in the normal gaming state, assuming that a stop operation that prevents the 1st BB winning or the 2nd BB winning is performed before the winning permission announcement is made, if the 1st BB winning is In this case, it is possible to know that you have won the 1st BB by stopping the above-mentioned reach number, but if you have won the 2nd BB, you cannot know that you have won the 2nd BB because the above-mentioned reach number does not stop. . In other words, in the normal gaming state, it is predicted that the 2nd BB has already been won because the reach number does not stop even after playing for a while, such as by playing the number of games that is greater than the denominator of the winning probability of the 1st BB. It is also possible to do so.

FIG. 97(c) is a flowchart showing processing for advantageous section transition games in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, the normal mode is uniformly set regardless of the presence or absence of the BB carryover flag at the time of transition to an advantageous section. In other words, in the advantageous section transition game process, regardless of the presence or absence of the BB carryover flag, the ceiling game number table is acquired in step S5101, the ceiling game number lottery process is performed in step S5102, and the ceiling game number table is performed in step S5103. Execute the process of inputting the number to the ceiling counter.

<Second section display process>
FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the second section display process in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, if it is determined in step S5201 that the current period is in an advantageous period, in step S5202, none of the BB winning flags, BB carryover flags, and BB status flags are set, and the current It is determined whether the gaming state is a normal gaming state. In the case of the normal gaming state, in step S5203, a process of adding 1 to the post-BB counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The post-BB counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to keep track of the number of games after the setting is changed or after the BB state ends, and is cleared by winning any BB.

If a negative determination is made in step S5202, or after the process in step S5203 is executed, the process advances to step S5204, and processes for managing the number of games and the number of increased/decreased coins during the advantageous period from step S5204 to step S5207 are executed. The processing in steps S5204 to S5207 is similar to the processing in steps S2202 to S2205.

In step S5208, it is determined whether the upper limit number of games or the upper limit increased number of coins in the advantageous section has been reached. If any of the upper limits has been reached, processing for ending the advantageous section is executed in steps S5209 to S5211. If it is determined in step S5208 that none of the upper limits has been reached, it is determined in steps S5212 and S5213 whether or not this is a BB winning game in the normal mode before the AT mode winning. Note that in this embodiment, the CZ mode is not provided, and in step S5213, if neither the AT mode winning flag nor the AT mode flag is set, it is determined that the AT mode has not been won in the normal mode. . If it is a BB winning game before the AT mode winning in the normal mode, processing for ending the advantageous section is executed in steps S5209 to S5211. The processing from step S5208 to step S5213 is also similar to the processing from step S2206 to step S2211.

If it is determined in step S5212 that it is not a BB winning game, it is determined in step S5214 whether any BB winning game flag is set. If it is a BB winning game, it is determined in step S5215 whether the above-mentioned post-BB counter has a value larger than 20 or not. That is, the process of step S5215 is a process of determining whether or not the next BB win has occurred within 20 games as the predetermined number of games after the BB state ends.

If the after-BB counter is a value larger than 20 and the BB is won more than a predetermined number of games after the end of the BB state, the process of clearing the after-BB counter to 0 is executed in step S5216, and then in step S5217. Then, it is determined whether the BB that won this time is the second BB. If the 2nd BB winning game flag is set and it is the 2nd BB winning game, processing for ending the advantageous section is executed in steps S5209 to S5211, and then the section display second processing is ended. On the other hand, if the first BB winning game flag is set in step S5217 and it is the first BB winning game, the second section display process is ended without ending the advantageous section.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5215 that the BB has been won within 20 games, in step S5218 the process of clearing the post-BB counter to 0 is executed, and then the winning period without ending the advantageous period is executed. The second display process ends. That is, if a BB win is won within a predetermined number of games after the BB state ends, the advantageous section will not end. That is, after the end of the BB state, if the BB is won more than a predetermined number of games, the advantageous section is not ended if the first BB is won, but the advantageous section is ended if the second BB is won.

<Game flow>
The flow of the game in this embodiment will be explained with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 99.

If the AT mode is entered at timing t1, which is a situation in which the second BB winning is carried over, the bonus AT state based on the second BB state is started at timing t2. As described above, in the second BB state in this embodiment, the upper limit number of payouts is 20, and the bonus AT state ends at timing t3 when the number of payouts reaches 20 or more.

When the BB state ends at timing t3, the post-BB counter starts measuring. If you win the 1st BB at timing t4, which is before the post-BB counter reaches 20 and is within 20 games after the end of the BB state at t3, you win the 1st BB by stopping the above-mentioned reach. The player can understand this. In this case, the advantageous period does not end at timing t4, and the bonus AT state based on the first BB state starts from timing t5. The upper limit number of payouts in the first BB state is 140, and the bonus AT state ends at timing t6 when the number of payouts reaches 140 or more.

If the first BB is won at timing t7, which is more than 20 games after the BB state ends at t6, the reach number stops. And in this case, the advantageous section does not end. Since the reach position can appear in the game from winning the first BB until shifting to the first BB state (t7, t8), it is difficult for the player to miss the first BB winning. Then, the bonus AT state based on the first BB state starts from timing t9.

If the second BB is won at timing t11, which is within 20 games after the BB state ends at timing t10, the reach position will not stop. However, in this case, the advantageous period does not end because the BB is won within 20 games after the BB ends. Then, a bonus AT state based on the second BB state is started from timing t12.

Even if the second BB is won at timing t14, which is more than 20 games after the BB state ends at timing t13, the reach position does not stop. However, in this case, since the second BB is won more than 20 games after the BB ends, the advantageous section ends. In this way, shift to AT mode at timing t1, use the bonus AT state (t2 to t3) due to the 2nd BB state as the start of a consecutive game, and after BB ends at t13, win the 2nd BB after playing more than 20 games. The period up to t14 is an advantageous state due to consecutive wins in the bonus AT state.

Then, when shifting to the advantageous section at timing t15, a process for setting the number of ceiling games is performed as a normal mode. For example, if the AT mode is entered at timing t16 when the ceiling number of games has been exhausted, the above set of advantageous states will start again from the bonus AT state due to the second BB state at timing t17.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

If you win the 1st BB after the BB state ends, the advantageous section will not end, but if you win the 2nd BB, the advantageous section may end, and if you win the 1st BB, the reach points will stop. However, if the second BB is won, the reach number does not stop, so that after the end of the BB state, it is possible to judge whether the advantageous section continues based on the appearance of the reach number.

Even if you win the 2nd BB, if you win within 20 games after the BB state, the advantageous section will not end, so even if you win any BB within 20 games after the BB state, the AT mode will continue. , after 20 games, the AT mode continues only for the first BB win. By doing this, after the BB state, you can expect to win any BB within 20 games, and if you do not win within 20 games, you will not be able to win the 2nd BB from then on, that is, you will not win the 1st BB. It is possible to realize gameplay that can provide an intense thrilling feeling in each situation depending on the number of games played after the end of the BB state, such as making the player look forward to what will happen.

However, when comparing the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state, the 1st BB state has a higher maximum number of medals to be paid out as an end condition and is advantageous for the player, so it is possible to win within 20 games after the BB state. However, by increasing the difference in the advantageousness of both BBs, it is possible to make the player expect to win the first BB, which is more advantageous, and to draw more attention to which BB will win.

Also in this embodiment, if a BB win is established in the advantageous section as the normal mode which is re-transferred after the AT mode ends, the advantageous section ends again. In this case, when transitioning to the advantageous section during the BB state, the normal mode is set again, and the process of setting the number of ceiling games is performed. By doing this, after the AT mode ends with the second BB win, a gaming feature is realized in which the second BB win is maintained until the AT mode is entered again. In this case, in a situation where the 2nd BB is won, the reach number does not appear as described above, so the BB win may be established by the appearance of the reach number in the game before shifting to AT mode. It is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that a situation has occurred, and to suitably realize the gaming experience of waiting for the second BB prize until the shift to the AT mode.

<Modified example>
In the fourth embodiment, the number of games after the end of the BB state is grasped by the post-BB counter, but in this modification, the number of games after the end of the BB state is grasped by the RT state set at the end of the BB state.

FIG. 100(a) is a flowchart showing the second section display process in this modification.

In step S5301, it is determined whether the gaming state is the RT state by checking the presence or absence of the RT state flag in the state information storage area 106c. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 100(b), a fixed RT state of 20 games is set at the end of the first BB, and the RT state flag is set to the bonus state process executed in the end game of the first BB state (see FIG. It is also set when setting the first BB end game flag in step 23). Further, when the RT state flag is set, in the lottery process of each game, a lottery table for the RT state is used to perform a lottery of winning combinations. Although detailed explanation with figures is omitted, the lottery table for the RT state in this modification is basically the same as the lottery table for the normal gaming state, and for example, the lottery table for the normal reply A to normal reply B is The probability of winning differs between the normal game state and the RT state, while the total probability of winning the normal reply A to normal reply B is the same in the normal game state and the RT state. Note that the total probability of normal reply A to normal reply B may be different between the normal game state and the RT state, and the winning probability of other replays may be different. Then, at the end of the second BB state, the RT state is not set.

If it is determined in step S5301 that the RT status flag is set, then in step S5302 a process of subtracting 1 from the RT counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The RT counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining games in the RT state, and 20, which corresponds to the number of games in the fixed RT state, is input when setting the RT state at the end of the first BB. In step S5303, it is determined whether the RT counter has become 0 and the number of remaining games in the RT state has become 0. If the number of remaining games is 0, processing to clear the RT status flag is executed in step S5304.

If the RT status flag is not set in step S5301, if the RT counter is not 0 in step S5303, or after the RT status flag is cleared in step S5304, the process advances to step S5305. The processing from step S5305 to step S5313 is similar to the processing from step S2201 to step S2209 described above.

In step S5310, if the condition for forced termination of the advantageous section is not satisfied, it is determined in step S5314 whether or not it is a BB winning game. If it is a BB winning game, it is determined in step S5315 whether the AT mode winning flag or the AT mode flag is set. If neither is set, the process advances to step S5311, and processing for ending the advantageous section is executed. If any flag is set, in this modification, it is determined in step S5316 whether the first BB winning game flag is set. If the first BB winning game flag is set and a winning is achieved in the first BB winning game, the process advances to step S5311, and processing for ending the advantageous section is executed. If the first BB winning game flag is not set, the second section display process is ended without ending the advantageous section.

If it is determined in step S5314 that it is not a BB winning game, it is determined in step S5317 whether any BB winning game flag is set. If it is a BB winning game, it is determined in step S5318 whether or not it is in the RT state, and if it is not in the RT state, it is determined in step S5319 whether or not it is a second BB winning game. If the game is not in the RT state and the game is the second BB winning game, the process advances to step S5311, and processing for ending the advantageous section is executed. On the other hand, if it is not a BB winning game, if it is a BB winning game in the RT state, or if it is the first BB winning game in a state other than the RT state, the advantageous section does not end and the section continues as it is. The second display process ends.

In this modification, reel control during the RT state is different from the fourth embodiment. That is, as shown in FIG. 100(c), in the RT state, even if the first BB has been won, if the stop operation is performed at a timing when the first BB cannot be won, The "bell" symbols do not line up and stop on the middle line L2, and the reach roll does not stop, resulting in a miss. In other words, in the RT state, even if a player wins either the first BB or the second BB, it is not possible to determine whether or not the player has won based on the reach number. After the RT state, similarly to the fourth embodiment, if the first BB is won, the reachable number may stop, but if the second BB is won, the reachable number may stop. do not.

Even if you use the RT state that can be transitioned to after the BB state as described above, even if you win the BB within the predetermined number of games or exceed the predetermined number of games after the BB state ends, if you win the first BB, you will be able to enter the advantageous section. It is possible to create the same gameplay as in the fourth embodiment, in which the advantageous section is not terminated, but is terminated if the second BB is won among BB wins exceeding a predetermined number of games.

In particular, in this modification, the RT state is set after the 1st BB state, but the RT state is not set after the 2nd BB state, so if the 2nd BB is won twice in a row during the AT mode. The configuration is such that the AT mode (advantageous section) ends at . In this way, by successfully applying the existing configuration such as the RT state to the end condition of the advantageous section, it becomes possible to define the consecutive winning performance of the bonus AT state with a relatively simple configuration.

Moreover, in this modification, even if the first BB is won, if the first BB is won in the winning game, the advantageous period ends. By doing so, it is possible to more reliably secure an opportunity for a reach number to appear based on the winning of the first BB, and suitably realize a game feature in which whether or not to continue an advantageous section is determined based on whether or not a reach number appears. be able to.

In this modification, even if the first BB is won during the RT state, the reach number does not stop, so that the player expects to win any BB during the RT state, and the RT state In order to make players expect to win the first BB, during the RT state, the advantageous section due to the appearance of the reach number is provided within the range of not eliminating the gameplay that makes them expect to win the BB regardless of the presence or absence of the BB type. It becomes possible to have the player play a game that requires a decision as to whether or not to continue. In other words, if we were to create a configuration in which the reachable number could stop in the RT state, since it would be more advantageous to win the first BB, we would expect the reachable number to stop even in the RT state. This is because the difference in playability after the RT state becomes smaller, and the playability in the RT state may deteriorate.

Moreover, since the 1st BB is configured to be easier to win than the 2nd BB, there are more opportunities to prevent the reach number from appearing when the 1st BB is won during the RT state, and it is possible to prevent the BB from winning through production etc. After sensing, it becomes possible to keep interest in the BB type from fading until the end.

<Other embodiments>
Note that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in each of the embodiments and modifications described above, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of the above embodiments and each modification, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above embodiments and each modification. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments and modifications. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration consisting of a combination of embodiments and modified examples, or it is also possible to apply some or all of them in combination.

(1) Although the configuration is such that the ceiling number of games is determined by lottery, it may be configured to uniformly set a predetermined number of games (999 games). By doing this, it is possible to suppress the act of repeating BB winnings in the normal mode in the expectation that a relatively short ceiling game number will be set.

(2) The set number of ceiling games may be suggested by an effect on the auxiliary display section 65 or the like. The number of ceiling games is reset by winning a BB before winning AT mode, but by doing this, the player can predict and understand the number of ceiling games based on this effect, and can win AT mode. It becomes possible to determine whether or not to establish a BB prize before resetting the ceiling number of games.

(3) When transitioning to the normal mode, the number of ceiling games is set. However, when transitioning to the advantageous section, the number of ceiling games is set regardless of the mode set. Good too. In this case, the ceiling counter may be decremented even in the CZ mode, and the ceiling counter may be decremented at a faster speed per game in the CZ mode than in the normal mode. Furthermore, the number of ceiling games to be set may be different depending on the presence or absence of the BB carryover flag, or the ceiling game number table obtained (used) may be different when setting the number of ceiling games. It may also be configured to be set as an advantageous section that is advantageous because the number of ceiling games is easily set.

Furthermore, in a configuration in which the number of ceiling games is set when transitioning from the CZ mode to the normal mode, the number of ceiling games may be set by subtracting the number of games in the CZ mode (32).

(4) By carrying over the JAC winnings during the BB state, the push order bell is won and the first minor prize is won when the push order is correct.However, regardless of whether the JAC win is carried over or not, the push order bell is won. A configuration may be adopted in which the first minor winning combination can be won as long as the pressing order matches the first minor winning combination. In addition, when the push order bell is won, in addition to the group of small roles that pay out 1 card and the group of small roles that pay out 15 cards, there are also groups of small roles that pay out more than 1 card and fewer than 15 cards. If a group is set up and the JAC winning is carried over and the pressing order matches the first minor winning prize, the first minor winning prize will be established with 15 coins paid out, and the JAC winning is not being carried over and the pressing order matches the first minor prize winning. If it matches the first minor prize winning or matches the minor prize winning which will pay out 3 coins, then the minor prize winning which will pay out 3 coins will be established, regardless of whether the JAC winning is carried over or not. If it does not match the first minor prize win or the above-mentioned minor prize prize that results in a payout of three coins, a minor prize win that results in a one coin payout may be established or may be missed.

(5) By shifting to the BB state, the probability of winning the push order bell may be higher than in the previous state (normal game state or carryover state).

(6) Among the triggering roles for the AT mode shift lottery, specific roles are set as Cherry A to Cherry C, Chance A to Chance C, and Watermelon, and the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 is such that BB winnings can be avoided. If so, the type of these specific winning combinations can be determined. However, for example, depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, a winning result may be created and a winning result may be lost. , a BB win may be avoided if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated at a timing when it becomes possible to win the missed result.

In addition, among the specific winning combinations, the difference in winning probability in the AT mode transition lottery between Cherry A, Cherry B, and Cherry C is used as a motivation for determining the type of specific winning combination (operating in an operating mode to avoid winning a BB prize). However, the presence or absence of the AT mode transition lottery may be used as a motivation for determining the type of specific combination. In addition, configuring a specific combination so that the benefits obtained depending on the winning result are different, and making it possible to obtain advantageous benefits as such benefits can be used as a motivation for operating in an operation mode for avoiding BB winnings. good.

(7) When transitioning to the BB state during the normal mode or CZ mode during the advantageous section, the push order notification is not generated in the BB state, but it may be generated. In this case, it is best to adopt a configuration in which the occurrence rate of press order notification is lower than when the transition is made to the BB state during AT mode.More specifically, when the transition is made to the BB state during AT mode, the press order notification is the highest. is likely to occur, and it is preferable to set the press order notification to be least likely to occur when the state is shifted to the BB state during the normal mode.

(8) Although the winning probability of the advantageous section transition lottery is set to 100%, it may be set to a lower winning probability. In particular, the advantageous section transition lottery is triggered by the 1st replay or the 28th small role that results in a duplicate win with the 1st BB or 2nd BB (triggered by the repeat duplicate 1st BB, repeat duplicate 2nd BB, or reach overlap BB) By making it so that there are cases in which a player does not win, it becomes possible to prevent a shift to an advantageous section from occurring as a result of these events. Then, for example, in the first embodiment, when the bonus AT state ends and the advantageous section also ends, if the repeat overlap 1st BB is won, the advantageous section transition will occur in a situation where the 1st BB carryover flag is not set. In some cases, there are cases in which transition to an advantageous section does not occur in a situation where the first BB carryover flag is not set. In other words, in the latter case, when moving to an advantageous section triggered by another small role, etc., the transition will be made in the situation where the 1st BB carryover flag is set, and the mode will be set to normal mode instead of CZ mode. will be done. By doing this, the withdrawal zone after the bonus AT state is no longer 100% granted, and the interest of the game is improved.

(9) In the BB carryover state, the configuration may be such that the index value IV = 25, 26 can also be won. In this case, if the index value IV = 25, 26 is won, the first replay winning flag is set. On the other hand, it is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag are not set. In this case, the probability of winning with index value IV = 25, 26 in the BB carryover state is the same as the probability of winning with index value IV = 25, 26 in other gaming states (for example, normal gaming state). It is preferable to do so. Furthermore, in this case, in order to make it possible to win a BB prize in the carryover state, it is preferable to set it so that a losing result can occur even in the normal gaming state.

(10) If a transition to an advantageous section occurs during a BB state, the normal mode on the disadvantageous side is set. However, if a transition to an advantageous section occurs during a BB state, the CZ on the advantageous side It may also be configured to set the mode. In this case, even if a shift to an advantageous section occurs during the BB state, it is preferable to configure the advantageous section to end when the BB ends. Even with such a configuration, the benefits of the CZ mode cannot be substantially enjoyed because the AT mode transition lottery is not performed and the ceiling game count is not performed at least during the BB state.

(11) In the processing for the advantageous section transfer game, the advantage of the advantageous section to be transferred is set by determining the presence or absence of the BB carryover flag, but the transfer is made by determining the presence or absence of the BB winning flag. A configuration may also be adopted in which the degree of advantage of the advantageous section is set. In this case, in order to distinguish between a BB winning game and a BB carryover state, if the BB winning flag is set and the BB winning game flag is set, it is determined that the game is a BB winning game, and the BB winning game is determined to be a BB winning game. If the flag is set and the BB winning game flag is not set, it may be determined that the BB carryover state is occurring.

(12) In the advantageous section transition game processing, the advantageousness of the advantageous section to be transferred is set by determining whether there is winning information (BB carryover flag) for BB whose gaming state will be transferred to the BB state. However, the advantage of the advantageous section to be transferred may be set by determining the presence or absence of winning information regarding other lottery results instead of winning information regarding BB. For example, if the winning cherry can be carried over as a result of no transition of the gaming state, and if the player moves to an advantageous section in a situation where information corresponding to winning the cherry is stored, and if winning the cherry The degree of advantage of the advantageous section to be set may be made different depending on the case where information corresponding to what the user is doing is stored and the situation shifts to the advantageous section.

(13) In the processing for the advantageous section transition game, the advantageous degree of the advantageous section was made different depending on whether the BB carryover flag was set or not. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a lottery is conducted for the advantageous degree of , and the lottery results can differ depending on the presence or absence of the BB carryover flag. For example, in the first embodiment, the CZ mode is set better when moving to an advantageous section when the BB carryover flag is not set than when moving to an advantageous section when the BB carryover flag is set. A configuration may be adopted in which the probability is increased. Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the CZ mode is set more effectively when moving to an advantageous section when the BB carryover flag is set than when moving to an advantageous section when the BB carryover flag is not set. A configuration may be adopted in which the probability is increased.

(14) In the process for the advantageous section transition game, the degree of advantage of the advantageous section may be set using not only the presence or absence of the BB carryover flag but also other parameters. Other parameters may include, for example, set values, game results that triggered the shift to an advantageous section, and the like. More specifically, for example, the higher the setting value is, the higher the probability of being set to CZ mode when moving to an advantageous section, and for example, the higher the setting value is, the higher the probability of being set to CZ mode when moving to an advantageous section, and, for example, the higher the setting value is, the higher the probability of being set to CZ mode when shifting to an advantageous section triggered by a result with a low winning probability. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the probability of occurrence is high.

(15) Although the first BB and the second BB are provided as types of BB, one type of BB or three or more types may be provided. By setting three or more types of BBs, you can end the advantageous section by winning a BB, winning a BB prize, or ending the BB state, or end the advantageous section by winning a BB that is different from the next designated BB, while matching the next designated BB. In a configuration in which the advantageous section does not end when the BB is won, the game can be more diversified. In addition, in the configuration in which the next designated BB is set, two or more types of next designated BB may be set, or only one type of next designated BB may be set. By increasing the number of BB types set as the next designated BB, the probability that the winning BB will match the next designated BB will be increased, and by decreasing the number of BB types set as the next designated BB, the winning BB will be more likely to match the next designated BB. The probability of matching the specified BB becomes low.

(16) Even in the normal mode or CZ mode, as long as the AT mode is won, even if a BB prize is won, the advantageous section is not ended, but the advantageous section may be ended. By doing this, more careful BB winning is required.

(17) Although the advantageous section is configured to end at the game in which the BB win is achieved, the advantageous section may be configured to end at the game that transitions to the BB state (the game following the BB win). In addition, although the advantageous section is configured to end at the end game of the BB state, the advantageous section ends at the game in which the BB state ends and shifts to the normal gaming state or the RT state (the game following the game that ends the BB state). It may be configured to terminate. In these cases, the BB winning game flag and the BB ending game flag may be maintained at least until the processing for ending the advantageous section of the next game (section display second processing). It is preferable to use a flag or the like that allows the CPU 102 to identify that the game is a game after the BB ending game or that the game is the next game after the BB ending game.

(18) Although the configuration is such that the game that wins the advantageous section transition lottery is configured to transition to the advantageous zone, it may be configured that the system transitions to the advantageous zone in the next game after the game that wins the advantageous zone transition lottery. In this case, if the lottery for shifting to an advantageous section is won using the repeated 1st BB etc. as a trigger, the shift to the advantageous section will occur in the game in which the 1st BB carryover flag of the next game is set.

(19) Although the configuration has been described in which a transition to an advantageous section can occur during the BB state, a configuration may also be adopted in which the transition to an advantageous section cannot occur during the BB state, and a configuration in which the transition trigger role for the advantageous section cannot be won during the BB state. You can also use it as

(20) In the operation of the reset switch 72, it may be possible to distinguish between an operation for canceling an error and an operation for clearing the RAM, and a configuration in which the reset switch for error cancellation and the reset switch for clearing the RAM are separately provided. You can also use it as By doing this, it is possible to avoid initialization processing (RAM clear processing) of advantageous section information, carryover information, and BB status information by operating a reset switch for error cancellation during operation of the game hall. I can do it.

(21) The migration permission lottery table is configured so that it is harder to win the migration permission lottery when the number of stocks is 1 or more than when the number of stocks is 0, but the probability of winning the migration permission lottery depending on the number of stocks The number of stocks serving as the boundary is not limited to the above, and the boundary does not need to be one and may have multiple levels. For example, the probability of winning the transfer permission lottery may be different depending on whether the stock number is 4 or less and when it is 5 or more. Furthermore, the probability of winning the transfer permission lottery may be different depending on whether the stock number is 4 or less, 5 or more and 10 or less, and 11 or more. It may be configured such that the larger the number of stocks, the easier it is to win the migration permission lottery. It may be configured such that the probability of winning the transition permission lottery is higher before the BB is won than after the BB is won, or the first BB, which is difficult to win in the lottery process of each game, is more likely to win than the second BB, which is easier to win. It may also be configured so that it is easy to win the lottery.

(22) Although the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is turned on not only during the AT mode but also during the CZ mode, it may be configured so that it is not turned on during the CZ mode. Even in this case, it is possible to give the player the impression that a group of advantageous states continue across advantageous sections by a series of advantageous presentations on the auxiliary display section 65 and the like.

(23) In the configuration in which the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is turned on even during the CZ mode, it was configured to turn off when transitioning to normal mode, but the configuration remains lit even when transitioning to normal mode. You can also use it as

(24) When starting the display of the section display when transitioning to CZ mode, when starting the display of the section display when shifting to AT mode, and when starting the display of the section display when transitioning to AT mode, the section display and/or other notification means (auxiliary display section 65 etc.) may be configured to have different notification modes. More specifically, when starting to display the section display when transitioning to CZ mode, the display is started in a manner that is more difficult for the player to discern than when starting displaying the section display when transitioning to AT mode. Alternatively, it is preferable that the display is performed in a manner that is difficult for the player to discern at the beginning of the display.

(25) A configuration in which whether or not an advantageous section ends at the time of winning depending on the type of BB may be applied to a configuration in which the advantageous section ends at the time of winning a prize or at the end of the BB state. More specifically, for example, the advantageous section may be terminated if the first BB prize is won, but the advantageous section may not be terminated if the second BB prize is won, or vice versa. Further, the advantageous section may be terminated when the first BB state ends, but the advantageous section may not be ended when the second BB state ends, or vice versa.

Furthermore, these configurations may be combined, and a configuration may be adopted in which the relationship between whether the advantageous section ends or not at the time of winning, winning a prize, and ending the state is different. More specifically, for example, in the first BB winning game, the advantageous section ends, but in the second BB winning game, the advantageous section does not end, and while in the first BB winning game, the advantageous section does not end, in the second BB winning game, the advantageous section ends. It may also be configured to terminate the process. Also, in the first BB winning game, the advantageous section is not ended, but in the second BB winning game, the advantageous section is ended, and in the ending game of the first BB state, the advantageous section is ended, while in the ending game of the second BB state, the advantageous section is ended. It is also possible to have a configuration that does not terminate the process.

(26) After the end of the BB, the end of the advantageous section of the 2nd BB winning game is restricted for a predetermined number of games, but for example, the 2nd BB The configuration may be such that the end of the advantageous section of the winning game is restricted, or the end of the advantageous section of the second BB winning game may be restricted for a predetermined number of games after the end of the RT state.

(27) Although the triggering combination for the advantageous section transition lottery is all the outcomes that can be won in the normal game state, etc., this may be changed. For example, it may be configured such that the pushing order bell serves as a trigger for the advantageous section transition lottery, while various re-games do not serve as a trigger.Watermelon serves as a trigger, while pushing order bells and various re-games do not serve as a trigger. It may also be a configuration. In these cases, it is preferable to use a winning combination whose winning probability does not change in various gaming states or a winning winning probability that is common regardless of the set value as a trigger for the advantageous section transition lottery.

(28) Although the description has been made assuming a gaming machine that can execute only a 3-bet game, it may also be configured to be able to execute a 2-bet game or a 1-bet game. In this case, for example, the configuration is such that a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game can be executed, and it is possible to win the 1st BB or 2nd BB in the 2-bet game, and it is not possible to win the 1st BB or the 2nd BB in the 3-bet game. Furthermore, in a 2-bet game, a first BB prize or a second BB prize can be achieved, and in a 3-bet game, a first BB prize or a second BB prize cannot be achieved. Furthermore, the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery is higher in a 3-bet game than in a 2-bet game. In this way, it is possible to create a gameplay in which the AT mode transition lottery is won in the 3-bet game, and after the AT mode transition, the game is switched to the 2-bet game and the bonus AT state based on the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state is played. I can do it. In this case, it is possible to avoid unintentionally achieving a first BB win or a second BB win (ending an advantageous section) in a 3-bet game.

(29) Although the next BB lottery is configured to be executed when the BB state ends, it is possible to complete the setting of the next designated BB before the next BB winning, at least from the BB winning game to the end of the BB state. It is.

(30) The next BB lottery may be executed multiple times. In this case, for example, if the second BB on the side that is more likely to win in the lottery process of each game is set as the next designated BB, the possibility that the advantageous section will continue will be higher; If the 1st BB instead of the 2BB is set as the next designated BB, a lottery will be held again in the next BB lottery to determine whether or not to set the 2nd BB as the next designated BB, while the 2nd BB will be selected in the previous next BB lottery. When set as the next designated BB, the next time BB lottery may not be held, or a lottery to determine whether or not there will be a double win may be performed.

(31) In the configuration in which the next designated BB is set using the consecutive game counter, both the first BB state and the second BB state in the AT mode are not limited to the configuration where the consecutive game counter measures the target, and for example, , the number of times in the first BB state may be added to the consecutive games counter, while the number of times in the second BB state may not be added to the consecutive games counter.

(32) When starting the AT mode, the configuration is such that the AT mode is started after waiting for the winnings of Normal Rip A to Normal Rip C, but the AT mode may be started regardless of the lottery result. In this case, for example, in the AT mode starting game, based on the operation of the start lever 41, a predetermined symbol combination is temporarily stopped during the invalid period before the stop operations of the stop switches 42 to 44 become effective. It may also be a configuration. Examples of the predetermined symbol combinations include the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, and the "BAR" symbol, which are arranged to stop on the upward-rightward line L5 in each of the above embodiments when the second replay winning is established. Symbol combinations, symbol combinations such as "Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol, and "BAR" symbol (Fig. 12) may be applied, and which symbol combination is temporarily stopped depends on the continuation rate. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the

(33) The first section display process that causes a transition to an advantageous section is executed in the lottery process at the start of the game, and the second section display process that ends the advantageous section is executed at the end of the game. Although the description has been made on the premise that this is executed within the reel control process, the transition timing to the advantageous section and the end timing of the advantageous section may be different from those described above. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the process that causes the transition to the advantageous section is executed at the end of the game, and the process that ends the advantageous section is executed at the start of the game, and both processes are executed at the start of the game. It may also be configured such that all the processes are executed at the end of the game. In these cases, various processes can be carried out to the extent that the effects described above can be obtained, such as ending the advantageous section when winning the BB, ending the advantageous section when winning the BB, or ending the advantageous section when the BB ends. It's a good idea to change it.

(34) In the second section display process, a process for determining whether or not it is a BB winning game that triggers the end of the advantageous section; a process that determines whether or not it is a BB winning game that triggers the end of the advantageous section; In a configuration with Although it is possible to avoid this, a configuration may be adopted in which the determination process on the BB winning game side is given priority (first) to the determination process on the BB winning game side.

(35) The configuration is such that the press order notification occurs when the AT mode flag is not set, but it may also be configured so that the press order notification can occur even if the AT mode flag is not set in an advantageous section. . In this case, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which press order notification is more likely to occur in AT mode than in normal mode, and a configuration in which press order notification is more likely to occur in AT mode than in CZ mode. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which press order notification is more likely to occur in CZ mode than in normal mode, and the occurrence rate of press order notification may be approximately the same in normal mode and CZ mode. In these cases, it is preferable to adopt a configuration that starts displaying the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator when press order notification occurs in the normal mode or CZ mode.

(36) By executing the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state during the AT mode, it is possible to expect an increase in medals as a bonus AT state. A so-called pseudo-bonus state in which an increase in medals can be expected depending on the presence or absence of the bonus may be set, and a configuration may be adopted in which an increase in medals can be expected depending on the bonus AT state based on the BB state and the pseudo-bonus state. Note that the pseudo-bonus state may include, for example, a configuration in which press order notification is likely to occur over a predetermined number of games, or a configuration in which press order notification occurs a predetermined number of times. In this case, regardless of whether or not the JAC winning is carried over, it is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the first minor winning combination is achieved by operating in the pressing order corresponding to the first minor winning winning when the pressing order bell is won.

(37) In a game where it is possible to win the first BB prize or the second BB prize, a freeze effect may be generated in which the operations of the stop switches 42 to 44 are invalidated for a predetermined period of time. In this case, for example, the freeze effect may occur when a predetermined number (two) of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, or the freeze effect may occur before the reels stop. Good too. By generating such a freeze effect, it is preferable that a BB win is established even though the transition permission condition is not satisfied and the bonus AT state does not start when a BB win is established. can be avoided. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which a common freeze effect is generated regardless of whether the transfer permission conditions are met, or a freeze effect is generated when the transfer permission conditions are not met, but a freeze effect is generated when the transfer permission conditions are met. If there is, the freeze effect may not be generated. The predetermined period during which the freeze effect is performed is preferably a period that does not interfere with smooth operation of the stop switches 42 to 44. For example, the predetermined period when each reel 32L, 32M, 32R rotates at a constant speed ( The configuration may be such that the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is disabled by setting a period of 2 revolutions as a predetermined period.

(38) The ball output rate changes depending on each setting value, with setting 1 having the lowest ball output rate and setting 6 having the highest ball output rate. Any configuration may be used as long as the rate of increase or decrease or manner of increase or decrease in the amount changes. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the ball payout rates for some setting values are the same and the ball payout rates for other setting values are different, such as setting 1 and setting 2 having the same ball payout rate. Further, settings 1, 3, and 5 may have a high rate of increase/decrease in the number of balls put out, and settings 2, 4, and 6 may have a low rate of increase/decrease in the number of balls put out. In addition, settings 1 and 5 increase the number of balls in a short period of time and decrease the number of balls in a long period of time, while settings 2, 3, and 4 take a longer time to increase the number of balls than in settings 1 and 5. It takes a shorter time than settings 1 and 5 to reduce the predetermined amount, and setting 6 may have a configuration in which almost no increase or decrease in the number of balls produced occurs. In these cases, the ball payout rate for each set value may be the same.

(39) Although a slot machine has been described that is equipped with three reels and stop switches corresponding to the reels in parallel, the configuration is not limited to this, and for example, a slot machine is equipped with five reels and stop switches corresponding to the reels in parallel. It may also be a slot machine. From the viewpoint of suppressing erroneous operations in stopping the reels, it is sufficient to have at least two reels and stop switches corresponding thereto. Furthermore, although a slot machine has been described in which the active line is set to 1 line when the number of bets is 3, the present invention is not limited to this configuration; for example, the active line may be 5 lines.

(40) Although a specific example has been shown for the slot machine 10, the present invention may also be applied to a gaming machine that is a combination of a slot machine and a pachinko machine. That is, the slot machine may be a gaming machine (a so-called reel-type gaming machine using balls) that has ball insertion and ball payout functions, such as a pachinko machine, instead of the medal insertion and medal payout functions. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as the gaming value in the gaming hall, which reduces the gaming value seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on where gaming machines can be installed can be resolved.

For example, the above-described inventions may be applied to a pachinko machine or a reel-type game machine using balls, in which the ball output is adjusted. In this case, in a pachinko machine that has a high probability state and a low probability state in which the jackpot probability is high or low, the advantageous section in the slot machine 10 may be applied as the high probability state, and the ball enters the predetermined entry section. In a pachinko machine having a high ball entry state and a low ball entry state where the ball rate varies, the above inventions may be applied by setting the advantageous section of the slot machine 10 to the high ball entry state.

In a pachinko machine, for example, the actual number of balls increased or decreased, which is the difference between the number of game balls fired from a firing device and the number of prize balls paid out based on balls entering a prescribed ball entry section, is calculated in a prescribed time. The divided number of game balls per unit time may be used for the above-mentioned ball output adjustment. Then, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of predetermined times are provided, and the increase or decrease in the number of game balls per unit time is calculated for each of a long predetermined time and a shorter predetermined time, and these are used for adjusting the ball output.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristic configurations extracted from each of the embodiments described above will be explained, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above embodiments are appropriately indicated in parentheses, etc., but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses.

The inventions shown in each feature group below are as follows: ``Pachinko machines, slot machines, etc. are known as types of gaming machines.In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the fulfillment of predetermined lottery conditions. There is a known configuration in which a bonus is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.Specifically, in the case of a slot machine, when a start lever is operated in a situation where a medal as a game medium is bet. Then, an internal lottery is carried out, and the reels start rotating.If the stop switch is operated while the reels are rotating, the reels stop rotating.Then, the reel stop result is determined by the internal lottery. If the game machine corresponds to the result of It is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.'' This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

<Characteristics Group A>
Feature A1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. function to perform processing), and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a benefit granting means (a function for executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
It has a specific state (advantageous section) in which a specific event advantageous to the player (press order notification and 15-piece bell winning) can occur, and a normal state (normal section) in which the specific event does not occur,
As the specific state, a first specific state (normal mode or CZ mode during an advantageous section), a second specific state (AT mode during an advantageous section), and a third specific state (bonus AT state) are set,
In the case where the lottery result by the lottery means in the first specific state is a predetermined special result (first BB winning or second BB winning), and a special symbol combination corresponding to the special result is stopped at the valid position. a first transition means for terminating the specific state and transitioning to the normal state (a function for executing a process for terminating the advantageous section in the BB winning game in the second section display process by the main controller 101);
When the lottery result by the lottery means in the second specific state is the special result (first BB winning or second BB winning) and the special symbol combination stops at the valid position, the third specific state is entered. A second transition means (a function for executing AT continuation setting processing by the main controller 101) capable of transitioning;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, if the winning of the special result is in the first specific state, the specific state itself including the first specific state ends and shifts to the normal state, while the winning of the special result is in the second specific state. If so, it moves to the third specific state. These first specific state, second specific state, and third specific state are states in which specific events that are advantageous to the player may occur, so depending on whether the special result winning is in the first specific state or the second specific state, The difference is whether or not a state in which a specific event can occur continues. By doing so, a lottery for each game is held based on the operation of the start operation means, and a prize corresponding to the winning is obtained by stopping the symbol combination corresponding to the lottery result based on the operation of the stop operation means. Although the game is based on a slot machine game, depending on the timing (state) at which the winning occurs, it is possible to change not only the benefits corresponding to the winning, but also the degree of advantage regarding whether or not a specific event occurs. Become.

More specifically, as a player who wishes for the specific event to occur, he wishes that the special result won not be won in the first specific state, and even if the special result is won, the special result won will not be established. By operating the operating means and establishing a special result winning in the second specific state, it becomes possible to continue the specific state where a specific event can occur while enjoying the benefits of the special result winning. .

Moreover, by performing an operation to establish a special result winning in the second specific state, although it is a specific state in which a specific event can occur, a transition from the second specific state to the third specific state will occur. Therefore, depending on the difference in the degree of advantage between the second specific state and the third specific state, it is possible to allow the player to enjoy a benefit different from the benefit of winning a special result.

In other words, the special result winning becomes an opportunity to end the specific state, and also becomes an opportunity to move to a state within the specific state, and the degree of advantage for the player differs greatly depending on which opportunity it becomes. By doing so, it is possible to increase the attention level when a special result winning is established, and it is possible to suitably improve the interest of a game using such a configuration.

Feature A2. The configuration is such that the specific event is more likely to occur in the third specific state than in the second specific state, or the triggering event that triggers the occurrence of the specific event (push order bell winning) is more likely to occur. The gaming machine according to feature A1.

According to the above configuration, by establishing a special result winning in the second specific state, it is possible not only to continue the specific state but also to bring about an advantage such as improving the occurrence rate of the specific event. Therefore, the difference in advantage between the case where a special result winning is achieved in the first specific state and the case where a special result winning is achieved in the second specific state becomes more remarkable, and the special result winning is achieved. It is possible to enhance the effect of increasing the attention level of the event.

Note that the above configuration can also be expressed as "the third specific state is more advantageous for the player than the second specific state."

Feature A3. A third transition means for transitioning from the normal state to the specific state (a function for executing a process for transitioning to an advantageous zone in the zone display first process by the main controller 101);
The gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2, wherein the third transition means is capable of shifting to the first specific state when shifting from the normal state to the specific state.

According to the above configuration, when a special result winning is achieved during the first specific state, the state shifts to the normal state, but when the normal state shifts to the specific state again, the first specific state changes, and the first specific state → The normal state→first specific state is looped. In other words, if the goal of the game is to transition to the third specific state, if a special result is won during the first specific state, the transition to the third specific state will not occur, but will cause the transition to the third specific state. Even the second specific state, which can be transferred, becomes impossible. By doing so, it is possible to make the player more interested in whether or not to make a special result winning, and to make it difficult to make a special result winning during the first specific state.

Feature A4. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, it becomes possible to win the first operation result (first minor role), and when the stop operation means is operated in the first By operating in a second operation mode different from the operation mode, it is possible to win a second operation result (4th minor win to 27th minor win) that can give a profit different from the first operation result. A mode result (for example, a press order bell) is set,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the mode result, a mode notification means (main control (a function for executing press order notification processing by the device 101);
Features A1 to A3, characterized in that the specific event is an event including at least that the lottery result by the lottery means is the mode result, and the mode notification is performed by the mode notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

As in the above configuration, applying a configuration to a specific event that can realize the difference in profit, such as whether a first operation result winning is established or a second operation result winning is established when a mode result is won, depending on the presence or absence of mode notification. In this way, it is possible to vary the degree of advantage without changing the lottery probability (particularly the probability of winning as a result of the aspect) by the lottery means. In other words, the gaming machine of feature A1 allows the occurrence rate of a specific event to be changed simply by varying the presence or absence of mode notification, and changes whether or not a specific state in which a specific event can occur is terminated by winning a special result. can be realized without requiring major changes to the existing configuration.

Feature A5. The lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, and based on the fact that the special symbol combination corresponding to the special result has stopped at the valid position, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined special result by the lottery result by the lottery means. A special transition means (main) that can transition to a special state where the probability of becoming a winning combination (JAC) is higher than the previous state, and end the special state based on the fulfillment of predetermined special ending conditions. (a function of executing bonus status processing by the control device 101),
The third specific state is the second specific state and the special state,
Feature A1 characterized in that the specific event occurs more easily in a situation in which the second specific state and the special state exists than in a situation in which the specific event occurs in the first specific state and the special state. The gaming machine according to any one of A4 to A4.

According to the above configuration, when a special result winning is established, a transition is made to a special state in which the probability of winning a special combination is increased, and the third specific state is a situation that is both the second specific state and a special state. Since the specific event is more likely to occur in a situation where the second specific state is a special state than a situation where the first specific state is a special state, it is assumed that the special state is in the first specific state. Even if it is executed, it will only make it easier to win the special prize. In other words, by having the above configuration, the difference in the degree of advantage between the case where the special state is executed in the first specific state and the case where the special state is executed in the second specific state can be This can be achieved by utilizing differences in incidence rates. Therefore, the gameplay of feature A1 can be realized by using a relatively simple configuration such as changing the winning probability during a special state as a so-called bonus state.

Feature A6. A special win that can store special win information corresponding to winning the special win if the symbol combination corresponding to the special win does not stop at the valid position in a game where the special win is won. Equipped with a storage means (a function for executing processing for setting the JAC carryover flag by the main controller 101),
The specific event occurs in a situation where the special winning information is stored in the special winning storage means, but does not occur in a situation where the special winning information is not stored in the special winning storage means. The gaming machine described in feature A5.

According to the above configuration, in the case where the game shifts to a special state and wins a special prize, the specific event will not occur if the special prize is established. In other words, even if the second specific state is shifted to the special state, if the special winning combination is established when the special winning combination is won, the user will not be able to enjoy the benefits of the specific event. By doing this, the key to the game is how to prevent a specific win from occurring, and conversely, if you do not want to enjoy the benefits of a specific event, you can allow it. Therefore, it is possible to create a game that takes advantage of the real thrill of a so-called slot machine, in which a prize corresponding to a lottery result is established based on the player's operation.

Feature A7. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, it becomes possible to win the first operation result (first minor role), and when the stop operation means is operated in the first By operating in a second operation mode different from the operation mode, it is possible to win a second operation result (4th minor win to 27th minor win) that can give a profit different from the first operation result. A mode result (for example, a press order bell) is set,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the mode result, a mode notification means (main control (a function for executing press order notification processing by the device 101);
The specific event occurs in a situation where the special winning information is stored in the special winning storage means and the winning result is won, while the special winning information is not stored in the special winning storage means. The gaming machine according to feature A6, characterized in that the game machine does not occur in a situation where the mode result is a winning result.

According to the above configuration, the occurrence rate of a specific event can be increased by using a specific combination that becomes easier to win by shifting to a special state. In this case, there is no need to change the winning probability of the mode result between special states and non-special states, so it is possible to simplify the lottery system for each game, and for example, it is possible to win depending on the gaming state. In a configuration in which a predetermined lottery is performed using results with no difference in probability, it is also possible to use such a mode result as a lottery trigger for the predetermined lottery.

Feature A8. In a game in which the special result is won, if the special symbol combination does not stop at the valid position, special result information (BB carryover flag) corresponding to the fact that the special result is won can be stored. Equipped with a special result storage means (a function for executing a process of setting a corresponding BB carryover flag by the main controller 101),
The transition lottery from the first specific state to the second specific state and the transition process from the first specific state to the second specific state are performed in a situation where the special result information is stored by the special result storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7, characterized in that the gaming machine can be executed in the following manner.

According to the above configuration, when a special result winning is achieved in the first specific state, the specific state ends, and when a special result winning is achieved in the second specific state, the game moves to the third specific state. The crucial transition lottery and transition process from the first specific state to the second specific state are executed under a situation where special result information corresponding to winning the special result is stored. In other words, even if there is a special result winning in the normal state or the first specific state, it is not awarded immediately, but the special result winning is established after the transition from the first specific state to the second specific state occurs. It becomes sex. By doing so, it is possible to cause the transition to the third specific state to occur more smoothly than to wait for the special result winning after transitioning to the second specific state.

Feature A9. As the lottery result by the lottery means, a replay result that allows the next game to be played without using new game media is set;
In the normal gaming state including at least the second specific state, the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the special result is higher than the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the replay result. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A8, characterized in that the gaming machine is set to .

According to the above configuration, the probability of winning a special result in the normal gaming state is set to be higher than the probability of winning a replay result, making it relatively easy to win. By doing so, it becomes possible to cause the second specific state to quickly transition to the third specific state.

Feature A10. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a first specific combination (Cherry C), when the predetermined stop operation means is operated at a first timing, the first symbol combination stops at the valid position; If the operation is performed at a second timing different from the first timing, a second symbol combination different from the first symbol combination is stopped at the effective position;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a second specific winning combination (Cherry A) different from the first specific winning combination, when the predetermined stop operation means is operated at the first timing, the stop operation means is placed in the effective position. A third symbol combination different from the first symbol combination and the second symbol combination stops, and when operated at the second timing, the second symbol combination stops;
According to any one of features A1 to A9, the special symbol combination cannot be stopped at the valid position when the predetermined stop operation means is operated at the first timing. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, in order to determine whether the lottery result by the lottery means is the first specific winning combination or the second specific winning combination in the stop mode, it is necessary to perform the operation at the first timing. By operating at one timing, it is possible to avoid winning a special result. By doing this, in a game where the timing of winning a special result is important, it is possible to perform operations to determine a specific combination without forcing an operation just to avoid winning a special result. This makes it possible to avoid a situation where a special result prize is unintentionally established.

In addition, the above-mentioned configuration is such that "If the lottery result by the lottery means is the third specific combination, and the predetermined stop operation means is operated at the first timing, the third specific combination is placed in the valid position. While it is possible to stop the corresponding third symbol combination, when the operation is performed at a second timing different from the first timing, it is possible to stop the third symbol combination at the effective position. The configuration may be such that the configuration is not possible, or the configuration may be combined with the above configuration.

Further, the above configuration includes a second specific lottery means (a function of executing an AT lottery process by the main control device 101) that executes a lottery to transition to the second specific state based on a lottery result by the lottery means. The probability of winning the transfer lottery by the second specific lottery means or the execution of the transfer lottery is determined by the case where the lottery result by the lottery means is the first specific prize and the second specific prize. By having a configuration such as ``It differs depending on the case'', the significance of operating at the first timing can be further increased, and accordingly, the possibility of avoiding unintended special result winnings can be increased. I can do it.

Feature A11. When transitioning to the normal state via the second specific state and then transitioning to the first specific state, the special symbol combination is stopped at the effective position at least until the transition to the second specific state. Features A1 to 3 are characterized in that the vehicle is provided with a termination restriction means (a function of executing a process of setting a completed flag in the second section display process by the main controller 101) for restricting transition to the normal state. The gaming machine according to any one of A10.

According to the above configuration, after transitioning to the second specific state, then to the normal state, and then to the first specific state, even if a special result winning is achieved until the transition to the second specific state occurs again. Transition to normal state is restricted. By doing this, for example, in a configuration where the number of ceiling games until transition to the second specific state is set when transitioning from the normal state to the first specific state, before transitioning to the second specific state It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which a special result prize is erroneously established and the ceiling number of games is reset.

Feature A12. a second specific lottery means (a function for executing an AT lottery process by the main controller 101) that performs a lottery for transition to the second specific state;
a second specific transition means (a function of executing processing for transitioning to the AT mode by the main controller 101) that causes the second specific state to be transitioned if the transition lottery by the second specific lottery means is won;
Equipped with
In the first specific state, after winning the transition lottery by the second specific lottery means, the special symbol combination is placed in the valid position before the transition to the second specific state by the second specific transition means. If the machine stops, it is equipped with means for restricting the transition to the normal state (a function that executes a process to prevent the advantageous section from ending when a BB prize is won in a situation where the AT mode winning flag is set by the main controller 101). The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A11.

According to the above configuration, in the first specific state, after winning the transition lottery by the second specific lottery means, if a special result winning is established before the transition, transition to the normal state is restricted. By doing this, it is possible to avoid an excessively large disadvantage to the player due to an unintentional special result winning even though the player has won the transfer lottery.

Feature A13. In the first specific state, after winning the transition lottery by the second specific lottery means, the special symbol combination is placed in the valid position before the transition to the second specific state by the second specific transition means. means for restricting transition to the third specific state when the main controller 101 stops (executing processing to prevent the bonus AT state from starting if a BB win is won in a situation where the AT mode flag is not set by the main controller 101); The gaming machine according to feature A12, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of:

According to the above configuration, after winning the transfer lottery by the second specific lottery means, if a special result winning is established before the transfer, the state does not shift to the normal state, but it also does not shift to the third specific state. In this way, it is possible to equalize the profits of the players who were able to early detect the winning transition to the second specific state and those who were not.

Feature A14. A third transition means for transitioning from the normal state to the specific state (a function for executing a process for transitioning to an advantageous zone in the zone display first process by the main controller 101);
a special result storage means capable of storing special result information (BB carryover flag) corresponding to winning the special result (a function for executing a process of setting a corresponding BB carryover flag by the main controller 101);
Equipped with
The third transition means is configured to perform the first specification when transitioning from the normal state to the first specific state depending on whether the special result information is stored in the special result storage means or not. The game according to any one of features A1 to A13, characterized in that the game is equipped with a means (a function of executing processing for an advantageous section transition game by the main control device 101) that allows the degree of advantage of the state to be different. Machine.

According to the above configuration, assuming that when a special result winning is established based on a special result winning, the special result information corresponding to the fact that the special result winning is erased, the normal result based on the special result winning is The advantage of the first specific state differs depending on whether or not the special result is won again after the state shifts to the first specific state and whether or not the special result information is stored. By doing this, it is possible to increase the attention to the special result winning, and also to make it possible to store the special result information corresponding to the special result winning at the time of transition to the first specific state, or to store the special result information corresponding to the special result winning. It becomes possible to realize a gaming experience using a configuration that prevents the game from occurring.

Feature A15. A special system that moves the gaming state to a special state (bonus state) based on the special symbol combination stopping at the valid position, and ends the special state based on the fulfillment of a predetermined special ending condition. Equipped with a status means (a function for executing bonus status processing by the main controller 101),
The gaming machine according to feature A14, wherein the third transition means causes the transition to the first specific state before the special end condition is satisfied in the special state.

According to the above configuration, when the game shifts to the special state based on the special winning result and also shifts to the normal state, the game shifts to the first specific state before the end of the special state. Then, assuming that the special result will not be won again during the special state, when transitioning to the first specific state during the special state, the transition will occur in a situation where the special result information corresponding to the special result winning is not stored. Become. For example, if the configuration is such that transitioning to the first specific state in a situation where special result information is not stored is disadvantageous, if a special result winning is achieved during the first specific state, the transition to the normal state, and then the special state. If you move to the first specific state again during the middle of the day, you will definitely move to the first specific state which is disadvantageous, and conversely, if you move to the first specific state in a situation where special result information is not stored, it will be advantageous. According to this structure, when transitioning to the first specific state again during the special state, the transition will always be to the advantageous first specific state, and the degree of advantage when a special result winning is established during the first specific state It becomes possible to make it constant.

Feature A16. A special system that moves the gaming state to a special state (bonus state) based on the special symbol combination stopping at the valid position, and ends the special state based on the fulfillment of a predetermined special ending condition. a state means (a function for executing bonus state processing by the main controller 101);
When the special state ends, if a predetermined specific end condition is met, a fourth transition means (second section display by the main controller 101) ends the specific state and transitions to the normal state. (a function of executing processing to end an advantageous section in a BB end game in processing);
The gaming machine according to feature A14 or feature A15.

According to the above configuration, it is clear that the case where the special state ends is a situation where the special result information indicating that the special result has been won is not stored, and the specific state is ended in such a situation. By doing so, when the system re-transfers to the specific state after that, there is a high possibility that the state will remain in a state where no special result information is stored. In other words, when the specific state is terminated by the fourth transition means and the specific state is subsequently transferred again, it is possible to easily create a situation where the special result information is not stored. Therefore, by applying this configuration to the configuration of feature A14 in which the advantage changes depending on the presence or absence of special result information at the time of transition to a specific state, the first specific state can be set successfully in a situation where special result information is not stored. becomes possible.

Feature A17. If the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, a fifth transition means ( The gaming machine according to feature A14 or feature A15, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing a process of ending an advantageous section in a BB winning game in the second section display process by the main control device 101.

According to the above configuration, if you end the specific state when you win a special result, if you have not won a special result by the time you re-transition to the specific state, you will win the special result at the time of the re-transition. The situation remains where the special result information of what you are doing is memorized. In other words, when the specific state is terminated by the fifth transition means and the specific state is subsequently transferred again, it is possible to easily create a situation where the special result information is stored. Therefore, by applying this configuration to the configuration of feature A14 in which the advantage changes depending on the presence or absence of special result information at the time of transition to a specific state, it is possible to transition to the first specific state in a situation where special result information is stored. It is possible to set it up properly.

<Characteristics Group B>
Feature B1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. function to perform processing), and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a benefit granting means (a function for executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined special result (first BB, second BB), and the gaming state is changed to a special state based on the fact that a special symbol combination corresponding to the special result has stopped at the valid position. special transition means (a function for executing bonus state processing by the main controller 101) capable of transitioning and terminating the special state based on the fulfillment of a predetermined special end condition;
In a game in which the special result is won, if the special symbol combination does not stop at the valid position, a special result storage means capable of storing special result information corresponding to the fact that the special result has been won; (a function of executing a process of setting a BB carryover flag by the main controller 101);
Equipped with
A specific state (advantageous section) in which a specific event advantageous to the player (press order notification and 15-piece bell winning) can occur, and a normal state (normal section) in which the specific event does not occur are set,
A specific transition means for transitioning from the normal state to the specific state when a predetermined specific transition condition is satisfied (a function for executing processing for transitioning to an advantageous section in the first section display process by the main controller 101); Prepare,
The specific migration means is
When transitioning to the specific state in the first special situation in which the special result information is stored, a first specific transition means (advantageous section transition game processing by the main controller 101) for transitioning to the first specific state (normal mode) (a function that executes processing to set the normal mode in a situation where the BB carryover flag is set);
When shifting to the specific state in a second special situation in which the special result information is not stored, a second specific transition means for shifting to a second specific state (CZ mode) that is more advantageous for the player than the first specific state. (a function of executing a process of setting the CZ mode in a situation where the BB carryover flag is not set in the advantageous section transition game process by the main controller 101).

According to the above configuration, a lottery for each game is performed based on the operation of the start operation means, and a bonus is obtained as a stop result according to the lottery result based on the operation of the stop operation means. In addition to the so-called special result as a bonus that causes transition to a special state as a benefit, there are a specific state in which a specific event can occur and a normal state in which a specific event does not occur. Diversification of games using the state is achieved.

Then, a first special situation in which special result information indicating that the special result has been won is stored, and a second special situation in which no special result information is stored and the special result is not won. The advantages of specific states when transitioning to When this occurs, a transition is made to a second specific state that is more advantageous for the player than the first specific state. Therefore, in order to advance the specific state advantageously, the transition to the specific state should be made in the second special situation where no special result information is stored, and the timing of transition to the specific state should be determined based on whether special result information is stored or not and the timing of transition to the specific state. It becomes possible to realize new gameplay using the relationship with In this case, for example, if a transition to a specific state can be caused before the special result information is stored, the second specific state will be set. It is also possible to realize a gaming experience that utilizes the relationship with the result. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game and increase the attention level of the game.

In particular, by making the specific state that transitions in the first special situation where transition to a special state may occur disadvantageous, the advantage increases due to the overlap between the special state as a so-called bonus state and the occurrence of a specific event. It is possible to prevent excessive play, and it is possible to improve the health of the game. Moreover, by making it advantageous to transition to a specific state in the second special situation where transition to a special state cannot occur, it is possible to make the transition to a specific state occur before the special result is won. The key to the game is how to make it work, and it becomes possible to realize innovative gameplay that has never been seen before.

Feature B2. a front door (front door 12) that opens toward the front of the gaming machine main body;
a first operation means (setting key insertion hole 73) which can be operated by opening the front door and can perform a predetermined first setting of the gaming machine by operating it;
Equipped with
When the predetermined first setting is performed based on the operation of the first operating means, information indicating the specific state is deleted,
The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein when the information indicating the specific state is erased based on the operation of the first operating means, the special result information is not erased.

According to the above configuration, when the manager of the gaming hall or the like opens the front door and performs a predetermined first setting of the gaming machine, the information indicating the specific state is erased. In this case, if the special result information indicating that the special result has been won is also deleted, the state after the predetermined first setting is the normal state and the second special result information is not stored. Then, when the normal state changes to the specific state, the second specific state is advantageous. Therefore, in the above configuration, since the special result information indicating that the special result has been won is retained without being deleted, the transition to the second specific state is made after a predetermined setting is made, such as the first in the morning state. This makes it possible to avoid the second specific situation, which is likely to occur.

Feature B3. The setting means (by the main controller 101 Equipped with a function to execute winning probability setting process),
The gaming machine according to feature B2, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured such that the first setting value can be set by the setting means as the predetermined first setting based on the operation of the first operating means.

According to the above configuration, when the administrator of the gaming hall performs an operation to change the setting value every day, the information about the specific state is erased, but the special result information is not erased. By doing so, it is possible to avoid the situation from becoming a second specific situation where the first morning state easily shifts to the second specific state due to daily work.

Feature B4. A power supply switching means (power switch 71) for switching the gaming machine between a power-on state and a power-off state,
When switching between the power-on state and the power-off state is performed by the power supply switching means, and when the first operation means is not operated, information indicating that the power source is in the specific state and the special result The gaming machine according to feature B2 or feature B3, characterized in that information is not deleted.

According to the above configuration, the information indicating that the gaming machine is in a specific state is not erased simply by turning the power on/off of the gaming machine. In other words, when the first operating means is operated when the power is turned ON/OFF, the information indicating that the specific state is present is deleted and the special result information is not erased. On the other hand, if the first operating means is not operated when the power is turned ON/OFF, Information on the fact that the event is true and special result information will not be deleted. By doing so, the administrator of the gaming hall can adjust which information should be deleted or retained.

Feature B5. a front door (front door 12) that opens toward the front of the gaming machine main body;
a second operating means (reset switch 72) which can be operated by opening the front door and which can perform a predetermined second setting of the gaming machine by operating it;
Equipped with
When performing the predetermined second setting based on the operation of the second operating means, information indicating the specific state is deleted,
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, wherein when the information indicating the specific state is erased based on the operation of the second operating means, the special result information is erased.

According to the above configuration, when the manager of the game hall or the like opens the front door and performs a predetermined second setting of the game machine, the information indicating that the game machine is in the specific state is erased. In this case, the special result information indicating that the special result has been won is also deleted, so the state after the predetermined second setting is a normal state and becomes a second specific situation in which special result information is not stored. , After that, when the normal state is shifted to the specific state, the second specific state is advantageous. The above configuration allows such an event to occur, and by having the above configuration, it becomes possible to meet various needs, and it also allows information on specific conditions and special result information to be provided. It is also possible to initialize to the state at the time of shipment from the factory, where neither is stored.

Feature B6. When the special state ends in a situation where a predetermined specific end condition (no continuation flag) is satisfied in the specific state, a specific ending means (by the main controller 101) capable of ending the specific state is provided. Any one of features B1 to B5 is characterized in that it has a function of executing a process of terminating an advantageous section when the BB state ends in a situation where the continuation flag is not set in the second section display process. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, when the special state ends in a situation where the specific ending condition is satisfied in the specific state, the specific state also ends and transitions to the normal state. In this case, when moving to the specific state immediately after the special state ends, there is a high possibility that it is before the special result is won, and it is advantageous to move to the specific state in the second specific situation where special result information is not stored. The state shifts to the second specific state. In other words, although the specific state ends once, there is a transition to the advantageous second specific state, so the specific state ends with a lingering aftertaste, and it is possible to create gameplay using such a configuration. Compared to a structure where the game ends quickly, it can support the decision to continue playing.

Feature B7. The gaming machine according to feature B6, wherein the probability that the specific transition condition is satisfied in the normal state is higher than the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the special result.

According to the above configuration, when the special state ends and the normal state is entered, there is a high possibility that the shift to the specific state will occur before the special result is won. By doing so, it becomes easier to shift to the advantageous second specific state as a specific state transition in the second specific situation where no special result information is stored.

Feature B8. Equipped with a specific performance execution means (a function for executing processing for performing a performance in the AT mode and CZ mode by the display control device 81) capable of executing a specific performance in the specific state with a predetermined performance means,
When the specific state is ended by the specific ending means, the specific performance execution means can execute the specific performance at least in the next game after the game in which the special state ends (CZ following the AT mode end notification performance). The gaming machine according to feature B6 or feature B7, wherein a mode start effect is performed.

According to the above configuration, even if the specific state ends when the special state ends, the specific performance in the specific state is continued in the next game as well. By doing so, it becomes difficult for the player to realize that the specific state ends once, and it becomes possible to make the player strongly aware that the specific state before and after the end is a series of states.

Feature B9. a first control device (main control device 101) having at least the lottery means;
a second control device (display control device 81) having the specific effect execution means;
Equipped with
The first control device may start specific state notification based on a predetermined start condition being satisfied in the specific state, and end the specific state notification based on the end of the specific state. Equipped with a specific state notification means (eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator) capable of
The gaming machine according to feature B8, wherein when the specific state is ended by the specific end means, the specific state notification by the specific state notification means is ended.

According to the above configuration, by checking the specific state notification by the specific state notification means, it is possible to clearly understand that the specific state has ended. By doing so, it becomes possible to suitably discover fraudulent acts that take advantage of the continuity of the specific state, while expecting a presentation effect that makes it appear as if the specific state continues due to the specific presentation.

Feature B10. Features B6 through B6 characterized in that when the special state ends in a situation where the specific ending condition (no continuation flag) is not satisfied in the specific state, the specific state continues without ending the specific state. The gaming machine according to any one of B9.

According to the above configuration, if the specific end condition is not satisfied, the specific state continues, and the special state in the specific state can be executed again. By doing so, a gameplay feature is realized in which the special state among the specific states is repeated until the specific end condition is satisfied, and the interest of the game is improved.

Feature B11. When the special symbol combination stops at the valid position, a means capable of terminating the specific state (a process for terminating an advantageous section in a BB winning game in a second section display process by the main controller 101) function) and
means for restricting the specific state from being terminated by the specific termination means when the specific state is terminated based on the special symbol combination being stopped at the valid position; (a function of executing a process of setting a migrated flag by the main controller 101);
The gaming machine according to any one of features B6 to B10, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, in a configuration where a specific state can be ended even when a special result is won, if you try to further end the specific state at the end of the special state based on the special result winning, if the specific state is changed during the specific state. Even if a transition occurs, it will be a double effort, and if the transition to a specific state has not occurred, it may cause a processing error. Therefore, as in the above configuration, when a specific state is terminated at the time of transition to a special state, the above-mentioned inconvenience can be avoided by restricting the termination of the specific state at the end of the special state. will not occur.

Feature B12. The special result storage means is configured to store the special result information based on the fact that the special symbol combination did not stop at the valid position in the game in which the special result was won;
The specific transition means causes the game in which the special result is won to transition to the specific state before the special result information is stored (the first process of displaying an area for transitioning to an advantageous area is performed at the start of the game). The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B11, wherein the carryover flag is set at the end of the game.

According to the above configuration, when transitioning to a specific state in a game in which a special result is won, the transition to the specific state is performed before the special result information is stored, which is advantageous for transitioning to the specific state in the second specific situation. is set to the second specific state on the side. In other words, not only the situation that causes a transition to a specific state in a game before a special result winning in the normal state, but also the situation that causes a transition to a specific state in a game that results in a special result winning. 2 will be included in the specified situation. If the transition to a specific state in a special result winning game is the first specific situation, in order to make it easier to transition to a specific state in the second specific situation, the probability of winning a special result in each game should be set low. There is a need. On that point, if the transition to a specific state in a special result winning game is the second specific situation as in the above configuration, it becomes possible to relatively increase the probability of winning a special result in each game, and based on the special result winning game. It becomes possible to eliminate barriers to realizing gameplay using special states and specific states.

Feature B13. comprising a specific lottery means (a function of executing an advantageous section transition lottery process by the main controller 101) that executes a lottery for transitioning from the normal state to the specific state based on a lottery result by the lottery means;
The specific transition means is configured to cause the game to transition from the normal state to the specific state based on the result of the transition lottery by the specific lottery device being a result corresponding to transition to the specific state. and
As the lottery results by the lottery means, a trigger result that triggers the transition lottery by the specific lottery means and a non-trigger result that does not trigger the transition lottery by the specific lottery device,
The gaming machine according to feature B12, wherein the gaming machine is set so that when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the special result, there are cases where it becomes the trigger result and cases where the lottery result becomes the non-trigger result.

According to the above configuration, there are cases in which a transition to a specific state may occur in a game where a special result is won, and cases in which a transition to a specific state cannot occur in a game in which a special result is won. Become. More specifically, in the case of a special result winning that is a trigger result, a transition to a specific state may occur in the game, so the second specific state is set as a specific state transition in the second specific situation. On the other hand, in the case of a special result winning that is a non-trigger result, there is no transition to a specific state in the game, so if the special result information is stored without establishing a special result winning in the game, , when a transition to a specific state occurs thereafter, the first specific state is set as a specific state transition in the first specific situation. By doing this, the subsequent gameplay will be greatly different depending on whether you win a special result as a trigger result or a special result as a non-trigger result, dramatically increasing the attention to special result wins. becomes possible.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. function to perform processing), and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a benefit granting means (a function for executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined special result (first BB, second BB), and the gaming state is changed to a special state based on the fact that a special symbol combination corresponding to the special result has stopped at the valid position. special transition means (a function for executing bonus state processing by the main controller 101) capable of transitioning and terminating the special state based on the fulfillment of a predetermined special end condition;
In a game in which the special result is won, if the special symbol combination does not stop at the valid position, a special result storage means capable of storing special result information corresponding to the fact that the special result has been won; (a function of executing a process of setting a BB carryover flag by the main controller 101);
Equipped with
A specific state (advantageous section) in which a specific event advantageous to the player (press order notification and 15-piece bell winning) can occur, and a normal state (normal section) in which the specific event does not occur are set,
A specific transition means for transitioning from the normal state to the specific state when a predetermined specific transition condition is satisfied (a function for executing processing for transitioning to an advantageous section in the first section display process by the main controller 101); Prepare,
The specific migration means is
When transitioning to the specific state in the first special situation in which the special result information is stored, first specific transition means (processing for an advantageous section transition game by the main controller 101) for transitioning to the first specific state (CZ mode) (a function that executes processing to set CZ mode when the BB carryover flag is set in ),
When shifting to the specific state in a second special situation in which the special result information is not stored, a second specific transition means for shifting to a second specific state (normal mode) that is more disadvantageous for the player than the first specific state. (Function to execute processing to set the normal mode when the BB carryover flag is not set in the advantageous section transition game processing by the main controller 101);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, a lottery for each game is performed based on the operation of the start operation means, and a bonus is obtained as a stop result according to the lottery result based on the operation of the stop operation means. In addition to the so-called special result as a bonus that causes transition to a special state as a benefit, there are a specific state in which a specific event can occur and a normal state in which a specific event does not occur. Diversification of games using the state is achieved.

Then, the first special situation in which special result information indicating that the special result has been won is stored, and the second special situation in which no special result information is stored and the special result is not won. The advantages of specific states are different when transitioning to a specific state, and when a transition to a specific state occurs in the first special situation, the transition to the first specific state occurs, while the transition to the specific state occurs in the second special situation. When this occurs, the game shifts to a second specific state which is more disadvantageous for the player than the first specific state. Therefore, in order to advance the specific state advantageously, the transition to the specific state should be made in the first special situation where the special result information of winning the special result is stored, and whether or not the special result information is stored should be changed. It becomes possible to realize new gameplay using the relationship between the timing of transition to a specific state and the timing of transition to a specific state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game and increase the attention level of the game.

In particular, by making the specific state that transitions in the first special situation where transition to a special state can occur advantageous, the advantage is increased by the overlap between the special state as a so-called bonus state and the occurrence of a specific event. It is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the first specific state. As a result, the player starts to hope that the special result will be won before the transition to the specific state occurs, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the special result as the lottery result of each game.

Feature C2. a front door (front door 12) that opens toward the front of the gaming machine main body;
an operation means (setting key insertion hole 73) that can be operated by opening the front door and can perform predetermined settings of the gaming machine by operating it;
Equipped with
When the predetermined setting is performed based on the operation of the operating means, information indicating the specific state is erased,
When the information indicating the specific state is erased based on the operation of the operating means, an erasing means capable of erasing the special result information (a function for executing initialization processing of carryover information by the main controller 101) ) The gaming machine according to feature C1.

According to the above configuration, when the manager of the gaming hall or the like opens the front door and makes predetermined settings for the gaming machine, the information indicating that the gaming machine is in a specific state is erased. In this case, if the special result information indicating that the special result has been won remains stored, the state after the predetermined setting is the normal state and the first specific situation in which the special result information is stored. Then, when the normal state shifts to the specific state, the state shifts to the advantageous first specific state. Therefore, in the above configuration, since the special result information indicating that the special result has been won is also deleted, the first specific state, such as the first in the morning state, which is easy to shift to the first specific state after a predetermined setting is made. This makes it possible to avoid certain situations.

Feature C3. A first special result (1st BB) and a second special result (2nd BB) are set as the special results,
When the special result storage means stores first special result information corresponding to winning the first special result, and second special result information corresponding to winning the second special result. The gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2, wherein the advantage of the first specific state to which the game transitions to the specific state is different depending on whether result information is stored or not.

According to the above configuration, when transitioning to a specific state, it is determined not only whether or not special result information indicating that a special result has been won is stored, but also the type of special result information that is stored, that is, whether or not the special result has been won. The degree of advantage of the first specific state to which the first specific state is transferred differs depending on the type of special result, and it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the winning special result.

Feature C4. a first special state to which a first special symbol combination corresponding to the first special result stops at the valid position; and a second special symbol combination corresponding to the second special result at the valid position. The gaming machine according to feature C3, wherein the special ending condition is common to the second special state to which the gaming machine transitions when the gaming machine is stopped.

According to the above configuration, the first special state to which the transition occurs based on the first special result winning and the second special state to which the transition occurs based on the second special result winning have the same special ending condition. The first specification when transitioning to a specific state in the case where the first special result information corresponding to the first special result is stored and the case where the second special result information corresponding to the second special result is stored. Although the states have different advantages, it is possible to make the advantages (special termination conditions) of the first special state and the second special state the same. By doing so, it is possible to highlight the difference in the degree of advantage on the side of the first specific state, and it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the first specific state to which the transition is made.

Feature C5. As the lottery result by the lottery means, a replay result that allows the next game to be played without requiring new game media is set;
The special result and the replay result are set as overlapping results so that if the lottery result by the lottery means is a winning result in the special result, the replay result is also a win;
The drive control means includes a priority means (priority setting processing by the main controller 101) that performs drive control such that when the special result and the replay result are won, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay result is stopped. ),
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, wherein the transition condition is satisfied at least when the replay result is won.

According to the above configuration, when a special result is won in the normal state, the replay result is also won, so a replay result win is established in that game, and the special result is stored as special result information by the special result storage means. will be done. Furthermore, since the normal state shifts to the specific state based on the winning replay result, in this case, the game in which the special result was won will shift to the specific state, and the special result information will not be stored. As a transition, a transition is made to a second specific state that is more disadvantageous than the first specific state. By doing this, for example, the information about the specific state and the special result information where the special result has been won is deleted, and the game is restarted from the initial state where the normal state and no special result has been won. If started, it becomes possible to avoid transitioning to the advantageous first specific state based on the special result winning.

Feature C6. As the lottery result by the lottery means, a replay result that allows the next game to be played without requiring new game media is set;
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a duplicate result of winning the special result and the replay result is set,
The drive control means is driven to stop the symbol combination corresponding to the replay result when the lottery result by the lottery means is the duplicate result and the special result and the replay result have been won. a controlling priority means (a function for executing priority setting processing by the main control device 101);
If a lottery result by the lottery means is a winning of the special result in a situation where a predetermined specific termination condition (no continuation flag) is satisfied in the specific state, the specific state can be terminated. A specific ending means (a function that executes the process of ending the advantageous section in the BB winning game in the second section display process by the main control device 101);
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when a special result is won in a specific state, a replay result is also won, so a replay result win is established in that game, and the special result is stored as special result information by the special result storage means. will be done. Furthermore, if the special conditions are met, the specific state will end based on the winning of the special result and the state will transition to the normal state. There is a high possibility of transitioning to the specific state in a state in which special result information about the current situation is stored, and the transition to the first specific state is a transition in a situation where special result information is stored. By doing this, even if the specific state is terminated when the special result is won based on the establishment of the special conditions, it is possible to expect that the specific state will shift to the advantageous first specific state after that, and the advantageous first specific state can be expected. It becomes possible to realize successive success of specific states through one specific state.

Feature C7. The specific ending means is configured to place the special symbol combination in the valid position in the game if the lottery result by the lottery device is a winning of the predetermined special result in a situation where the specific ending condition is satisfied. Feature C6 is characterized in that, while it is possible to end the specific state if the symbol combination does not stop, the specific state is not ended if the special symbol combination stops at the valid position in the game. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, even if the special result winning is achieved in a situation where the specific end condition is satisfied, the specific state does not end if the special result winning can be achieved in the game. By doing so, it is possible to realize a game in which a game in which a special result winning occurs is determined in a situation where a specific ending condition is met, and a stop operation means is operated so as to establish a special result winning in that game. This will improve the interest of the game.

Feature C8. As the special result, a first special result and a second special result different from the first special result are set,
The special transition means causes the transition to a first special state corresponding to the first special result when a first special symbol combination corresponding to the first special result is stopped at the valid position, and When a second special symbol combination different from the first special symbol combination corresponding to the second special result is stopped, a transition is made to a second special state corresponding to the second special result,
In the predetermined rotating body, the first special symbol (the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R) forming the first special symbol combination can be stopped at the valid position at the corresponding first timing. When the stop operation of the stop operation means is performed, the second special symbol (the "BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R) forming the second special symbol combination cannot be stopped at the valid position, and the second special symbol The first special symbol may not be able to be stopped at the valid position if a stop operation of the corresponding stop operation means is performed at a second timing at which the symbol can be stopped at the valid position. The gaming machine according to feature C7.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration where a special result is won in a situation where the specific ending condition is met, and the specific state does not end if the winning is achieved in the game, the first special result and the second special result are The corresponding first special symbol and second special symbol are in such a relationship that they cannot be aimed and stopped at the same time. Therefore, if the winning game is the first special result and you operate the first special symbol at a time when it can be stopped, you can avoid ending the specific state, but if you operate the second special symbol at a time when it can be stopped. If the second special symbol is stopped in the second special result winning game, the specific state does not end; however, if the player aims at the first special symbol, the specific state ends. By doing this, it is possible to realize a gameplay in which the stop operation is aimed at which special result in a special result winning game, depending on whether or not a specific state ends, and the fun of the game is increased. Much improved.

Moreover, even if a special result is won, if there are duplicate results, the special result won will not be achieved even if the stop operation is performed aiming at these results. By doing this, it is possible to avoid the end of the specific state in the event of a special result winning in a situation where the specific end condition is met, but the probability of avoiding it is completely controlled by the player. Instead of relying on the individual's intuition, it becomes possible to make adjustments based on the winning probability of duplicate results.

Feature C9. Equipped with an event lottery means (a function for executing AT mode lottery processing by the main controller 101) capable of executing an event lottery (AT mode transition lottery) for causing the specific event,
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C8, wherein the probability of winning the event lottery by the event lottery means is higher in the first specific state than in the second specific state.

According to the above configuration, since it is easier to win an event lottery for causing a specific event in the first specific state than in the second specific state, the first specific state is more likely to win a specific event than the second specific state. This condition is likely to occur. By doing so, it becomes possible to realize the difference in advantageousness between the first specific state and the second specific state.

Feature C10. The specific event occurs in the special state,
The special state that transitions when the event lottery by the event lottery means is won is better than the special state that transitions to when the event lottery is not won by the event lottery means. , the gaming machine according to feature C9, wherein the specific event is likely to occur.

According to the above configuration, it is assumed that the specific event occurs during the special state, and it is better to shift to the special state in a situation where the event lottery has been won, and to shift to the special state in a situation where the event lottery has not been won. Since the specific event is made more likely to occur than when the specific event occurs, the difference in advantage between the first specific state and the second specific state is realized in the special state. By doing so, it becomes possible to increase the significance of setting the difference in the degree of advantage of the specific state to be transitioned to depending on whether or not the transition to the special state is carried over, as in the feature C1.

Feature C11. In a situation where the event lottery is won by the event lottery means, the transition to the special state is performed in a situation where a predetermined transition permission condition (transition permission flag is set) is satisfied. If the specific event occurs in the special state, if the transition to the special state is caused in a situation where the transition permission conditions are not met, the specific event may occur in the special state. The gaming machine according to feature C10, wherein occurrence of is restricted.

According to the above configuration, in order to generate a specific event in a special state and enjoy its benefits, it is necessary not only to win the event lottery but also to satisfy the transition permission condition. Therefore, the ease of enjoying the benefits of a specific event can be adjusted not only by the probability of winning the event lottery, but also by the probability that the transition permission conditions will be met, making it possible to adjust the ball payout rate more precisely. Become.

Feature C12. The gaming machine according to feature C11, wherein a plurality of states are set in which the transition permission condition has a different probability of being satisfied (the winning probability of the transition permission lottery is different between the first BB carryover and the second BB carryover). .

According to the above configuration, in a situation where a person has won the special result and won the event lottery, and is waiting for the transfer permission condition to be satisfied, the easier it is for the transfer permission condition to be satisfied, the earlier the special result prize is won. becomes possible and advantageous. On that point, if there are multiple states with different probabilities of the transition permission condition being satisfied, the degree of advantage will differ depending on which state the transition permission condition is waiting for to be satisfied, so attention should be paid to that state. The degree can be suitably increased.

Feature C13. In the first specific state, means (main controller 101). The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C12.

According to the above configuration, after transitioning to the first specific state in a situation in which special result information indicating that the special result has been won, the transition condition is satisfied, the transition to the second specific state is made. In other words, even if the special result information is stored and the state is shifted to the first specific state, the state will be shifted to the second specific state after that. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to realize an interesting gameplay in which, in the first specific state, the goal is to reach a situation where the benefit of the specific event can be enjoyed before the transition condition is satisfied. becomes possible.

Feature C14. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. functions) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a benefit granting means (a function for executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined special result (first BB, second BB), and the gaming state is changed to a special state based on the fact that a special symbol combination corresponding to the special result has stopped at the valid position. special transition means (a function for executing bonus state processing by the main controller 101) capable of transitioning and terminating the special state based on the fulfillment of a predetermined special end condition;
In a game in which the special result is won, if the special symbol combination does not stop at the valid position, a special result storage means capable of storing special result information corresponding to the fact that the special result has been won; (a function of executing a process of setting a BB carryover flag by the main controller 101);
Equipped with
A specific state (advantageous section) in which a specific event advantageous to the player (press order notification and 15-piece bell winning) can occur, and a normal state (normal section) in which the specific event does not occur are set,
A specific transition means for transitioning from the normal state to the specific state when a predetermined specific transition condition is satisfied (a function for executing processing for transitioning to an advantageous section in the section display first process by the main controller 101); Prepare,
The specific migration means is
When transitioning to the specific state in the first special situation in which the special result information is stored, first specific transition means (processing for an advantageous section transition game by the main controller 101) for transitioning to the first specific state (CZ mode) (a function that executes processing to set CZ mode when the BB carryover flag is set in ),
When transitioning to the specific state in a second special situation in which the special result information is not stored, a second specific state (normal mode) in which the degree of advantage for the player is different from the first specific state is shifted. A specific transition means (a function that executes processing to set the normal mode when the BB carryover flag is not set in the advantageous section transition game processing by the main controller 101);
A gaming machine characterized by having a configuration capable of being equipped with the following.

According to the above configuration, a lottery for each game is performed based on the operation of the start operation means, and a bonus is obtained as a stop result according to the lottery result based on the operation of the stop operation means. In addition to the so-called special result as a bonus that causes transition to a special state as a benefit, there are a specific state in which a specific event can occur and a normal state in which a specific event does not occur. Diversification of games using the state is achieved.

Then, the first special situation in which special result information indicating that the special result has been won is stored, and the second special situation in which no special result information is stored and the special result is not won. The advantages of specific states are different when transitioning to a specific state, and when a transition to a specific state occurs in the first special situation, the transition to the first specific state occurs, while the transition to the specific state occurs in the second special situation. When this occurs, the state shifts to the second specific state. Therefore, in order to advance the specific state advantageously, it is necessary to move to the specific state in an advantageous special situation depending on whether or not the special result information that has won the special result is stored. It becomes possible to realize new gameplay by utilizing the relationship between the presence or absence of and the timing of transition to a specific state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game and increase the attention level of the game.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. function to perform processing), and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a benefit granting means (a function for executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
A specific state (advantageous section) in which a specific event advantageous to the player (press order notification and 15-piece bell winning) can occur, and a normal state (normal section) in which the specific event does not occur are set,
a specific transition means (a function for executing a process of transitioning to an advantageous section in a first section display process by the main controller 101) that causes a transition from the normal state to the specific state when a predetermined specific transition condition is satisfied; ,
a specific termination means (a function for executing processing for terminating an advantageous section in a second section display process by the main controller 101) for transitioning from the specific state to the normal state when a predetermined specific termination condition is satisfied; ,
Equipped with
The specific termination means is
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined special result, a first specific termination means (for a BB winning game in the section display second process by the main controller 101) causes a transition from the specific state to the normal state. (a function that executes processing to end the advantageous section),
A second specific ending means for transitioning from the specific state to the normal state when a special symbol combination corresponding to the special result is stopped at the effective position (BB winning game in the section display second process by the main controller 101) (a function that executes processing to end the advantageous section at ),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, a lottery for each game is held based on the operation of the start operation means, and a bonus is obtained as a stop result according to the lottery result based on the operation of the stop operation means. Since a specific state in which an event may occur and a normal state in which a specific event does not occur are set, the benefits that can be given in relation to the lottery results of each game and the diversification of games using the specific state and the normal state. is planned.

In addition, the specific state in which a specific event may occur may end when the lottery result of the game becomes a predetermined special result, or may end when the special result winning is established. A specific state may end just by winning a result, or even if a special result is won, the specific state may not end by avoiding the special result winning, or a special result winning may be achieved even if a special result is won. By doing so, you can prevent a specific state from terminating, and so on. In other words, compared to a gaming machine that has only either a first specific ending means that ends when winning a prize or a second specific ending means that ends when winning a prize, the case where the specific state is ended or the ending is avoided. Patterns have become overwhelmingly diverse, and even if the means to generate the same event (means to end a specific state) are both ways, it is possible to increase the interest of the game. This makes it possible to suitably achieve this goal. Therefore, it is possible to realize novel gameplay that utilizes not only the continuity of a specific state and the relevance of the lottery results of each game, but also the lottery results of each game and the presence or absence of winnings.

Feature D2. If a predetermined first avoidance condition (with a continuation flag) is satisfied, even if the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the first specific termination means terminates the specific state. is a configuration that avoids
If a predetermined second avoidance condition (one of the AT mode winning flag, AT mode flag, and CZ mode flag is set) is met, the special symbol combination is placed in the valid position. The gaming machine according to feature D1, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to prevent the second specific ending means from ending the specific state even if the gaming machine stops.

According to the above configuration, even if the special result is won, the specific state will not end if the first avoidance condition is met, and even if the special result is won, if the second avoidance condition is met, the specific state will not end. The state never ends. By doing this, in relation to both avoidance conditions, it is possible to prevent the specific state from ending even if a special result winning or special result winning is established.

Feature D3. The gaming machine according to feature D2, wherein the first avoidance condition and the second avoidance condition are different conditions.

According to the above configuration, the effect of feature D2 can be expected more clearly.

Feature D4. If the first avoidance condition is not satisfied and the second avoidance condition is satisfied, even if the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the effective position in the game The gaming machine according to feature D2 or feature D3, wherein the specific state does not end by stopping the special symbol combination.

According to the above configuration, if the first avoidance condition is not satisfied and the special result is won, the specific state would normally be terminated by the first specific termination means, but the second avoidance condition is If this is true, the termination of the specific state can be avoided by establishing a special result winning in the game. By doing so, it is possible to dramatically improve the gameplay in the special result winning game in the specific state.

Feature D5. The specific termination means is
In the termination determination process of whether or not to terminate the specific state,
a first determination process that the lottery result by the lottery means has become the special result in a situation where the first avoidance condition is not satisfied;
a second determination process of whether or not the special symbol combination has stopped at the valid position in a situation where the second avoidance condition is not satisfied;
is set,
If it is determined in the first determination process that the first avoidance condition is satisfied and that the lottery result by the lottery means is not the special result, the specific state is terminated. terminating the termination determination process without
If it is determined in the second determination process that at least one of the second avoidance condition is satisfied and the special symbol combination is not stopped, the specific state is not terminated. terminating the termination determination process;
The gaming machine according to feature D4, wherein the second determination process is set to be executed before the first determination process.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of the feature D4, and the above configuration makes it possible to achieve the effect of the feature D4 with a relatively simple configuration such as setting the context of each process.

Feature D6. A special transition in which the gaming state is transferred to a special state based on the special symbol combination stopping at the valid position, and the special state is ended based on the fulfillment of a predetermined special ending condition. means (a function for executing bonus state processing by the main controller 101);
In a game in which the special result is won, if the special symbol combination does not stop at the valid position, a special result storage means capable of storing special result information corresponding to the fact that the special result has been won; A function of executing processing for setting a BB carryover flag by the main controller 101);
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, wherein in a game in which the special result information is stored in the special result storage means, the special symbol combination can be stopped at the valid position. .

According to the above configuration, the game in which the special result is won and the game in which the special result is won may be different games. With such a configuration, when the specific state ends when a special result is won, and then the specific state is transferred again, there may be a case where the specific state is ended based on the special result winning. Therefore, the significance of providing a means for ending the specific state at the time of winning a special result and at the time of winning a prize is further enhanced.

Feature D7. The gaming machine according to feature D6, wherein the specific transition condition can be satisfied in a situation where the special result information is stored in the special result storage means.

According to the above configuration, it is made clear that there is a case where the specific state ends when the special result is won, and then the specific state is re-entered in a situation where the special result information is stored.

Feature D8. As the lottery result by the lottery means, a replay result that allows the next game to be played without requiring new game media is set;
As the lottery result by the lottery means, a duplicate result of the special result and the replay result, and an independent result of the special result are set,
The drive control means includes a priority means (priority setting processing by the main controller 101) that performs drive control such that when the special result and the replay result are won, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay result is stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D7, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the above functions.

According to the above configuration, if a special result is won as a result of duplicate results, a replay result is established instead of a special result in the game, and if a special result is won as a single result, a special result is won in the game as a special result. As a result, a prize can be won. In other words, if a duplicate result is won in a specific state, there is a possibility that the specific state will be ended by the first specific ending means in the game, but there is no possibility that the specific state will be ended by the second specific ending means. , when a single result is a winning result in a specific state, the specific state can be ended by either the first specific ending means or the second specific ending means in the game. If such a configuration is used, the timing at which a specific state can be ended can be varied depending on the chance of winning a special result, which can be useful for designing innovative game features.

Feature D9. As the special result, a first special result and a second special result different from the first special result are set,
When a first special symbol combination corresponding to the first special result is stopped at the valid position, a first special state corresponding to the first special result is entered, and the valid position corresponds to the second special result. and special transition means for transitioning to a second special state corresponding to the second special result when a second special symbol combination different from the first special symbol combination has stopped (a bonus state processing by the main controller 101) functions),
In the predetermined rotating body, the first special symbol (the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R) forming the first special symbol combination can be stopped at the valid position at the corresponding first timing. When the stop operation of the stop operation means is performed, the second special symbol (the "BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R) forming the second special symbol combination cannot be stopped at the valid position, and the second special symbol The first special symbol may not be able to be stopped at the valid position if a stop operation of the corresponding stop operation means is performed at a second timing at which the symbol can be stopped at the valid position. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D8.

According to the above configuration, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol corresponding to the first special result and the second special result cannot be aimed and stopped at the same time, the special symbol can be used in the special result winning game. In order to achieve a winning result, the winning game must be the first special result and the first special symbol must be operated at a time when it can be stopped, and if the second special symbol is operated at a time when it can be stopped. The first special result prize will not be awarded. Conversely, if the second special symbol is stopped in the second special result winning game, the second specific result winning will be achieved, but if the first special symbol is aimed at, the second special result winning will not be achieved. In this way, any special result will trigger the termination of the first specific termination means as a winning game, but the second specific termination means will trigger termination in that winning game only if the timing of the stop operation matches. be. Therefore, it is possible to vary the trigger for ending a specific state in relation to the timing of the stop operation, and it is possible to make use of this to create a gaming experience.

Feature D10. As the special result, a first special result and a second special result different from the first special result are set,
When a first special symbol combination corresponding to the first special result is stopped at the valid position, a first special state corresponding to the first special result is entered, and the valid position corresponds to the second special result. and special transition means for transitioning to a second special state corresponding to the second special result when a second special symbol combination different from the first special symbol combination has stopped (a bonus state processing by the main controller 101) functions),
The first specific termination means terminates the specific state when the lottery result by the lottery means is the second special result (second BB),
According to any one of features D1 to D9, the second specific termination means terminates the specific state when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result (first BB). Game machine.

According to the above configuration, depending on the type of special result, there are those that trigger the end of the specific state when winning and those that trigger the end of the specific state when the prize is won, and the timing of the end of the specific state depends on which special result it is. different. By having such a configuration, it becomes possible to judge whether or not to avoid winning based on the winning special result, which can be of great help in improving the interest of the game.

Feature D11. The first specific termination means does not terminate the specific state when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result (first BB),
The gaming machine according to feature D10, wherein the second specific termination means terminates the specific state even when the lottery result by the lottery device is the second special result (second BB).

According to the above configuration, when the special result is won, the specific state ends regardless of whether it is the first special result or the second special result, but when the special result is won, the specific state ends when the second special result is won. On the other hand, the specific state does not end when the first special result is won. By doing this, it is assumed that the specific state will end no matter which special result is won, but if the first special result is won, the end of the specific state will be avoided, so in the second special result, the specific state will end. It becomes possible to realize a gaming feature in which the player wishes to win the first special result without any problems, and does not allow him to win the prize after winning.

Feature D12. When the number of games from a predetermined starting opportunity is within a specific number, even if the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, means (main controller 101) capable of not ending the specific state The game according to any one of features D1 to D11, characterized in that the game is equipped with a function of executing processing to prevent the advantageous section from ending in the BB winning game if the post-BB counter is within 20. Machine.

According to the above configuration, if the number of games played from a predetermined starting opportunity is within a specific number, the specific state does not end even if the special result is won. In other words, if a special result is to be won, it is required that the number be within a certain number, and the attention of the game within such a certain number can be suitably increased.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. function to perform processing), and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a benefit granting means (a function for executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined special result (first BB, second BB), and the gaming state is changed to a special state based on the fact that a special symbol combination corresponding to the special result has stopped at the valid position. special transition means (a function for executing bonus state processing by the main controller 101) capable of transitioning and terminating the special state based on the fulfillment of a predetermined special end condition;
In a game in which the special result is won, if the special symbol combination does not stop at the valid position, a special result storage means capable of storing special result information corresponding to the fact that the special result has been won; A function of executing processing for setting a BB carryover flag by the main controller 101);
Equipped with
As a lottery result by the lottery means in a situation where at least the special result information is stored in the special result storage means, a specific symbol combination that differs from the special symbol combination in some symbols is stopped at the effective position. As a result, a specific result (first BB tenpai lip, second BB tenpai lip) for which a privilege is given by the privilege granting means is set,
If a transition to the special state is made in a situation where a predetermined transition permission condition (transition to AT mode or winning a direct transition lottery) is met, the transition to the special state is made in a situation where the transition permission condition is not met. This is a configuration in which the special state is more advantageous than if
In a situation where the transfer permission condition is not satisfied, if the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, a special notification execution means (a pseudo-winning method by the display control device 81) that can execute a special notification by a predetermined notification means. 1. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a function for executing processing for performing a suggestion notification performance.

According to the above configuration, a lottery for each game is performed based on the operation of the start operation means, and a bonus is obtained as a stop result according to the lottery result based on the operation of the stop operation means. A special result is set as a so-called bonus that causes a transition to a special state as a benefit, and if a specific result winning is achieved in a situation where the transition permission conditions are met, the specific result will be won in a situation where the transition permission conditions are not satisfied. This will result in a special situation that is more advantageous than if the prize had been won. Therefore, in order to enjoy the benefit of the advantageous special state even if the special result is won, a game feature is realized in which the special result is won after waiting for the transfer permission condition to be satisfied. In this case, in a situation where special result information corresponding to a special result winning is stored, a specific result where a winning is achieved with a specific symbol combination in which some of the symbols are different from the special symbol combination that achieves the special result winning. is set, and if a specific result is won in a situation where the transfer permission conditions are not met, a special notification may be executed. Therefore, players who are looking forward to the fulfillment of the transfer permission conditions can be made to expect that the transfer permission conditions have been met due to the special notification and the stopped rolls during the middle of the game. Even if the stop operation means is operated in such a way that a special result is achieved, a specific result winning may be achieved instead of a special result, so a special result winning may be achieved even though the transfer permission conditions are not met. You can also prevent it from happening. In this way, it is possible to improve the gameplay in a situation where the transfer permission condition is waiting to be satisfied without increasing the probability that the transfer permission condition is satisfied.

Feature E2. The special notification execution means is configured to cause the predetermined notification unit to issue the special notification in a game in which the special symbol combination can be stopped at the valid position in a situation where the transition permission condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to feature E1, characterized in that the gaming machine is executable.

According to the above configuration, when an operation is performed with the aim of winning a special result according to the special notification, the special result winning may be achieved with the transfer permission conditions being met, so the special result may be achieved in a situation where the transfer permission conditions are not met. It becomes possible to increase the credibility of the notification and dramatically increase the attention and expectations for the special notification.

Feature E3. The gaming machine according to feature E1 or feature E2, wherein the transfer permission condition can be satisfied in a situation where the special result information is stored by the special result storage means.

According to the above configuration, when the special result is a win, the game can be played while carrying over the winning information until the transfer permission condition is satisfied. This increases the significance of providing special notification when a specific result is won during the carryover, and it is possible to improve the gameplay during the carryover.

Feature E4. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, it becomes possible to win the first operation result (first minor role), and when the stop operation means is operated in the first By operating in a second operation mode different from the operation mode, it is possible to win a second operation result (4th minor win to 27th minor win) that can give a profit different from the first operation result. The mode result (for example, press order bell) is set,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the mode result, a mode notification means (main control (a function of executing press order notification processing by the device 101);
As the gaming state, a specific state (advantageous section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means can be executed, and a normal state (normal section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is not executed,
If the special symbol combination stops at the valid position in a situation where the transition permission condition is not met, a specific termination means (main controller) capable of terminating the specific state and transitioning to the normal state The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing a process of ending the advantageous section when winning a BB prize in the second section display process according to 101.

According to the above configuration, when the winning result is different depending on the mode of the stop operation of the stop operation means, the mode notification regarding the mode of the stop operation may be executed by the predetermined notification means, and depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification, A game feature with different advantages is realized. Furthermore, although mode notification can be executed during a specific state, it is not executed in a normal state, so it is considered that the specific state is more advantageous and the player desires to stay in the specific state. In the above configuration, if a special result winning is established in a situation where the transition permission conditions are not met, the specific state may shift to the normal state. The significance of not allowing a special result prize to be won in a situation where the transition permission conditions are not satisfied is increased from the perspective of not only allowing the game to progress as a special result, but also preventing the specific state from ending. By doing so, it becomes possible to suitably realize the gameplay described in feature E1.

Feature E5. In a situation where the special notification execution unit can issue the special notification, means capable of restricting the specific termination unit from ending the specific state (in the second section display process by the main controller 101, during the CZ mode) The gaming machine according to feature E4, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing a process of not ending the advantageous section when a BB win occurs.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration where the specific state can be terminated by transitioning to the special state when the transition permission condition is not satisfied, in a situation where special notification is performed, the specific state is terminated even if the transition permission condition is not satisfied. is limited. In this way, for example, if a special result winning is not achieved, it is possible to misunderstand that it was due to the failure of the stop operation on one's own, even though the transfer permission conditions have not been met. First, it is possible to suitably avoid an attempt to establish a special result winning in the next game or later, which causes the specific state to end.

Feature E6. A first state (CZ mode) in which the transition permission condition is more likely to be satisfied, and a second state (normal mode) in which the transition permission condition is more difficult to satisfy than in the first state,
The special notification execution means executes the special notification in the first state in a situation where the transition permission condition is not satisfied, and executes the special notification in the first state even in a situation where the transition permission condition is not satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, characterized in that in the second state, the special notification is not executed or is more difficult to execute than in the first state.

According to the above configuration, since the special notification is executed in the first state in which the transition permission condition is likely to be satisfied, it is possible to increase expectations when the special notification is performed. In other words, the special notification is not executed or is difficult to execute in the second state where the transition permission condition is difficult to satisfy, so the rarity of the special notification can be increased, and the occurrence rate of the special notification and the transition permission condition are It is possible to make it easier to predict that the transfer permission condition has been satisfied when the special notification is made by linking with the ease of fulfillment.

Feature E7. Features E1 to E1 characterized in that the number (2) of common patterns is set to be greater than the number (1) of different patterns between the special pattern combination and the specific pattern combination. The gaming machine according to any one of E6.

According to the above configuration, the similarity between a special symbol combination and a specific symbol combination increases, so when a special notification is made, it is thought that a special result winning will be established from the stopped rolls up to the middle. It is possible to enhance the effect of

Feature E8. The special notification executing means is capable of issuing an instruction to operate the stop operation means corresponding to the orbiting object having a common pattern between the special pattern combination and the specific pattern combination, using the special notification. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E7.

According to the above configuration, even though the special notification has been made, the stop operation is performed from the orbiting object whose pattern is different between the special pattern combination and the specific pattern combination, so that the special result winning cannot be achieved. It is possible to prevent the information from being grasped too early.

Feature E9. The special symbol combination can be stopped at the valid position regardless of the order of operation of the stop operation means, and the special transfer means can stop the special symbol combination at the valid position regardless of the order of operation of the stop operation means. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E8, characterized in that when the symbol combination stops, the game machine shifts to the special state.

According to the above configuration, even if a stop operation is performed from a rotating body whose patterns are different between a special pattern combination and a specific pattern combination, the state shifts to the special state as long as the special pattern combination is stopped. In this case, for example, it is possible to confirm that the winning result is a special result or that the winning result is not a special result by first stopping the orbiting object with the different symbol. By doing so, the gameplay of feature E1 can be realized without obliterating the real pleasure of the so-called slot machine, in which the player operates the stop operation means according to his/her will to stop the orbiting body and obtain a benefit. I can do it.

Feature E10. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation order, the specific symbol combination is stopped at the valid position, while the stop operation means Features E1 to E9, characterized in that when is operated in a second operation order different from the first operation order, a picture combination different from the specific picture combination is stopped at the effective position. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to limit the chances that a specific symbol combination will stop without changing the probability of winning a specific result. Therefore, it is possible to suitably increase expectations for the special notification.

<Characteristic group F>
Feature F1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. functions) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a benefit granting means (a function for executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined special result (first BB, second BB), and the gaming state is changed to a special state based on the fact that a special symbol combination corresponding to the special result has stopped at the valid position. special transition means (a function for executing bonus state processing by the main controller 101) capable of transitioning and terminating the special state based on the fulfillment of a predetermined special end condition;
In a game in which the special result is won, if the special symbol combination does not stop at the valid position, a special result storage means capable of storing special result information corresponding to the fact that the special result has been won; (a function of executing a process of setting a BB carryover flag by the main controller 101);
Equipped with
As the special result, a first special result (1st BB) and a second special result (2nd BB) different from the first special result are set,
The special transition means changes the gaming state to a first state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result and a first special symbol combination corresponding to the first special result has stopped at the valid position. 1 special state, the first special state is ended based on the fulfillment of a predetermined first special end condition, and the lottery result by the lottery means is the second special result, and the lottery result by the lottery means is the second special result, and the lottery result by the lottery means is the second special result, The gaming state is shifted to a second special state based on the second special symbol combination corresponding to the second special result being stopped, and the second special ending condition is satisfied based on the second special ending condition determined in advance. It is possible to end the special state,
The special result storage means corresponds to the fact that the first special result has been won if the first special symbol combination does not stop at the valid position in a game in which the first special result has been won. In a game in which the second special result is won, if the second special symbol combination does not stop at the valid position, the second special result is won. is capable of storing second special result information corresponding to the
When the special result information is stored in the special result storage means, the special symbol combination can be stopped at the effective position in a game where the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result (losing result). The configuration is
If a predetermined advantageous condition (shifting to AT mode or winning a direct transfer lottery) is met, the vehicle enters the special state, or if the advantageous condition is not met, the special state is entered. It is a configuration in which the special state is more advantageous than
When the first special result information is stored in the special result storage means, the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the specific result is the probability that the second special result information is stored in the special result storage means. If the lottery result by the lottery means has the same or substantially the same probability as the specific result, and the first special result information is stored in the special result storage means, the advantageous condition is satisfied. The probability of achieving the specific result is a probability different from the probability that the advantageous condition will be met when the second special result information is stored in the special result storage means, or is a probability difference that is larger than the probability difference of the specific result. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the above configuration, a lottery for each game is performed based on the operation of the start operation means, and a bonus is obtained as a stop result according to the lottery result based on the operation of the stop operation means. A special result is set as a so-called bonus that causes a transition to a special state as a benefit, and if a special result winning is achieved in a situation where favorable conditions are met, a special result winning is achieved in a situation where favorable conditions are not satisfied. This creates a special situation that is more advantageous than if it were established. Therefore, in order to enjoy the benefit of the advantageous special condition even if the special result is won, a gaming feature is realized in which the special result is won after waiting for the advantageous condition to be established. In this case, the first special result and the second special result are set as the special result, and regardless of which special result, in addition to the game that resulted in the special result, the game for which the special result information is stored is The probability of a specific result is that the first special result information is stored and the first special result is carried over, and the second special result information is stored and the second special result is carried over. The probability is the same or substantially the same during the carryover of the first special result and the probability of the favorable condition being met is different between the first special result carryover and the second special result carryover. By doing this, you can adjust the transition rate of advantageous special conditions by simply adjusting the probability of establishment of advantageous conditions, without having to make a difference in the increase/decrease rate (base) of medals in situations where each special result is carried over. It becomes possible to make a difference. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the gameplay using the first special result and the second special result.

Note that "the probabilities are the same or approximately the same" may also be expressed as "the probabilities are the same to such an extent that it is difficult for the player to discern the difference," and more specifically, "the probabilities are the same to the extent that it is difficult for the player to discern the difference." It may be written as ``The probability is that the difference will be within 1%,'' or it may be preferably ``The probability is that the difference will be within 1%.'' More preferably, it may be ``The probability is that there will be a difference within 0.1%.'' . The expressions for other features using expressions such as "approximately the same probability" and features in other feature groups may be similarly changed.

Feature F2. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, it becomes possible to win the first operation result (first minor role), and when the stop operation means is operated in the first By operating in a second operation mode different from the operation mode, it is possible to win a second operation result (4th minor win to 27th minor win) that can give a profit different from the first operation result. A mode result (for example, a press order bell) is set,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the mode result, a mode notification means (main control (a function for executing press order notification processing by the device 101);
The gaming states include a specific state (AT mode) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means can be executed, and a normal state (normal mode) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is not executed or is more difficult to execute than the specific state. and are set,
A transition determination means (by the main controller 101) that executes a transition determination as to whether or not a transition condition corresponding to transition from the normal state to the specific state is satisfied based on a predetermined first determination trigger. function to execute AT lottery processing),
Specific transition means (AT mode by main controller 101) for transitioning from the normal state to the specific state based on the result of transition determination by the transition determination means indicating that the transition condition is satisfied. ), and
In the specific state, a permission determination means (executes a transition permission lottery process by the main controller 101) determines whether permission conditions corresponding to permitting transition to the advantageous special state are satisfied. function) and
Based on the fact that the permission determination result by the permission determination means is that the permission condition is satisfied, advantageous establishment means for establishing the advantageous condition (setting a transfer permission flag by the main controller 101) function to perform processing), and
The gaming machine according to feature F1, comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the winning result is different depending on the mode of the stop operation of the stop operation means, the mode notification regarding the mode of the stop operation may be executed by the predetermined notification means, and depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification, A game feature with different advantages is realized. In addition, although mode notification can be executed during a specific state, it is not executed or is difficult to execute in a normal state, so it is advantageous to be in a specific state, and the player is discouraged from staying in a specific state. considered to be desired. In such a configuration, after the conditions for transition to a specific state are satisfied and the transition to the specific state is made, the permission condition is further satisfied, thereby establishing an advantageous condition that makes the special state executable as an advantageous special state. . In other words, it is not possible to create an advantageous special state simply by transitioning to a specific state, but it is also necessary that permission conditions are satisfied in the specific state, and by doing this, it is possible to create an advantageous special state. The difficulty of enjoying the benefits of special states increases, and because of this difficulty, it becomes possible to increase interest in advantageous special states. Furthermore, even after transitioning to a specific state, it is possible to play between a situation where the player is in a specific state and not a special state, and a situation where the player is in a specific state and a special state while carrying over special result winnings. , the interest of the game can be improved in a situation where the special result winning is carried over.

Feature F3. Feature F2 characterized in that when a transition to the special state occurs in a situation where the permission condition is not satisfied, the special state becomes a special state that is more disadvantageous than a situation where the advantageous condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, after transitioning to the specific state, it is possible to transition to the special state in a situation where the permission condition is not met, and even if the transition to the special state is made in this situation, the advantageous conditions are not satisfied. It is clarified that this is a disadvantageous special condition because the By stipulating this, it becomes possible to realize a gaming feature in which it is necessary to wait until a permission condition is satisfied during a specific state in order to enjoy the benefits of an advantageous special state.

Feature F4. The transition determination means is capable of executing the transition determination in a situation where either the first special result information or the second special result information is stored in the special result storage means,
Feature F2, characterized in that the permission determination means is capable of executing the permission determination in a situation where either the first special result information or the second special result information is stored in the special result storage means. Or the gaming machine described in feature F3.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to receive a transition determination and also to receive a permission determination in a situation where winning information of various special results is carried over. Therefore, even if you win a special result before the transfer conditions are met and the permission conditions are met, you must wait to win the special result until the advantageous conditions due to these transfer conditions and permission conditions are satisfied. It gets better. Therefore, the inconvenience of not being able to enjoy the benefits of an advantageous special state because the special result winning depends on the establishment of an advantageous condition can be prevented, and the player can be made to pay more attention to the success or failure of the advantageous conditions than to the validity or failure of the special result.

Feature F5. The probability that the transition condition is satisfied in the transition determination by the transition determination means in a situation where the first special result information is stored in the special result storage means, and The probability that the transition condition is met in the transition determination by the transition determination means in the situation where the second special result information is stored is different (the first BB carryover flag is set). The gaming machine according to feature F4, characterized in that the AT mode lottery table is different when the second BB carryover flag is set and the AT mode lottery table is different, and the CZ mode to which the transition is made is different.

According to the above configuration, since the probability of achieving the transition condition differs depending on which special result information is stored, the transition rate to the advantageous special state can be changed without adjusting the winning probability of the special result that triggers the special state. can be adjusted depending on the probability of the transition condition being satisfied.

Feature F6. The probability that the permission condition is satisfied in the permission judgment by the permission judgment means in a situation where the first special result information is stored in the special result storage means, and The probability that the permission condition is satisfied in the permission determination by the permission determination means in the situation where the second special result information is stored is different (the first BB winning flag is set). The gaming machine according to feature F4 or feature F5, wherein the probability of winning the transfer permission lottery differs depending on whether the second BB winning flag is set or the second BB winning flag is set.

According to the above configuration, the probability of achieving the permission condition differs depending on which special result information is stored, so the transition rate to the advantageous special state can be changed without adjusting the winning probability of the special result that triggers the special state. can be adjusted depending on the probability of the permission condition being met.

Feature F7. In the situation where the first special result information is stored in the special result storage means, the probability that the transition condition is satisfied in the transition determination by the transition determination means is stored in the special result storage means. While the probability is higher than the probability that the transition condition is satisfied in the transition determination by the transition determination means in the situation where the second special result information is stored, the special result storage means The probability that the permission condition will be satisfied in the permission determination by the permission determination means in a situation where the first special result information is stored is determined by the second special result information stored in the special result storage means. In any one of features F4 to F6, the probability is lower than the probability that the permission condition is satisfied in the permission judgment by the permission judgment means in a situation where The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, the transition condition is more likely to be met and the permission condition is less likely to be met in a situation where the first special result is won than in a situation where the second special result is won. In this case, it is easier to shift to the specific state in a situation where the first special result is won, and the waiting time for permission to shift to the special state, which is advantageous in the specific state, becomes longer. Conversely, in a situation where the second special result is won, it is difficult to shift to the specific state, but in the specific state, the conditions for allowing the advantageous special state to be established relatively early. In this way, depending on the combination of the transition condition and the permission condition, the progress of the game when winning the first special result and when winning the second special result differs greatly, and the player's It is possible to attract the player's interest, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Feature F8. When the permission determination is executed in a situation where neither the first special result information nor the second special result information is stored in the special result storage means, the result is that the permission condition is satisfied. If the permission determination is executed in a situation where either the first special result information or the second special result information is stored in the special result storage means, the permission condition is satisfied. The probability of the outcome is higher if the BB winning flag is set (the probability of winning the transfer permission lottery is higher in a situation where the BB winning flag is set than in a situation where the BB winning flag is not set). The gaming machine according to any one of features F2 to F7.

According to the above configuration, it is easier for the permission condition to be satisfied after the special result is won than before the special result is won, and in a particular state, the permission condition is satisfied relatively quickly after the special result is won, which is an advantageous special state. It is possible to enjoy the benefits of In other words, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation where the permission conditions are not satisfied even though the player has won a special result, and the game progresses smoothly.

Feature F9. The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the first special result is different from the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the second special result (difference in winning probability between the first BB and the second BB) The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F8.

According to the above configuration, the rate of transition to an advantageous special state due to the first special condition and the rate of transition to an advantageous special status due to the second special condition are determined based not only on the advantageous conditions but also on the winning probability of each special result. Can be adjusted. Here, in order to enjoy the benefits of an advantageous special condition, it is necessary that the favorable condition finally be established, and the difference in winning probability between the first special result and the second special result depends on each special result. It can be said that this contributes to the balance between the period of waiting for favorable conditions to be established in a situation where the player has not won, and the period of waiting for the establishment of advantageous conditions in a situation where each special result has been won. In other words, the ratio of the period of waiting for favorable conditions to be established in a situation where the first special result has been won to the period of waiting for the favorable conditions to be established in a situation where the first special result has not been won is as follows: The ratio of the period of waiting for the establishment of an advantageous condition in a situation where the second special result is won to the period of waiting for the establishment of an advantageous condition in a situation where the second special result is not won is likely to be larger. Therefore, by utilizing such relationships, it is possible to realize a gameplay that takes advantage of the difference in advantage, etc. between situations where each special result is won and situations where it is not, thereby increasing the interest of the game. It becomes possible to be useful for.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. functions) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a benefit granting means (a function for executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined special result (first BB, second BB), and the gaming state is changed to a special state based on the fact that a special symbol combination corresponding to the special result has stopped at the valid position. A special transition means (a function for executing bonus state processing by the main controller 101) capable of transitioning and terminating the special state based on the fulfillment of a predetermined special end condition,
A specific state (advantageous section) in which a specific event advantageous to the player (press order notification and 15-piece bell winning) can occur, and a normal state (normal section) in which the specific event does not occur are set,
When the lottery result by the lottery device is a predetermined trigger result (for example, the first re-gaming), the specific transition device (section display number by the main controller 101) causes a transition from the normal state to the specific state. (a function that executes a process to move to an advantageous section in one process),
Equipped with
The lottery results by the lottery means include duplicate results that include at least the special result and the trigger result (reply overlap 1st BB, rep overlap 2nd BB), and single results that include the trigger result but do not include the special result. Normal reply A) is set,
The specific migration means is
When transitioning to the specific state using the duplication result as a trigger, a first specific transition means (a BB carryover flag is set in an advantageous section transition game process by the main controller 101) for transitioning to the first specific state (CZ mode). (a function that executes the process of setting the CZ mode if the
When transitioning to the specific state using the single result as a trigger, a second specific transition means (main controller 101 (a function that executes processing to set the normal mode when the BB carryover flag is set in the advantageous section transition game processing);
A gaming machine characterized by having a configuration capable of being equipped with the following.

According to the above configuration, the trigger result includes a specific state to be transitioned to based on the overlapping result of a trigger result that triggers transition to a specific state where a specific event can occur and a so-called bonus as a special result, and a trigger result. On the other hand, the degree of advantage differs depending on the specific state to which the transition is made based on an independent result that does not include any special results. In other words, although it is only the trigger result that triggers the transition to the specific state, the advantage of the specific state to which the transition is made will differ depending on whether or not it overlaps with the special result. Here, for example, it is possible to consider a configuration in which the degree of advantage of a specific state to be transitioned to differs depending on the type of trigger result, but in that case, it may be necessary to significantly increase the types of trigger results, or the process for transitioning to a specific state Inconveniences such as complication may occur. On the other hand, by utilizing the presence or absence of duplication as described above, it is possible to diversify specific states without increasing the number of types of trigger results or complicating processing.

Feature G2. As the trigger result, a first trigger result (for example, the first replay) and a second trigger result (the 28th small role) are set,
The first specific state to which a result including the first trigger result and the special result transitions is triggered, and the first specific state to which the transition occurs by a result including the second trigger result and the special result. same advantage,
the second specific state to which the transition is triggered by a result that includes the first trigger result but does not include the special result; and the second specific state to which the transition is triggered by a result that includes the second trigger result but does not include the special result. The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein the gaming machine has the same advantage.

According to the above configuration, although the degree of advantage of the specific state differs depending on whether or not it overlaps with a special result, the degree of advantage of the specific state does not change depending on the type of the overlapping trigger result. By doing so, the points that the player should pay attention to are concentrated on the presence or absence of overlap with the special result, and the ease of understanding the game is improved, thereby making it possible to enjoy the game more easily.

Feature G3. A first special result (1st BB) and a second special result (2nd BB) are set as the special results,
The duplicate results include a first duplicate result (reply duplicate 1st BB) including at least the trigger result and the first special result, and a second duplicate result (reply duplicate 1st BB) including at least the trigger result and the second special result. 2nd BB) and are set,
Feature G1 or a feature characterized in that the first specific state to which the first specific state is triggered by the first duplication result and the first specific state to which the second specific state is to be transitioned to by the second duplicate result have different advantages. A gaming machine described in G2.

According to the above configuration, there are a plurality of special results, and the degree of advantage of the first specific state differs depending on the type of special results included in the duplicate results. In other words, the degree of advantage of a specific state differs not only depending on the overlap between the trigger result and the special result, but also the type of special result, making it possible to diversify the specific state more suitably.

Feature G4. In a game in which the special result is won, if the special symbol combination does not stop at the valid position, a special result storage means capable of storing special result information corresponding to the fact that the special result has been won; (a function of executing processing for setting a BB carryover flag by the main controller 101),
The specific transition means is third specific transition means for transitioning to the first specific state when the special result information is not stored in the special result storage means and the specific state is triggered by the single result. (Function to execute the process of setting the CZ mode when the BB carryover flag is not set in the advantageous section transition game process by the main control device 101). The gaming machine described in (1) above.

According to the above configuration, even if a single result is used as a trigger to shift to a specific state, if the special result information before winning the special result is not stored, the specific state is shifted to a specific state triggered by a duplicate result. Transition to the same first specific state. In this case, for example, if the first specific state is more advantageous than the second specific state, even if the transition to the specific state is based on a single result, it must be before the special result is won. On the other hand, if the second specific state is more advantageous than the first specific state, the player may want to move to the specific state based on the single result after winning the special result. It is considered desired. By doing so, it is possible to create interesting gameplay that attracts players by utilizing the relationship between the transition timing of a specific state based on a single result and the timing of winning a special result.

In addition, in the above configuration, the "third specific transfer means" may be replaced with the "first specific transfer means".

Feature G5. Specific terminating means for terminating the specific state and transitioning to the normal state based on the lottery result by the lottery means being the special result (processing for terminating the advantageous section in the BB winning game by the main controller 101) The gaming machine according to feature G4, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the above functions.

According to the above configuration, the specific state may end based on a special result winning during the specific state, so if the special result winning is not established at the time of the special result winning, the special result The state returns to the normal state with the information stored. Then, if the transition to the specific state is based on the single result winning, the transition to the specific state triggered by the single result in the situation where the special result information is stored will be changed to the first specific state instead of the second specific state. It will move to a specific state. In other words, by having the above configuration, for example, a pattern such as winning a special result in a normal state, and transitioning to a specific state triggered by an individual result in a situation where the special result information is stored, can be created. Instead, the special result winning may be in the specific state, and it is possible to easily shift to the first specific state triggered by the single result in a situation where special result information is stored.

Feature G6. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G5, wherein the special result is not included in the trigger result.

According to the above configuration, for example, since a single winning of a special result does not trigger a shift to a specific state, in a gaming machine that sets overlapping results that include the trigger result and special result and single results that do not include the special result. , it is possible to realize the gameplay of feature G1 without complicating the configuration. In other words, if the configuration is such that a special result causes a transition to a specific state, duplicate results may cause inconveniences such as the need for a configuration to determine whether the trigger result or special result should be used as a trigger to transition to a specific state. This is because it can occur.

Feature G7. The game according to any one of features G1 to G6, wherein the trigger result is set as a result in which the probability of winning as a lottery result by the lottery means is the same regardless of the game state. Machine.

According to the above configuration, since the winning probability of the trigger result does not change regardless of the gaming state, the probability of transition to a specific state also becomes difficult to change depending on the gaming state. By doing this, in a configuration having multiple gaming states, it is possible to ensure fairness between a player who starts playing in one gaming state and a player who starts playing in another gaming state. can.

Note that the above configuration may be expressed as follows.

“As the gaming state, a first gaming state and a second gaming state are set, which have different winning probabilities (JAC winning probability) in a predetermined lottery process,
The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means in the first game state becomes the trigger result is the same as the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means in the second game state becomes the trigger result.

<Feature H group>
Feature H1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. function to perform processing), and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a benefit granting means (a function for executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, it becomes possible to win the first operation result (first minor role), and when the stop operation means is operated in the first By operating in a second operation mode different from the operation mode, it is possible to win a second operation result (4th minor win to 27th minor win) that can give a profit different from the first operation result. The mode result (for example, press order bell) is set,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the mode result, a mode notification means (main control (a function of executing press order notification processing by the device 101);
The gaming states include a specific state (AT mode) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means can be executed, and a normal state (normal mode) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is not executed or is more difficult to execute than the specific state. and are set,
A specific transition determination means (a function of executing AT lottery processing and counting of the number of ceiling games by the main controller 101) for determining transition from the normal state to the specific state based on a predetermined determination trigger; ,
Based on the fact that the result of the transition determination by the specific transition determination means is a transition response result (winning in the AT mode transition lottery or reaching the ceiling number of games) corresponding to transition to the specific state, Specific transition means for transitioning from the normal state to the specific state (a function that executes processing for transitioning to the AT mode when the AT mode winning flag is set by the main controller 101);
Equipped with
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first special result (first BB), and the gaming state is determined based on the fact that a first special symbol combination corresponding to the first special result has stopped at the valid position. The first special state is transitioned to a first special state, and the first special state is ended based on the fulfillment of a predetermined first special end condition, and the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined second special result (second BB ), the gaming state is shifted to a second special state based on the second special symbol combination corresponding to the second special result being stopped at the valid position, and a predetermined second special ending condition is met. a special transition means (a function for executing bonus state processing by the main controller 101) capable of terminating the second special state based on the establishment of the second special state;
In a game in which the first special result is won, if the first special symbol combination does not stop at the valid position, first special result information corresponding to the fact that the first special result has been won is transmitted. If the second special symbol combination does not stop at the valid position in a game in which the second special result is won, the second special result corresponding to the second special result is won. 2. A special result storage means capable of storing special result information (a function for executing processing for setting a BB carryover flag by the main controller 101);
Equipped with
The probability that the shift-compatible result will be obtained in the first special situation in which the first special result information is stored in the special result storage means, and the second special result information in which the second special result information is stored in the special result storage means. 2. In special situations, the probability of achieving the above-mentioned transition compatible result is different (the AT mode lottery obtained depending on whether the first BB carryover flag is set or the second BB carryover flag is set). If the tables are in a different configuration or the 1st BB carryover flag is set and the transition is made to an advantageous section, the mode is set to the 1st CZ mode, and if the 2nd BB carryover flag is set and the transition is made to the advantageous section, the 2nd CZ mode is set. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the above configuration, the orbiting body is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the orbiting body is stopped as a stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the game based on the operation of the stop operation means, thereby responding to winning of the lottery result. In so-called slot machines, where bonuses are given, so-called bonuses are set, such as a first special result that transitions to a first special state when winning a prize, and a second special result that transitions to a second special state when a prize is won. In addition, the winning results vary depending on the manner of the stop operation of the stop operation means.When a result is won, a manner notification regarding the manner of the stop operation may be carried out by a predetermined notification means, and the advantage may vary depending on the presence or absence of the manner notification. For example, if the state shifts to a special state during a specific state, a specific notification is made in that special state, while if the state shifts to a special state during a normal state, no specific notification is made, etc. It is possible to realize a game that combines a special state and a specific notification.

Moreover, in this gaming machine, either result information of the first special result information indicating that the first special result has been won, or the second special result information indicating that the second special result has been won. When a transition to a specific state is determined in a situation where a state is stored, the probability of a transition corresponding result corresponding to transition to a specific state differs depending on which result information is stored. In this way, not only can the specific state and the special state be fused, but also the situation before the transition to the special state can be associated with the specific state and can be used to increase interest.

Feature H2. If the first special state is shifted to the first special state before the result of the transition determination by the specific transition determination means becomes the transition corresponding result, the situation after the first special state ends. is less likely to result in the transition response result than in the first special situation,
If the second special state is shifted to the second special state before the result of the transition determination by the specific transition determination means becomes the transition corresponding result, the situation after the second special state ends. is that it is less likely to result in the shift compatible result than in the second special situation (by winning a BB prize in normal mode before shifting to AT mode, the advantageous section ends, and the process of setting the number of ceiling games is performed) , the AT mode winning flag is less likely to be set).

According to the above configuration, the probability that the transition determination by the specific transition determination means in a situation where the first special result information and the second special result information are stored is a transition compatible result is the first special state or the second special state. This is higher than the probability that the result will be compatible with the transition based on the transition judgment in the situation after the end, so in terms of gameplay that aims to transition to a specific state (result that corresponds to the transition), even if each special result is won, it is not possible to win a prize. It would be more advantageous to receive the transition judgment without establishing it. By doing so, it is possible to realize an unprecedented and innovative gaming experience in which the special result winning is carried over, that is, the transition to a specific state is determined while avoiding winning.

Feature H3. Means for terminating the specific state and transitioning to the normal state when either the first special terminating condition or the second special terminating condition is satisfied (BB terminating in AT continuation setting processing by the main controller 101) The game according to feature H1 or feature H2, characterized in that the game has a function of executing a process of clearing the AT mode flag in the game and a process of completing the advantageous section in the BB end game in the second section display process. Machine.

According to the above configuration, in a situation where the first special result information and the second special result information are stored, the transition to the specific state is determined with the probability corresponding to the stored special result information, and the transition to the specific state is determined. Even in the case of transition, the specific state ends after the special result winning is achieved and the special state is played. With this configuration, it is suppressed that the specific state continues indefinitely even after the special state, and the special result winning → transition determination to the specific state → transition to the specific state → special state → normal state → It is possible to realize cycle gameplay such as winning special results.

Feature H4. Means for maintaining the specific state without terminating the specific state when either the first special ending condition or the second special ending condition is satisfied (BB in the AT continuation setting process by the main controller 101) Feature H3 is characterized by having a function of not clearing the AT mode flag in the end game and a function of not allowing the advantageous section to end even if it is a BB end game in the second section display process. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, it is assumed that the specific state may end when the special state ends, and by making it possible for the specific state to continue, it is possible to make the special state within the specific state consecutive. can do. Therefore, it is possible to create a wave of increased balls due to the consecutive winning properties of the special state, and the interest of the game is improved.

Feature H5. means (main controller The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H4, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing a process of restricting the AT mode shift lottery and ceiling counter subtraction process during the BB state according to No. 101.

According to the above configuration, even if a transition is made to each special state before the transition determination by the specific transition determination means results in a transition compatible result, execution of the transition determination is restricted during the special state, so that the transition to the specific state is restricted. In the game where the goal is to transition, it can be said that there is little merit in transitioning to the special state before the transition compatible result is achieved. By doing so, it is possible to easily play a game where the transition to a specific state is determined in a situation where special result information is stored.

Feature H6. The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the first special result is lower than the probability that the lottery result will be the second special result,
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H5, wherein the first special situation is more likely to result in the transfer compatible result than the second special situation.

According to the above configuration, the first special situation in which the first special result information corresponding to the first special result with a lower probability of winning is stored corresponds to the second special result with a higher probability of winning. This is more likely to result in a migration response than the second special situation in which the second special result information is stored. By doing this, the benefits of winning the first special result with a lower probability of winning are increased, and the player's joy in the case of winning the first special result is realized by the ease with which it becomes a transition-compatible result. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature H7. The gaming machine according to feature H6, wherein the first special ending condition and the second special ending condition are the same condition.

According to the above configuration, although the first special result and the second special result are based on the assumption that the winning probabilities and the ease of transition corresponding results are different, the ending conditions in the special state to transition to are the same, and the second special result is the same. Differences in advantages between the first special state and the second special state are less likely to occur. By doing this, it is possible to summarize the difference in the advantageousness of the two special results into the difference in the ease of obtaining the transferable result, and it is possible to increase the attention to the difference in the transferable result. .

Feature H8. The specific migration determination means uses a predetermined migration information group (AT lottery table) and a random number for determination to determine whether or not the random number for determination this time corresponds to the migration support result. The configuration is
The transition information group acquired in the first special situation and the transition information group acquired in the second special situation are different, so that the likelihood of the transition response result is different. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H7.

According to the above configuration, the so-called lottery table as a group of transition information to be acquired differs depending on which special result information is stored, and the ease with which a result corresponding to transition occurs varies depending on the group of transition information. Become. By doing this, when trying to adjust the ease of transition response results, it is only necessary to change the settings of the transition information group, and the game can be designed with a relatively simple configuration.

<Characteristics Group I>
Feature I1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. functions) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a benefit granting means (a function for executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, it becomes possible to win the first operation result (first minor role), and when the stop operation means is operated in the first By operating in a second operation mode different from the operation mode, it is possible to win a second operation result (4th minor win to 27th minor win) that can give a profit different from the first operation result. A mode result (for example, a press order bell) is set,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the mode result, a mode notification means (main control (a function for executing press order notification processing by the device 101);
As the gaming state, a specific state (advantageous section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means can be executed, and a normal state (normal section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is not executed,
Based on the satisfaction of a predetermined upper limit condition in the specific state, an upper limit ending means for terminating the specific state regardless of the remainder of the specific state (upper limit number of games in the section display second process by the main controller 101) (a function that executes processing to end the advantageous section based on the fact that the upper limit increase number of tickets has been reached),
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined special result (first BB, second BB), and the gaming state is changed to a special state based on the fact that a special symbol combination corresponding to the special result has stopped at the valid position. special transition means (a function for executing bonus state processing by the main controller 101) capable of transitioning and terminating the special state based on the fulfillment of a predetermined special end condition;
In a specific situation (the number of games in the advantageous section AG is 1400 or more or the number of increase/decrease tickets MY in the advantageous section is 2200 or more) before the upper limit condition is met in the specific state, the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result. or when the special state ends, a specific ending means for ending the specific state (a value in which the number of advantageous section games AG and the number of advantageous section increases/decreases MY in the BB winning game by the main control device 101 satisfies the termination condition) If so, a function that executes processing to end the advantageous section) and
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the orbiting body is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the orbiting body is stopped as a stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the game based on the operation of the stop operation means, thereby responding to winning of the lottery result. In a so-called slot machine in which a special benefit is given, the winning result differs depending on the mode of the stop operation of the stop operation means.When the winning result is won, a notification regarding the mode of the stop operation may be performed by a predetermined notification means. There is a game feature in which the degree of advantage varies depending on the presence or absence of mode notification. Although aspect notification may be executed in a specific state, the specific state may end when a predetermined upper limit condition is met, and the specific state is set so that the advantage of the specific state does not become too high.

In this case, if the specific state is configured to end based on the upper limit condition, for example, if the specific state ends due to the upper limit condition even though an event such as so-called top-up or stock has occurred that allows the specific state to continue, the player Players may feel as if their additional funds and stocks have been exploited, and their intention to continue playing may decrease. Therefore, in the above configuration, in a specific situation before the upper limit condition is met, if a special result is won that allows transition to a special state as a so-called bonus, or when the special state ends and the special result is By having a configuration that ends the specific state when it is clear that the player has not won, for example, it is possible to transition to the specific state again during the bonus, or the specific state can be changed depending on the presence or absence of bonus winning information. By utilizing a configuration in which the ease of transition to a state in which a mode or mode notification is performed changes, it is possible to make the user expect to transition to a specific state again. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the decrease in the desire to play due to the game ending under the upper limit condition.

Feature I2. The specific state to which the player is subsequently transitioned is more advantageous for the player after the specific state is ended by the specific ending means than after the specific state is ended by the upper limit ending means. The gaming machine according to feature I1.

According to the above configuration, it is better to end the specific state by the specific terminating means before the upper limit condition is met than to end the specific state by the upper limit terminating means based on the upper limit condition being satisfied, then transition to the specific state. It will be advantageous if you do. With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly bring about the advantage of terminating the specific state by the specific terminating means without waiting for the upper limit condition to be met.

Feature I3. The profit that can be obtained when the specific state is ended by the specific ending means and then the specific state is transferred to the specific state is greater when the specific state is not ended by the specific ending means and the upper limit condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to feature I1 or feature I2, wherein the specific situation is set in such a way that the specific situation may be more advantageous to the player than the profit obtained.

According to the above configuration, the advantage of terminating the specific state by the specific terminating means becomes clearer. In other words, if the specific state was not terminated by the specific termination means, the specific state could have continued until the upper limit condition was met. By making it possible for the player to obtain a profit greater than the profit that would be obtained until the upper limit condition is met, it becomes easier for the player to accept that the specific state will be terminated by the specific termination means.

Feature I4. The specific termination means is configured to terminate the specific state when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the special result in the specific situation,
As the specific state, a first specific state (normal mode) and a second specific state (CZ mode) that is more advantageous for the player than the first specific state are set;
If the special result information (BB carryover flag) corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result is not stored, and the specific state is entered, the first specific state is entered, and the special result is not stored. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I3, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to shift to the second specific state when the specific state is entered in a situation where result information is stored.

As in the above configuration, the specific state is transitioned to a state where the degree of advantage differs depending on the presence or absence of special result information corresponding to winning the special result, and the specific state ends when the special result is won. If this is done, it becomes possible to shift to the second specific state, which is more advantageous, by moving to the specific state afterwards, without establishing a special result winning. On the other hand, if the specific state ends based on the establishment of the upper limit condition, the special result may not have been won when re-transferring to the specific state after the end of the specific state, and the first specific state on the disadvantageous side It can be transferred. By doing so, it becomes possible to further clarify the merits of terminating the specific state based on the special result winning in the specific situation.

Feature I5. As the special result, a first special result (1st BB) and a second special result (2nd BB) different from the first special result are set,
When the specific state is entered in a situation where first special result information (first BB carryover flag) corresponding to the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result is stored, the lottery means The second special result is more advantageous in the second specific state than in the case where the second special result information (second BB carryover flag) corresponding to the second special result is stored. It has a high degree of
The specific termination means terminates the specific state when the lottery result by the lottery means in the specific situation is the first special result, and the specific termination means terminates the specific state when the lottery result by the lottery means in the specific situation is the second special result. If so, the gaming machine according to feature I4 is characterized in that the specific state is not ended.

According to the above configuration, there are two cases: when the transition is made in a situation where information corresponding to the winning of the first special result is stored, and when the transition is made in a situation where the information corresponding to the winning of the second special result is stored. , the degree of advantage of the second specific state is different, and the first special result is more advantageous for the second specific state than the second special result. In such a configuration, in a specific situation, if the first special result is the first special result, the specific state ends, but if it is the second special result, the specific state does not end, so that the second specific state on the more advantageous side The configuration is such that the specific state is terminated before the upper limit condition is satisfied only in situations where a transition to the current state can occur. By doing this, it is possible to further increase the effectiveness of ending the specific state before the upper limit condition is met.In other words, even though the specific state is ended before the upper limit condition is met, the game This can make it less likely that a person will not be able to enjoy the benefits as much as he or she expected.

Feature I6. The gaming machine according to feature I5, wherein the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the first special result is lower than the probability that the lottery result will be the second special result.

According to the above configuration, by using the rarity of the first special result, it is possible to ensure the balance of the advantageousness of the situation in which it is possible to shift to the advantageous second specific state by using the rarity of the first special result. . Therefore, within the scope that does not violate the meaning of providing the upper limit condition, it is possible to realize a gaming feature in which the specific state is ended midway and the game is re-transferred to the advantageous second specific state.

Feature I7. If the lottery result by the lottery means is a winning of the special result, a duplicate result of the other game result and the special result is set so that the other game result is also a win,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the duplicate result, a priority means (primary means) is provided at the valid position so that a symbol combination corresponding to the other game result can be stopped with priority over the special symbol combination. The gaming machine according to feature I5 or feature I6, further comprising a function of executing priority setting processing by the control device 101.

According to the above configuration, when a special result is won, other game results are also won, so the special result is not won in the game, but other game results are won. Therefore, when a special result is won in a specific situation and the specific state ends in the game, the normal state starts in a situation where the special result information is stored. In this way, when transitioning from the normal state to the specific state again, the special result information is likely to be stored, making it easier to transition to the advantageous second specific state.

Feature I8. The specific termination means is configured to terminate the specific state when the special termination condition of the special state is satisfied in the specific situation,
As the specific state, a first specific state (normal mode) and a second specific state (CZ mode) that is more advantageous for the player than the first specific state are set;
If the special result information (BB carryover flag) corresponding to the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result is not stored and the specific state is entered, the second specific state is entered and the special result is not stored. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I3, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to shift to the first specific state when the specific state is entered in a situation where result information is stored.

As in the above configuration, the advantage level changes depending on the presence or absence of special result information corresponding to winning the special result, and the special state ends and the special result changes. If you end the specific state in a situation where it is clear that you have not won, that is, the special result information is not stored, then if you move to the specific state without winning the special result, then It becomes possible to shift to the second specific state on the advantageous side. On the other hand, if the specific state ends based on the establishment of the upper limit condition, it may be after the special result is won, but before the special state transition or end. In this case, after the specific state ends, the specific state will be re-transferred. In this case, a transition may be made to the first specified state of the disadvantageous side. By doing so, it becomes possible to further clarify the merits of terminating a specific state based on the end of the special state in a specific situation.

Feature I9. In the normal state, in a game where the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, means (main controller The gaming machine according to feature I8, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing a process of moving to an advantageous section based on winning of the first BB of repeat duplication and the second BB of repeat duplication according to No. 101.

According to the above configuration, in the gaming machine of feature I8, after the specific state ends in a situation where the special result information is not stored, but before the special result information is stored in the game in which the special result is won. A transition to a specific state will occur. As a result, when transitioning to a specific state based on winning a special result, the transition will be made to the second specific state on the advantageous side, which improves the significance of ending the specific state based on the end of the special state in a specific situation. becomes possible.

Feature I10. In the specific state, a continuation determination means capable of executing a continuation determination as to whether or not a predetermined continuation condition is satisfied (a continuation flag is set in the BB winning game in the section display second process by the main controller 101). function to determine whether or not is set).
The specific termination means is configured to determine that, in a situation before the specific situation in the specific state, when the lottery result by the lottery device is the special result, the continuation determination result by the continuation determination device is such that the continuation condition is met. If the result is that the continuation condition is met, the specific state is not terminated, whereas if the continuation determination result by the continuation determination means is that the continuation condition is not met, the specific state is terminated. and in the specific situation in the specific state, if the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the result of the continuation determination by the continuation determination means is the result that the continuation condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I9, characterized in that the specific state is ended even when the specified state is reached.

According to the above configuration, if a special result is won in a specific state, the specific state will not end if the continuation conditions were met before the specific state, and the specific state will end if the continuation conditions were not met. , Before the specific situation, the configuration is such that whether or not the specific state continues when the special result is won is managed based on the success or failure of the continuation condition, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the success or failure of the continuation condition. In addition, in the case of a specific situation, even if the continuation condition is met, if the special result is won, the specific state ends, so it is possible to increase the attention to whether or not the special result is won. That is, before and after a specific situation, the points that the player should pay attention to will change as the game progresses, and the game will be more interesting while suppressing the monotony of the game.

<Feature J group>
Feature J1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. function to perform processing), and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a benefit granting means (a function for executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, it becomes possible to win the first operation result (first minor role), and when the stop operation means is operated in the first By operating in a second operation mode different from the operation mode, it is possible to win a second operation result (4th minor win to 27th minor win) that can give a profit different from the first operation result. The mode result (for example, press order bell) is set,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the mode result, a mode notification means (main control (a function of executing press order notification processing by the device 101);
As the gaming state, a specific state (advantageous section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means can be executed, and a normal state (normal section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is not executed,
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first special result (first BB), and the gaming state is determined based on the fact that a first special symbol combination corresponding to the first special result has stopped at the valid position. The first special state is transitioned to a first special state, and the first special state is ended based on the fulfillment of a predetermined first special end condition, and the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined second special result (second BB ), the gaming state is shifted to a second special state based on the second special symbol combination corresponding to the second special result being stopped at the valid position, and a predetermined second special ending condition is met. a special transition means (a function for executing bonus state processing by the main controller 101) capable of terminating the second special state based on the establishment of the second special state;
In the specific state, if the first special symbol combination does not stop at the valid position in a game in which the first special result is won, the specific state is terminated and the state is shifted to the normal state; In a game in which the first special result is won, when the first special symbol combination stops at the valid position, a first specific ending means (section control by the main controller 101) that maintains the specific state without ending it. In the second display process, when the AT mode flag is set and the continuation flag is not set, if the first BB winning game occurs, the advantageous section is ended, but if it is the first BB winning game, the advantageous section is not ended. ) and
In the specific state, if the second special symbol combination does not stop at the valid position in a game in which the second special result is won, the specific state is terminated and the state is shifted to the normal state; In a game in which the second special result is won, when the second special symbol combination stops at the valid position, a second specific ending means (section control by the main controller 101) that maintains the specific state without ending it. In the second display process, when the AT mode flag is set and the continuation flag is not set, if the second BB winning game occurs, the advantageous section is ended, but if it is the second BB winning game, the advantageous section is not ended. ) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the orbiting body is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the orbiting body is stopped as a stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the game based on the operation of the stop operation means, thereby responding to winning of the lottery result. In so-called slot machines, where bonuses are given, so-called bonuses are set, such as a first special result that transitions to a first special state when winning a prize, and a second special result that transitions to a second special state when a prize is won. In addition, the winning results vary depending on the manner of the stop operation of the stop operation means.When a result is won, a manner notification regarding the manner of the stop operation may be carried out by a predetermined notification means, and the advantage may vary depending on the presence or absence of the manner notification. For example, if the state shifts to a special state during a specific state, a specific notification is made in that special state, while if the state shifts to a special state during a normal state, no specific notification is made, etc. It is possible to realize gameplay that combines special states and specific notifications.
Furthermore, in this gaming machine, if a first special result or a second special result that allows transition to the first special state or second special state is won during a specific state in which mode notification can be performed, the winning If the player succeeds in winning a prize in the game, the specific state is maintained; however, if the player fails in winning the winning game, the specific state ends. In other words, if you can win a prize in a winning game, you can enjoy the benefits of the special state mentioned above, but if you cannot win a prize in a winning game, you will not be able to enjoy the benefits. , the success or failure of winning a prize in a winning game has a great influence on the profits that can be earned afterwards, and this increases the fun of determining the winning game of the first special result or the second special result during a specific state. . Moreover, in the first special result and the second special result, winning is achieved by the first special symbol combination and the second special symbol combination, respectively, and the symbol combinations that should be aimed at in order to win the prize are different. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by determining the winning game as described above, and it is possible to suitably suppress a phenomenon in which a specific state continues indefinitely.

Feature J2. It is configured such that the lottery result by the lottery means can be the result of the mode in the situation where the special state is and the situation where the special state is not the special state,
In the specific state and the special state, the lottery result by the lottery means is the mode result, and the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode corresponding to the first operation result. In this case, while the first operation result wins a prize, the lottery result by the lottery means in the specific state and not the special state is the mode result, and the first operation result corresponds to the first operation result. The gaming machine according to feature J1, wherein when the stop operation means is operated in the operation mode, the first operation result does not win a prize.

According to the above configuration, when an operation is performed in the first operation mode corresponding to the first operation result when a mode result is won, the winning of the first operation result is established if the special state is in effect; If not, the first operation result won't be won. In other words, when the first operation mode is notified by the mode notification, it becomes possible to win a prize as a result of the first operation, and it is necessary to be in a special state to be able to enjoy the benefits of the mode notification. By doing this, the difference between the profit in a specific state and a special state and the profit in a specific state and a non-special state is clarified, and a prize is awarded when each special result is won during a specific state. It becomes possible to bring about the benefits of this.

Feature J3. As the lottery result by the lottery means, a payout result (1st small win to 27th small win, etc.) is set in which the payout of a predetermined number of game media is given as the benefit by the bonus granting means,
The first special state and the second special state are states in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the predetermined payout result can change compared to the state before transition (particularly in the normal gaming state and The gaming machine according to feature J1 or feature J2, wherein the no-questions-asked bell winning probability changes depending on the BB third state.

According to the above configuration, it is made clear that the first special state and the second special state are bonus states in which the probability of winning a predetermined payout result changes. In other words, if you succeed in winning a bonus in a bonus winning game during a specific state, the specific state will continue and you will be able to enjoy the benefits of that bonus state. If you fail, you can enjoy the benefits of the bonus state itself by winning a bonus afterwards, but as in feature J2, the specific state ends and you cannot enjoy the benefits of the combination of the specific state and the bonus state. It can be realized.

Feature J4. In the predetermined rotating body, the first special symbol (the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R) forming the first special symbol combination can be stopped at the valid position at the corresponding first timing. When the stop operation of the stop operation means is performed, the second special symbol (the "BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R) forming the second special symbol combination cannot be stopped at the valid position, and the second special symbol The first special symbol may not be able to be stopped at the valid position if a stop operation of the corresponding stop operation means is performed at a second timing at which the symbol can be stopped at the valid position. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J3.

According to the above configuration, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol corresponding to the first special result and the second special result cannot be aimed and stopped at the same time, the winning game is the first special symbol. As a result, if you operate the first special symbol at a time when it can be stopped, you can avoid ending the specific state, but if you operate the second special symbol at a time when it can be stopped, the specific state will end, and vice versa. If the second special symbol is stopped in the second special result winning game, the specific state does not end, but if the first special symbol is aimed at, the specific state ends. By doing this, it is possible to realize a gameplay in which the stop operation is aimed at which special result in a special result winning game, depending on whether or not the specific state ends. The function of not allowing the process to continue indefinitely is more effectively achieved.

Feature J5. The gaming machine according to feature J4, wherein the number of the first special symbols and the number of the second special symbols arranged on the predetermined revolving body are different.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration of feature J4 that a winning cannot be achieved unless the aim matches, since the corresponding numbers of symbols are different, the difficulty level of achieving a winning is different between the first special result and the second special result. It will be different depending on the special result. In this case, for example, a player who is not accustomed to game operations will aim to win the special result on the side with the largest number of symbols, and a player who is accustomed to the game will aim to win the special result on the side with the largest number of symbols. is considered to be selected. By doing so, even a player who is not accustomed to game operations can suitably enjoy the game when the special result is won.

Feature J6. As a lottery result by the lottery means, a duplicate result (reply duplicate first BB, reply duplicate second BB) including at least one of the first special result and the second special result and another game result, and the first special result and a single result (single 1st BB, single 2nd BB) that includes either of the second special results but does not include the other game results,
The drive control means is configured to prioritize and stop the symbol combination corresponding to the other game result when either the first special result or the second special result and the other game result are won. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J5, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with a priority means (a function for executing priority setting processing by the main control device 101) for drive control.

According to the above configuration, if each special result is won in duplicate results, other game results are won instead of each special result in the relevant game, and if each special result is won in a single result, the target is If the symbols match, each special result prize can be achieved in the game. In other words, if there is a double result win in a specific state, the specific state will be terminated because no prizes can be won in that game, and if there is a single result win in a specific state, there is no way to avoid the end of the game. There may be room. By using such duplicate results, it is possible to terminate a specific state regardless of the player's operations, and by simply adjusting the winning probability between duplicate results and single results, the forced termination rate of a specific state can be effectively reduced. It becomes possible to adjust.

Feature J7. The lottery result by the lottery means is set such that the probability that the lottery result is the duplicate result including the first special result is different from the probability that the lottery result is the duplicate result including the second special result, The lottery result by the lottery means is set so that the probability that the lottery result will be the single result including the first special result is the same or substantially the same as the probability that the lottery result will be the single result including the second special result. The gaming machine according to feature J6.

According to the above configuration, the first special result and the second special result have the same or almost the same probability for a single result in which a prize is established if the aim matches the symbol. , there is no situation in which it is easier to win a prize by aiming, and the game can be left to the player's intuition. On top of that, for duplicate results that do not result in a prize even if the aims match, the first special result and the second special result can have different probabilities, allowing the player to choose which one to aim for. It is possible to create a difference in the probability of winning between the first special result and the second special result within a range that does not eliminate gender.

Feature J8. In the specific state, in a special game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is a winning of either the first special result or the second special result, a special notification is made by a predetermined notification means to indicate that it is the special game. According to any one of features J1 to J7, the device is equipped with a special notification means (a function of executing processing for performing a continuation chance performance by the display control device 81) capable of performing notification. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, since the special notification is executed in the winning game of the first special result or the second special result, the winning game of the special result, which is the core of the game of this gaming machine, may be overlooked and the prize winning game may be missed. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of an event in which it was not possible to establish the following. Further, by assuming that special notification is given, it is not necessary to play a game aiming at winning a special result every game in a specific state, and it is possible to play the game smoothly.

Feature J9. As a lottery result by the lottery means, a duplicate result (reply duplicate first BB, reply duplicate second BB) including at least one of the first special result and the second special result and another game result, and the first special result and a single result (single 1st BB, single 2nd BB) that includes either of the second special results but does not include the other game results,
The drive control means is configured to prioritize and stop the symbol combination corresponding to the other game result when either of the first special result or the second special result and the other game result are won. A priority means (a function for executing priority setting processing by the main control device 101) is provided for driving control of the main controller 101,
The special notification means can execute the special notification in the special game triggered by the single result, and the special notification can be executed in the special game triggered by the duplicate result. The gaming machine described in feature J8.

According to the above configuration, whether it is a duplicate result or a single result, a special notification is given in the winning game where the special result is won, so the duplicate result and the single result are used to aim at the symbols and hit the target. In some gameplays, there are cases in which you win if you aim at the pattern and you do not win if your aim does not match, and cases in which you do not win even if you aim at the pattern and your aim matches. Even if it is, it can be used as an opportunity to aim at the pattern. Therefore, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the game.

<Feature K group>
Feature K1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. function to perform processing), and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a benefit granting means (a function for executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, it becomes possible to win the first operation result (first minor role), and when the stop operation means is operated in the first By operating in a second operation mode different from the operation mode, it is possible to win a second operation result (4th minor win to 27th minor win) that can give a profit different from the first operation result. The mode result (for example, press order bell) is set,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the mode result, a mode notification means (main control (a function of executing press order notification processing by the device 101);
As the gaming state, a specific state (advantageous section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means can be executed, and a normal state (normal section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is not executed,
As the specific state, a first specific state (AT mode) and a second specific state (normal mode) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is less likely to be executed are set as the first specific state,
When a predetermined specific transition condition (that the AT mode winning flag is set) is satisfied, a specific transition means (main controller 101 switches the AT mode to the first specific state) causes the second specific state to transition to the first specific state. (a function that executes processing for migration),
When a predetermined specific ending condition (BB winning) is satisfied in the specific state, a specific ending means for ending the specific state and transitioning to the normal state (BB winning in the section display second process by the main controller 101) A function that executes the process of ending the advantageous section in the game),
In the specific state, if the specific termination condition is satisfied before the specific transition condition is satisfied, termination restriction means (by the main controller 101) that restricts the specific termination means from terminating the specific state. (a function that executes a process that does not end an advantageous section when the completed flag is set in the second section display process);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the orbiting body is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the orbiting body is stopped as a stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the game based on the operation of the stop operation means, thereby responding to winning of the lottery result. In a so-called slot machine in which a special benefit is given, the winning result differs depending on the mode of the stop operation of the stop operation means.When the winning result is won, a notification regarding the mode of the stop operation may be performed by a predetermined notification means. There is a game feature in which the degree of advantage varies depending on the presence or absence of mode notification.

While the mode notification is executed in a specific state, it is not executed in a normal state, and furthermore, the configuration is such that mode notification is more easily executed in the first specific state than in the second specific state. The flow of the game is such that the user can enjoy the benefits of the mode notification by shifting from the normal state to the second specific state as a specific state, and then to the first specific state.

In such a configuration, if the specific termination condition as the termination condition of the specific state is satisfied before the transition from the second specific state to the first specific state occurs, the specific state is not terminated. Despite the transition to the specific state, there is a restriction that the specific state ends without enjoying the benefits of the first specific state. Therefore, the gameplay of moving to a specific state and aiming from the second specific state to the first specific state can be clarified, and this can be used as a support for decision-making to continue the game.

Feature K2. When transitioning to the second specific state, a specific setting means for setting a specific number (number of games) until the specific transition condition is satisfied as the number of successful games (the main controller 101 executes a process for setting the number of ceiling games) function) and
Establishment means for establishing the specific transition condition based on the specific number in the second specific state reaching the number to be established (AT mode is selected based on the ceiling counter by the main controller 101 reaching 0) function that executes processing to set flags), and
The gaming machine according to feature K1, characterized by comprising:

As mentioned above, even if the specific ending condition is met before the transition from the second specific state to the first specific state, the specific state does not end, so by applying this configuration to the gaming machine with feature K1, Opportunities for setting the number of occurrences as a ceiling are limited to when the first specific state shifts to the second specific state or when the normal state shifts to the second specific state. Thereby, it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience that the specific transition condition is not reached endlessly due to the number of successful transactions being reset many times.

Feature K3. comprising a continuation determination means (a function of executing a process of determining the presence or absence of a continuation flag in the section display second process by the main controller 101) for determining whether the continuation condition of the second specific state is satisfied;
The specific termination means terminates the specific state if the specific termination condition is satisfied in a situation where the continuation condition is not satisfied in the second specific state, and the specific termination means terminates the specific state when the continuation condition is not satisfied in the second specific state. The gaming machine according to feature K1 or feature K2, characterized in that the specific state is not ended if the specific end condition is satisfied in a situation where the specific end condition is satisfied.

According to the above configuration, if the specific termination condition is satisfied in a situation where the continuation condition is not satisfied in the second specific state, the specific state ends, and if the continuation condition is satisfied in the second specific state, the specific state is terminated. Even if the termination condition is met, it is possible to prevent the specific state from terminating. By doing so, for example, the specific termination condition can be used not only for terminating the specific state but also for other purposes (for example, as a transition condition that allows transition to an advantageous state in the second specific state). This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game while consolidating functions.

Feature K4. When the specific termination means terminates the specific state and transitions to the normal state, termination information storage means for storing termination information corresponding to the termination (a process of setting a completed flag by the main controller 101) ) and
When transitioning to the second specific state, means for erasing the termination information stored in the termination information storage means (a function for executing processing for clearing the termination flag when the main controller 101 starts the AT mode); ,
Initialization means capable of executing initialization processing of information regarding the specific state based on a predetermined trigger (a function for executing initialization processing of advantageous section information by main controller 101);
Equipped with
The termination restriction means is configured to restrict termination of the specific state by the specific termination means when the specific termination condition is met and the termination information is stored in the termination information storage means;
According to any one of features K1 to K3, the end information stored in the end information storage means is not deleted even if the initialization process is performed by the initialization means. gaming machines.

According to the above configuration, when the specific state is terminated by the specific termination means, the termination information is stored, and depending on the presence or absence of the termination information, it is determined whether or not to restrict the termination of the specific state when the specific termination condition is satisfied thereafter. It is determined. In this case, the termination information is not subject to the initialization process of information related to the specific state, so for example, if an administrator of a gaming hall, etc. executes the initialization process of information related to the specific state when setting up the gaming machine. Even if it is, the termination information will not be deleted. Then, even if there is a transition from the normal state to the specific state, the end information is maintained, so even if the specific end condition is met afterwards, the specific state will end before the transition to the second specific state. is avoided. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from discovering that the initialization process has been performed based on whether or not the specific state has ended.

Feature K5. When transitioning from the normal state to the specific state, an end information storage means for storing predetermined end information (a function that executes a process of setting a completed flag in an advantageous section transition game process by the main controller 101) )and,
When transitioning to the second specific state, means for erasing the termination information stored in the termination information storage means (a function for executing processing for clearing the termination flag when the main controller 101 starts the AT mode); ,
Initialization means capable of executing initialization processing of information regarding the specific state based on a predetermined trigger (a function for executing initialization processing of advantageous section information by main controller 101);
Equipped with
The termination restriction means is configured to restrict termination of the specific state by the specific termination means when the specific termination condition is met and the termination information is stored in the termination information storage means;
The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K3, wherein when the initialization process is performed by the initialization means, the end information stored in the end information storage means is also deleted.

According to the above configuration, when a transition from the normal state to the specific state occurs, the termination information is stored, and depending on the presence or absence of the termination information, whether or not to restrict the termination of the specific state when the specific termination condition is satisfied thereafter is determined. is determined. In this case, the termination information is subject to the initialization process of information related to the specific state, so for example, if an administrator of a gaming hall, etc. executes the initialization process of the information related to the specific state when setting the gaming machine. , the end information is also deleted along with the information indicating the specific state. Even in this case, after the initialization processing, when transitioning from the normal state to the specific state, the termination information is stored again, so if the specific termination condition is satisfied before transitioning to the second specific state , it is possible to avoid termination of the particular state.

Feature K6. When transitioning to the second specific state, a specific setting means for setting a specific number (number of games) until the specific transition condition is satisfied as the number of games to be achieved (the main controller 101 executes a process for setting the number of ceiling games) function) and
Establishment means that establishes the specific transition condition based on the specific number reaching the established number in the second specific state (AT mode is selected based on the ceiling counter by the main controller 101 reaching 0) function that executes processing to set flags), and
a predetermined number grasping means for grasping the predetermined number until the forced termination condition is satisfied in the specific state (a function for executing processing for managing the number of advantageous section games AG and the number of increase/decrease tickets MY in the advantageous section by the main controller 101); ,
When the predetermined number in the specific state reaches a number that corresponds to the fulfillment of the forced termination condition, means for terminating the specific state (based on the establishment of the forced termination condition in the section display second process by the main controller 101) (a function that executes processing to end an interval),
Equipped with
When the specific termination condition is satisfied, a transition to a predetermined special state (first BB state, second BB state) occurs or is possible;
The special state based on the specific termination condition, which is subject to the restriction on termination of the specific state by the specific termination means, is not subject to the specific number by the establishing means, while The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K5, characterized in that the gaming machine is a predetermined number of targets.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which termination of the specific state is avoided based on the satisfaction of the specific termination condition before transition to the second specific state, even if the transition to the special state is based on the establishment of the specific termination condition. , during the special state, it does not contribute to the number of games up to the ceiling because it is not subject to a specific number, but it does contribute to the number of games, etc. until the forced termination condition of the specific state because it becomes subject to a predetermined number. becomes. In other words, even if you avoid ending the specific state based on the satisfaction of the specific ending condition, the number of games up to the ceiling cannot be subtracted in the special state, and the number of remaining games in the specific state will decrease. Even if there is a subsequent transition to the second specific state, the benefits that can be enjoyed will be reduced by the amount of the special state. Therefore, even if the player transitions to a special state based on the fulfillment of a specific ending condition, there is no benefit to the player due to the special state, and even if the specific ending condition is also used as a transition to a special state, the specific state will not end. It is possible to avoid giving the player an advantage.

Feature K7. The termination restricting means allows the specific termination means to terminate the specific state when the specific termination condition is satisfied in the second specific state, while allowing the specific termination condition to be satisfied in the first specific state. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K6, characterized in that, if the specific state is established, termination of the specific state by the specific ending means is restricted.

According to the above configuration, the specific state ends when the specific ending condition is satisfied in the second specific state, but the specific state does not end when the specific ending condition is satisfied in the first specific state. By defining the specific termination condition in this way, it is possible to create a relatively simple configuration in which the specific state is not terminated even if the specific termination condition is satisfied during the first specific state without transitioning to the second specific state. It becomes possible to realize this.

Feature K8. The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined special result (1st BB, 2nd BB), and the special transition condition is established when the special symbol combination corresponding to the special result is stopped at the valid position, and the game is started. Special transition means capable of transitioning the state to a special state advantageous to the player and terminating the special state based on the fulfillment of a predetermined special end condition (execution of bonus state processing by the main controller 101) function),
The specific termination condition includes at least one of the following: the lottery result by the lottery means being the special result, the special transition condition being met, and the special termination condition being met. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K7.

According to the above configuration, the specific termination conditions include winning a special result as a so-called bonus that transitions to a special state by winning, winning a special result, or ending the special state. By applying the configuration of Feature K1 above to a configuration in which a specific state may end due to winning, winning, or termination of a bonus, it is possible to limit the situations in which a specific state triggered by a bonus ends. can be taken as a thing.

In particular, when this configuration is applied to feature K7, it is possible to terminate or not terminate the specific state using the bonus as an opportunity in the second specific state. Therefore, while it is possible to adjust the degree of advantage by combining a bonus that is advantageous to the player and the second specific state in which mode notification is likely to be performed, it is also possible to use the bonus as a trigger for ending the specific state. Therefore, functions can be consolidated, and it is also possible to change expectations for the bonus depending on whether or not there are continuation conditions.

<Feature L group>
Feature L1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. function to perform processing), and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a benefit granting means (a function for executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
A specific state (advantageous section) in which a specific event advantageous to the player (press order notification and 15-piece bell winning) can occur, and a normal state (normal section) in which the specific event does not occur are set,
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first special result (first BB), and the gaming state is determined based on the fact that a first special symbol combination corresponding to the first special result has stopped at the valid position. The first special state is transitioned to a first special state, and the first special state is ended based on the fulfillment of a predetermined first special end condition, and the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined second special result (second BB ), the gaming state is shifted to a second special state based on the second special symbol combination corresponding to the second special result being stopped at the valid position, and a predetermined second special ending condition is met. A special transition means (a function for executing bonus state processing by the main controller 101) capable of terminating the second special state based on the establishment of the second special state,
When the specific state transitions to either the first special state or the second special state, the specific event can occur in the first special state or the second special state to which the transition occurs; When the normal state transitions to either the first special state or the second special state, the specific event does not occur or is unlikely to occur in the first special state or the second special state to which the transition occurs. can be,
In the specific state, if the lottery result by the lottery means is either the first special result or the second special result, the specific ending means (main controller) terminates the specific state and transitions to the normal state. (a function of executing a process of ending an advantageous section when a BB different from the corresponding BB flag is won in the second section display process according to 101);
In the specific state, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result, a first end restriction means (main controller (a function of executing processing to prevent the advantageous section from ending if the first BB is won in a situation where the first BB flag is set in the second section display process according to 101);
In the specific state, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the second special result, a second end restriction means (main controller (a function of executing processing to prevent the advantageous section from ending if the second BB is won in a situation where the second BB flag is set in the second section display process according to 101);
a first restriction state (a state in which a first BB flag is set) in which the end of the specific state is restricted by the first end restriction means based on a predetermined setting trigger; and a second end restriction means. a second restriction state (a state in which the second BB flag is set) in which the end of the particular state is restricted by the restriction setting means (main controller 101);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the orbiting body is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the orbiting body is stopped as a stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the game based on the operation of the stop operation means, thereby responding to winning of the lottery result. In a so-called slot machine in which a bonus is granted, a first special result that allows a transition to a first special state as a so-called bonus, and a second special result that allows a transition to a second special state. , and if the player enters the first special state or the second special state during the specific state, a specific event that is advantageous to the player will occur, but if the player enters the first special state or the second special state during the normal state. Since a specific event does not occur when the transition occurs, we aim to transition to the first special state or second special state in a specific state instead of the normal state. It is possible to realize the gameplay of waiting for a transition to a specific state depending on the situation.

Moreover, in the above configuration, it is assumed that the specific state may be terminated if the first special result or the second special result occurs in the specific state, and if the first special result is the first special result, the termination of the specific state is restricted. A particular restriction state may be set including a first restriction state and a second restriction state in which termination of the particular state is restricted if it is a second special result. Therefore, while aiming to transition to each special state in a specific state, the special result of the side that is set to the restricted state is to prevent the specific state from ending due to the special result of the side that is not set to the restricted state. A gaming experience in which the player aims to win a prize is realized, making it possible to provide a game machine with unprecedented fun.

Feature L2. The setting trigger occurs after the lottery result by the lottery means becomes either the first special result or the second special result and before the corresponding first special state and second special state end. The gaming machine according to feature L1.

Assuming that each bonus is not won twice, after winning each special result until the special state ends, the special result will not be won twice. Therefore, by creating a setting opportunity to set a special result that restricts the end of a specific state between the winning of the special result and the end of the special state, the setting of the restriction state can be completed before winning the special result. becomes possible.

Feature L3. The gaming machine according to feature L2, wherein the setting trigger occurs when either the first special state or the second special state ends.

According to the above configuration, when the first special state or the second special state ends, there is a trigger for setting a special result that limits the end of the specific state, so that, for example, the special result to be restricted can be set. In a configuration in which notification is performed, it is possible to prevent confusion between a winning special result or a special state in progress and a special result set as a restriction target.

Feature L4. The restriction setting means executes a restriction lottery to determine which of the restriction states the specific restriction state is to be set based on the setting trigger, and sets the specific restriction state based on a lottery result of the restriction lottery. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L3.

According to the above configuration, which restriction state is set depends on the result of the restriction lottery, and it is possible to generate randomness in the restriction state. In this way, it is possible to draw attention to the type of special result that will be won while predicting which restriction state is set using effects or the like.

Feature L5. The limit setting means is a means (main controller 101 The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L4, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing a process of performing the next BB lottery according to the value of the consecutive game counter.

According to the above configuration, a special result is set to limit the end of the specific state depending on the number of times the specific state transitions to the special state and the number of setting triggers that occur from the winning of the special result to the end of the special state. Therefore, for example, if the setting trigger is the first time, it is likely to be set to the first restriction state, whereas if the setting trigger is the second time, which is different from the first time, it is likely to be set to the second restriction state. It becomes possible to realize such gameplay, and the average number of consecutive games in the special state can be managed to some extent on the gaming machine side through the advantages of the first special state and the second special state and the ease of setting the limit state. becomes possible.

In addition, when applying the above configuration to feature L4, "the limit setting means performs the limit lottery according to the number of times of the setting trigger in the specific state or the number of times of the first special state and the second special state. It may also be expressed as "we have the means to do so."

Feature L6. The restriction setting means is a means (by the main controller 101) capable of setting the specific restriction state according to the type of the special state in which the person has won or is staying when the setting opportunity occurs. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L5, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing a process of performing the next BB lottery according to the current BB type.

According to the above configuration, a special result that limits the end of the specific state is set depending on the special result won when the setting opportunity occurs in the specific state and the type of the special state, so, for example, It becomes possible to realize a gameplay in which the first limited state is likely to be set after the first special result, and the second limited state is likely to be set after the second special result, and the first special state and the second The continuity and discontinuity of special states can be managed to some extent on the gaming machine side through the ease with which special states are advantageous and limit states are set.

In addition, when applying the above configuration to feature L4, "the limit setting means performs the limit lottery according to the type of the special state in which the person is winning or staying when the setting opportunity occurs. It may also be expressed as "we have the means to enable this."

Feature L7. Setting value setting means (main controller 101),
The limit setting means is a means capable of setting the specific limit state according to the set value set by the set value setting means (a means for performing the next BB lottery according to the set value by the main controller 101). The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L6, characterized in that the gaming machine has a function of executing processing.

According to the above configuration, a special result that limits the end of a specific state is set according to a setting value that can cause a change in the increase/decrease rate or the increase/decrease manner of game media. It is possible to realize a gameplay in which the first limit state is likely to be set when a set value is set, and the second limit state is likely to be set when a second set value is set. It becomes possible to adjust the increase/decrease rate or increase/decrease manner of the special game media through the degree of advantage of the first special state and the second special state and the ease with which the restriction state is set.

In addition, when applying the above configuration to feature L4, it is assumed that "there are multiple levels of setting values that can cause changes in the increase/decrease rate or increase/decrease manner of game media, and one of the multiple levels of setting values is Equipped with a setting value setting means for setting a setting value (a function for executing the winning probability setting process by the main controller 101),
The limit setting means may include means capable of performing the limit lottery according to the set value set by the set value setting means.

Feature L8. comprising a game number grasping means for grasping at least the number of games including the specific state (a function for executing processing for managing the number of advantageous section games AG by the main control device 101);
The limit setting means is a means capable of setting the specific limit state according to the number of games grasped by the number of games grasping means (the next BB lottery according to the number of games AG in the advantageous section by the main controller 101). The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L6, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing a process of performing a process.

According to the above configuration, a special result is set to limit the end of the specific state depending on the number of games including the specific state, so for example, in the early stages of the specific state, the first limit state is likely to be set, It is possible to realize a gameplay in which the second limited state is more likely to be set as the state progresses or at the end of a specific state, and the advantage of the first special state and the second special state and the setting of the limited state. Through the ease with which players can play, it becomes possible to diversify the game progress in a specific state.

In addition, when applying the above configuration to feature L4, "game number grasping means for grasping the number of games including at least the specific state (a function for executing processing for managing the number of advantageous section games AG by the main control device 101)" Prepare,
The limit setting means may include means capable of performing the limit lottery according to the number of games ascertained by the number of games ascertaining means."

Feature L9. According to any one of features L1 to L8, the restriction setting means is capable of setting the first termination restriction means and the second termination restriction means as the current specific restriction state. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, only one of the first limited state in which the specific state does not end if the first special result is won, and the second limited state in which the specific state does not end if the second special result is won. Instead, it may be set to both the first and second restriction states, so in this case, even if you win either the first or second special result, the specific state will not be the same. It will not terminate. This expands the range of gameplay, in which the continuation of the specific state depends on which special result is won, and it becomes possible to improve the continuity of the specific state.

Feature L10. The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the first special result is set to be lower than the probability that the lottery result will be the second special result,
The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L9, wherein the restriction setting means is easier to set the first restriction state as the specific restriction state than the second restriction state.

According to the above configuration, the first restriction state that restricts the end of the specific state with the first special result that is difficult to win is the second restriction that restricts the end of the specific state with the second special result that is more likely to win. The configuration is such that it is difficult to set the second restriction state of the second special result, which is easier to set than the state, and is easier to win. By doing this, it is possible to make it difficult for the specific state to continue, and it is possible to prevent the ball payout rate from becoming too high. In addition, in such a configuration, since the first restriction state is easier to set than the second restriction state, it is more likely that the first special result is won than the second special result. The first special result can be said to be more advantageous than the second special result because the configuration is more likely to be subject to restrictions in a specific state than in the case of the first special result. Since the first special result on the more advantageous side is more difficult to win than the second special result, it is possible to maintain a balance between the degree of advantage and the probability of winning.

Feature L11. The state after the specific state is ended by the specific ending means in the first limited state is more advantageous for the player than the state after the specific state is ended by the specific ending means in the second limited state. The gaming machine according to feature L10.

According to the above configuration, the state after the second special result is won despite being set to the first restricted state and the specific state ends is better even though it was set to the second restricted state. Regardless, the first special result is more advantageous for the player than the state after the specific state ends. In other words, the first special result that is more likely to be restricted and more advantageous if won is more advantageous than the first special result that is more likely to be restricted and more advantageous if won, and the state after the specific state ends that is not restricted if won. By doing this, it is possible to compensate for the case where the specific state ends despite winning the first special result on the advantageous side, and it is possible to eliminate the decrease in the desire to play. It becomes possible.

<Feature M group>
Feature M1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. functions) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a benefit granting means (a function for executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, it becomes possible to win the first operation result (first minor role), and when the stop operation means is operated in the first By operating in a second operation mode different from the operation mode, it is possible to win a second operation result (4th minor win to 27th minor win) that can give a profit different from the first operation result. A mode result (for example, a press order bell) is set,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the mode result, a mode notification means (main control (a function for executing press order notification processing by the device 101);
As the gaming state, a specific state (advantageous section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means can be executed, and a normal state (normal section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is not executed,
Specific transition means for transitioning from the normal state to the specific state based on a predetermined transition trigger (winning the advantageous zone transition lottery and transitioning to the favorable zone) (in the zone display first process by the main controller 101) (a function that executes processing to move to an advantageous section),
Specific termination means for transitioning from the specific state to the normal state based on a predetermined termination trigger (BB win different from the set BB flag) (BB win in the section display second process by the main controller 101) A function that executes the process of ending the advantageous section in the game),
When the specific end means causes the specific state to transition to the normal state, specific initialization means (initialization processing of advantageous section information by the main controller 101) executes initialization processing of information used in the specific state. ) and
A special storage means capable of storing the result information of the game that triggered the termination as special result information that is not subject to the initialization processing by the initialization means (executes processing for setting a BB carryover flag by the main controller 101) function) and
When the specific transition means makes a transition from the normal state to the specific state, specific settings can set an advantage of the specific state using the special result information stored in the special storage device. means (a function for executing a process of setting the CZ mode according to the type of BB carryover flag in the advantageous section transition game process by the main controller 101);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the orbiting body is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the orbiting body is stopped as a stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the game based on the operation of the stop operation means, thereby responding to winning of the lottery result. In a so-called slot machine in which a special benefit is given, the winning result differs depending on the mode of the stop operation of the stop operation means.When the winning result is won, a notification regarding the mode of the stop operation may be performed by a predetermined notification means. There is a game feature in which the degree of advantage varies depending on the presence or absence of mode notification.

Although mode notification is executed in a specific state, it is not executed in a normal state, and when a specific state ends, initialization processing for the specific state is performed, so in a normal state that is not a specific state, the previous specific state For example, the game information between a player who started the game in the normal state after the end of a certain advantageous state and a player who started the game in the normal state after the end of a certain state that was not advantageous. Fairness can be easily ensured.

However, for example, in a configuration where the transition between specific states occurs in a relatively short span, this may be due to the difference between the player at the end of the specific state and the player who plays after that. Although inequality is unlikely to occur, there is a disadvantage that the flow of the game is interrupted because specific information is not inherited, making it difficult to improve interest.

Therefore, in the above configuration, the result information of the game that triggered the end of the specific state is stored as special result information, and the special result information is used to set the advantage when moving to the next specific state. By doing this, it is possible to share information across specific states without overturning the prerequisite configuration that information used in a specific state is initialized at the end, and it is possible to share information between specific states. It becomes possible to successfully improve the interest of the game in a game-like configuration.

Feature M2. The bonus granting means is configured such that the lottery result by the lottery unit is a predetermined special result (1st BB, 2nd BB), and when a special symbol combination corresponding to the special result is stopped at the valid position, the special It is possible to grant special benefits (transition to 1st BB state, transition to 2nd BB state) corresponding to the results,
The termination trigger may occur when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the special result,
The special storage means corresponds to winning the special result if the special symbol combination does not stop at the valid position in a game where the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result. The information is stored as the special result information,
The gaming machine according to feature M1, wherein in a game in which the special result information is stored in the special storage means, the special symbol combination can be stopped at the valid position.

According to the above configuration, the conventional configuration in which winning information is carried over if no prize is won in a winning game is used as special result information to bridge information between specific states, and comparison can be made. With a simple and simple configuration, it is possible to suitably enhance the enjoyment of playing consecutive games in a specific state.

Feature M3. As the special result, a first special result (first BB) and a second special result (second BB) different from the first special result are set,
The special storage means stores the first special symbol combination corresponding to the first special result at the valid position in a game where the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result. Information corresponding to winning the first special result is stored as first special result information, and in a game where the lottery result by the lottery means is the second special result, the information corresponding to the fact that the first special result has been won is stored in the valid position. If the second special symbol combination corresponding to the second special result does not stop, information corresponding to the fact that the second special result has been won is stored as second special result information;
The specific setting means is configured to set the specific state using the first special result information and the specific state set using the second special result information to have different advantages for the player. The gaming machine according to feature M2, wherein the gaming machine is set to .

According to the above configuration, the specific state ends in the game that resulted in the first special result, and the specific state is set using the first special result information as carryover information of the first special result, and the second special result is set using the first special result information as carryover information of the first special result. The degree of advantage for the player is set to be different depending on the specific state set using the second special result information regarding the result. By doing this, the advantage of the next specific state is set based on the special result that triggered the end of the specific state, and even a game that ends the specific state can attract interest in the lottery result. can.

Feature M4. When the first special result becomes the termination trigger in the specific state, the second special result does not become the termination trigger in the specific state, and the second special result becomes the termination trigger in the specific state. If so, the gaming machine according to feature M3 is configured such that the first special result does not become the termination trigger in the specific state.

According to the above configuration, when one special result triggers the end of a specific state, the other special result does not trigger the end in that specific state, so multiple special results are set and the special result becomes the trigger. The case where a specific state ends as follows means that the special result of the side that did not trigger the end was not the special result of the side that caused the end in the first place, but the special result of the side that was unfortunate. In such a configuration, by using a configuration that uses the unfortunate special result to set the advantage of the next specific state, the feeling of loss due to the end of the specific state can be reduced, and the feeling of loss due to the end of the specific state can be reduced. It is possible to compensate by making the next specific state advantageous, or to further arouse a sense of regret by making the next specific state disadvantageous, and it becomes possible to successfully associate successive specific states.

Feature M5. The special result includes a first special result (1st BB) and a second special result (2nd BB) that is less advantageous to the player than the first special result, and the probability that the flag for the 2nd BB is set is set for the 1st BB. Based on the fact that the probability of the flag being set is lower than the probability of the flag being set, winning the second BB is more disadvantageous than winning the first BB).
The special storage means stores the first special symbol combination corresponding to the first special result at the valid position in a game where the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result. Information corresponding to winning the first special result is stored as first special result information, and in a game where the lottery result by the lottery means is the second special result, the information corresponding to the fact that the first special result has been won is stored in the valid position. If the second special symbol combination corresponding to the second special result does not stop, information corresponding to the fact that the second special result has been won is stored as second special result information;
The specific setting means is configured such that the specific state set using the first special result information is more advantageous to the player than the specific state set using the second special result information. The gaming machine according to any one of features M2 to M4.

According to the above configuration, the specific state ends in the game in which the first special result is advantageous to the player, and the first special result information as the carryover information of the first special result is used to make the specific state advantageous. The degree of advantage of the specific state is set to be more advantageous than the case where the degree of advantage of the specific state is set using the second special result information about the second special result of the disadvantageous side. By doing this, it is possible to compensate for the fact that the specific state ends even though you won the first special result on the advantageous side by the advantage of the specific state from the next time onwards. Therefore, it becomes possible to successfully inherit the information of the advantageous first special result across specific states.

Feature M6. When the first special result becomes the termination trigger in the specific state, the second special result does not become the termination trigger in the specific state, and the second special result becomes the termination trigger in the specific state. If so, the configuration is such that the first special result does not become the termination trigger in the specific state,
The gaming machine according to feature M5, wherein the second special result is more likely to be set as the termination trigger than the first special result.

According to the above configuration, when one special result triggers the end of a specific state, the other special result does not trigger the end in that specific state, so multiple special results are set and the special result becomes the trigger. The case where a specific state ends as follows means that the special result of the side that did not trigger the end was not the special result of the side that caused the end in the first place, but the special result of the side that was unfortunate. In such a configuration, by using a configuration that uses the unfortunate special result to set the advantage of the next specific state, the feeling of loss due to the end of the specific state can be reduced, and the feeling of loss due to the end of the specific state can be reduced. It is possible to compensate by making the next specific state advantageous, or to further arouse a sense of regret by making the next specific state disadvantageous, and it becomes possible to successfully associate successive specific states.

Moreover, in the above configuration, since the second special result is more likely to be set as the termination trigger than the first special result, assuming that it is advantageous not to terminate the specific state, the first special result is more likely to be set as the termination trigger. can be said to be advantageous. Even though the first special result is on the advantageous side, if the specific state ends, then the specific state to be re-transferred will be better than if it ended with the second special result. It will be advantageous. By doing so, it becomes possible to successfully carry over the advantages and disadvantages of the first special result and the second special result to the next specific state.

Feature M7. The gaming machine according to feature M5 or feature M6, wherein the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the second special result is higher than the probability that the lottery result will be the first special result.

According to the above configuration, the first special result on the advantageous side is a result that is difficult to win in each game. In other words, this is a case where the specific state ends even though you won the advantageous first special result that is difficult to win, and you feel even more disappointed that the specific state ends with the first special result. The situation is unlikely. With such a configuration, the significance of compensating based on the advantage of the next specific state is increased.

Feature M8. The special result information is stored in the special storage means, and an erasing means (main controller 101 The gaming machine according to any one of features M2 to M7, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing a process of clearing a BB carryover flag when a BB win is achieved.

According to the above configuration, if a special result winning is established in a situation where the special result winning is carried over as special result information, the special result information is deleted. In this case, the specific setting means will not carry over the special result information at the end of the previous specific state to the next time. In this way, while it is possible to carry over the special result information across specific states, it is also possible to prevent it from being carried over, and whether or not it is carried over can be determined by the player's operation (success or failure of winning). ), it becomes possible to improve the gameplay in a specific state without obliterating the so-called real thrill of slot machines, such as winning a prize corresponding to the game result based on the player's operation.

Feature M9. In a situation where the special result information as the end trigger of the specific state is stored in the special storage means, the special result information corresponding to the special result information is stored before the transition to the next specific state occurs. If the symbol combination stops at the valid position, the special symbol combination corresponding to the special result information does not stop at the valid position before the transition to the next specific state occurs. , any one of features M2 to M8 characterized in that the next specific state is disadvantageous for the player (if a BB win is made in the normal section, the normal mode is set as a transition to the advantageous section in the BB state). 1. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to the above configuration, if the winning of the special result that triggered the end of the specific state is achieved before the transition to the next specific state, the next specific state will be more convenient for the player than if the winning is not achieved. be in a certain disadvantageous state. By doing so, it is possible to prevent special result winnings from being established in the normal state between the specific states, and it is possible to suitably implement a game in which specific states are associated with each other using the special result.

Feature M10. When the special symbol combination stops at the valid position, a special transition means capable of shifting the gaming state to a special state advantageous to the player (a function for executing processing to shift the gaming state to the BB state by the main controller 101) ) The gaming machine according to any one of features M2 to M9.

According to the above configuration, the special result in which the winning information is carried over to the next game or later becomes a so-called bonus in which winning results in a transition to a special state advantageous to the player. By using such a configuration, the excellent effects of feature M1 can be expected while making good use of the existing configuration.

Moreover, although it is considered that bonuses are basically in an advantageous state for the player, and that winnings should be made as early as possible, by purposefully carrying over the winnings without allowing players to win, information can be carried over between specific states. By making this possible, it becomes possible to realize novel gameplay that takes advantage of the psychology of players who want to win a prize quickly.

<Characteristics N group>
Feature N1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. functions) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a benefit granting means (a function for executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, it becomes possible to win the first operation result (first minor role), and when the stop operation means is operated in the first By operating in a second operation mode different from the operation mode, it is possible to win a second operation result (4th minor win to 27th minor win) that can give a profit different from the first operation result. The mode result (for example, press order bell) is set,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the mode result, a mode notification means (main control (a function of executing press order notification processing by the device 101);
As the gaming state, a specific state (advantageous section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means can be executed, and a normal state (normal section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is not executed,
If the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined special result and a special symbol combination corresponding to the special result is stopped at the valid position, the gaming state may be shifted to a special state advantageous to the player. possible special transition means (a function for executing bonus state processing by the main controller 101);
When the specific state shifts to the special state, it is possible to cause a specific event based on the mode notification by the mode notification means, which is an advantageous event for the player in the special state; When the normal state transitions to the special state, specifying means (main control (a function of executing processing for notifying the pressing order when the pressing order bell is won during the JAC carryover state by the device 101);
Equipped with
As the special result, a first special result (first BB) and a second special result (second BB) different from the first special result are set,
The special transition means changes the gaming state to the first special when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result and a first special symbol combination corresponding to the first special result is stopped at the valid position. state (first BB state), the lottery result by the lottery means is the second special result, and the second special symbol combination corresponding to the second special result is stopped at the valid position, the gaming state is configured to move to a second special state (second BB state),
If the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result and the stop operation means is operated at a timing at which the first special symbol combination cannot be stopped at the valid position, the first special symbol combination cannot be stopped at the effective position. A first stop control means (first BB by the main control device 101) that controls to stop a specific number (reach number) that is different from the symbol combination and does not stop if it is not the first special result. A function that executes the process of stopping the reach mark when winning),
If the lottery result by the lottery means is the second special result and the stop operation means is operated at a timing at which the second special symbol combination cannot be stopped at the valid position, the second special symbol combination cannot be stopped at the valid position. A second stop control means (a second stop control means by the main controller 101) that controls the normal number (missing number) that can be stopped even if the number is different from the picture combination and is not the second special result. A function that executes a process that prevents the reach mark from stopping when winning 2BB),
If the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result, the specific state is not ended, while if the lottery result by the lottery means is the second special result, the specific state is ended and the normal state (a function that executes a process of not ending the advantageous section in the first BB winning game but ending the advantageous section in the second BB winning game in the second section display process by the main control device 101);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the orbiting body is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the orbiting body is stopped as a stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the game based on the operation of the stop operation means, thereby responding to winning of the lottery result. In a so-called slot machine where a special benefit is given, a so-called bonus is set in which a player enters a special state upon winning, and the winning result differs depending on the manner in which the stopping operation means is stopped. In some cases, the mode notification regarding the mode of the stop operation is performed by a predetermined notification means, and the degree of advantage varies depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification, so it is possible to realize a game that combines the special state and the specific notification.
While mode notification is executed in a specific state, it is not executed in a normal state.If a transition occurs to a special state during a specific state, an advantageous specific event based on the mode notification may occur in the special state, but normally If the state shifts to the special state, specific events may not occur or are unlikely to occur. Therefore, if the state is to be shifted to the special state, it is more advantageous for the player to be in the specific state.

Here, in this gaming machine, if a special result is won during a specific state, the specific state may end.More specifically, if it is the first special result among the special results, the specific state does not end, but the second special result may end. If it is a special result, the specific state ends. Therefore, while making them expect to win a special result that makes it possible to transition to a special state during a specific state, they also make them expect that the special result will not become a second special result, and while in a specific state, It is possible to attract a great deal of interest in the type of special result to be won.

If you win the first special result, the specific roll as a so-called reach that does not stop before winning can be stopped, while if you win the second special result, the relevant reach will not stop. First, since the normal roll can stop, it is possible to understand that the first special result has been won and the specific state continues by the appearance of the specific roll. In other words, it is possible to recognize that the second special result has been won and the specific state has ended by the fact that the specific result does not appear. In this way, in the slot machine game of stopping each orbiting body by itself to obtain a bonus, a new game such as having the player judge whether a specific state continues or not based on the result of stopping each orbiting body can be created. This can be added to improve the interest of the game.

Feature N2. means for ending the specific state and transitioning to the normal state when the first special symbol combination stops at the valid position in a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result; The gaming machine according to feature N1, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing a process of ending the advantageous section when a winning is established in the first BB winning game in the second section display process by the main control device 101. .

According to the above configuration, even if the termination of the specific state is restricted based on the first special result winning, the specific state ends when the first special result winning is established in the first special result winning game. Therefore, in order to continue the specific state, it is necessary to win the first special result out of the first special result and the second special result, and to not make the first special result win in the game. By doing so, it becomes easier for the specific outcome to appear in the first special result winning game, and it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience that the specific outcome that has been prepared does not appear in the gameplay of feature N1.

Feature N3. If the lottery result of the lottery means is the second special result within a predetermined number of games after the special state ends, a restriction means (main controller 101 The gaming machine according to feature N1 or feature N2, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing a process of not ending an advantageous section in a second BB winning game in which the post-BB counter is 20 or less.

According to the above configuration, if the second special result is won within a predetermined number of games after the special state, the termination of the specific state is restricted. In other words, after the special state, if the number of games is within the predetermined number, the specific state will continue for both the first special result and the second special result, and if the number of games exceeds the predetermined number, the specific state will be changed based on the winning of the second special result. It may end. With such a configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not a specific state will continue or not based on successive wins of special results and addictive results, and it is possible to make the game more interesting by shifting to a special state during a specific state. It becomes possible to improve the

Feature N4. A predetermined transition means for transitioning to a predetermined state that continues for the predetermined number of games after the special state ends (a function that executes a process for transitioning to the RT state after the first BB state is completed by the main controller 101). ,
When the second special result is obtained in the specific state and the predetermined state, the limiting means limits the end of the specific state, while limiting the end of the specific state when the specific state is not the predetermined state. The gaming machine according to feature N3, characterized in that when the second special result is obtained, the end of the specific state is not restricted.

According to the above configuration, by using a predetermined state that is set after the special state ends and continues for a predetermined number of games, it is possible to manage whether or not the specific state ends when the second special result is won. . By doing so, it is not necessary to individually grasp the number of games after the special state, and it becomes possible to manage the continuity of the specific state with a relatively simple configuration.

The "predetermined state" is more specifically an "RT state in which the winning probability of the replay result can change."

Feature N5. According to feature N4, the predetermined transition means causes the device to transition to the predetermined state after the first special state ends, but does not cause the device to transition to the predetermined state after the second special state ends. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, since the predetermined state is set after the first special state, the end of the specific state based on the second special result winning is restricted for a predetermined number of games after that, while the second special state Since the predetermined state is not set after , the specific state ends with the second special result winning even if the number of games is within the predetermined number of games. In other words, the specific state ends when the second special result occurs twice in a row in the specific state. By doing this, in a game where you have fun deciding which special result will result, it is possible to significantly improve the fun of the game by using a relatively simple configuration such as a predetermined state that is set after the special state. becomes.

Feature N6. The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N5, wherein the first special state is more advantageous to the player than the second special state.

In the above configuration, winning the second special result is set to be disadvantageous for the player, even in terms of the advantages of the first special state and the second special state. By doing so, the difference in advantageousness between the first special result and the second special result becomes larger, and it becomes possible to attract greater interest in which special result will win.

Feature N7. In a game where the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, if the special symbol combination does not stop at the valid position, the special result remains the same until the special symbol combination stops at the valid position. A special storage means (a function for executing processing for setting the BB carryover flag by the main controller 101) capable of storing special result information (first BB carryover flag, second BB carryover flag) corresponding to the above,
In a situation where a predetermined transition permission condition (AT mode winning) is satisfied in the specific state, if the specific state is shifted to the special state, the specific event may occur in the special state. become,
In a situation where the transition permission condition is not satisfied in the specific state, when the specific state is transitioned to the special state, the specific event does not occur in the special state or the transition permission condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N6, characterized in that the specific event is less likely to occur than when the special state is transitioned to the special state.

According to the above configuration, even if a transition is made to a special state in a situation where transition permission conditions are not met, the specific event does not occur or is unlikely to occur during the special state, so until the transition permission conditions are met in the specific state. A gaming feature such as waiting for a special result winning prize is realized. In other words, after the second special result is won in a specific state and the specific state ends, the second special result is not established immediately, but after waiting for the transition to the specific state and the establishment of the transition permission conditions, the corresponding state is completed. This is a game feature in which, by achieving a second special result winning, you can receive benefits (specific events in the second special state) from the second special result. In this kind of gameplay, in a situation where you win the second special result, the specific number as a reach number does not stop, but only the normal number, so be aware that the second special result is carried over. To make it possible to wait for the transition to a specific state or the establishment of transition permission conditions while preventing the transition from occurring, and to suitably enhance the performance effect during the game by preventing notable points of the game from being dispersed.

Feature N8. When the special symbol combination stops at the valid position in a situation where the transition permission condition is not satisfied in the specific state, means for terminating the specific state (BB in the section display second process by the main controller 101) The gaming machine according to feature N7, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing processing for ending an advantageous section in a winning game.

According to the above configuration, even if the specific state is transitioned to the specific state after the specific state ends based on the second special result winning, if the second special result winning is established before the transition permission condition is satisfied, the specific state will be changed to the specific state. The state ends again. By doing so, it becomes possible to suitably play a game in which the player waits without winning a prize until the transfer permission condition is satisfied in a situation where the player has won a special result.

Feature N9. When transitioning to the specific state, the specific number (number of games) until the transition permission condition is satisfied is set by a predetermined number setting means (setting of the number of ceiling games by the main controller 101). functions) and
After transitioning to the specific state, establishing means for establishing the transition permission condition based on the specific number reaching the specific number (AT based on the ceiling counter by the main controller 101 becoming 0) A function that executes the process of setting the mode winning flag),
The gaming machine according to feature N8, comprising:

According to the above configuration, after the transition to a specific state, a specific number is set as the so-called ceiling number of games until the transition permission condition is satisfied, and when the ceiling number of games is reached, the transition permission condition is satisfied, so the transition permission condition is satisfied. Terminating the specific state by previously establishing a special result winning will lead to the ceiling number of games being reset. By doing so, it becomes possible to more suitably execute the gameplay of waiting for a special result winning prize until the transition permission condition is satisfied during the specific state.

<Characteristics Group O>
Feature O1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. functions) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a benefit granting means (a function for executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, it becomes possible to win the first operation result (first minor role), and when the stop operation means is operated in the first By operating in a second operation mode different from the operation mode, it is possible to win a second operation result (4th minor win to 27th minor win) that can give a profit different from the first operation result. The mode result (for example, press order bell) is set,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the mode result, a mode notification means (main control (a function of executing press order notification processing by the device 101);
As the gaming state, a specific state (advantageous section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means can be executed, and a normal state (normal section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is not executed,
If the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined special result and a special symbol combination corresponding to the special result is stopped at the valid position, the gaming state may be shifted to a special state advantageous to the player. possible special transition means (a function for executing bonus state processing by the main controller 101);
When the specific state shifts to the special state, it is possible to cause a specific event based on the mode notification by the mode notification means, which is an advantageous event for the player in the special state; When the normal state transitions to the special state, specifying means (main control (a function of executing processing for notifying the pressing order when the pressing order bell is won during the JAC carryover state by the device 101);
Equipped with
As a gaming state, there is a predetermined state (RT state) that is entered when a predetermined transition trigger (end of the first BB state) occurs and ends when a predetermined end trigger (20 games played) occurs. is set,
If the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result in the specific state but not the predetermined state, the specific state is ended, while the specific state is in the specific state and the predetermined state. If the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the special ending means does not end the particular state (in the second section display process by the main controller 101, the advantageous section is set in the BB winning game in the RT state). A gaming machine characterized by having a function of executing a process of ending an advantageous section in a second BB winning game during a normal gaming state, while not ending the advantageous section.

According to the above configuration, the orbiting body is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the orbiting body is stopped as a stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the game based on the operation of the stop operation means, thereby responding to winning of the lottery result. In a so-called slot machine where a special benefit is given, a so-called bonus is set in which a player enters a special state upon winning, and the winning result differs depending on the manner in which the stopping operation means is stopped. Mode notification regarding the mode of the stop operation may be performed by a predetermined notification means, and the degree of advantage varies depending on the presence or absence of mode notification, so it is possible to realize a game that combines special conditions and specific notification.

While mode notification is executed in a specific state, it is not executed in a normal state.If a transition occurs to a special state during a specific state, an advantageous specific event based on the mode notification may occur in the special state, but normally If the state shifts to the special state, specific events may not occur or are unlikely to occur. Therefore, if the state is to be shifted to the special state, it is more advantageous for the player to be in the specific state.

Here, in this gaming machine, if a special result is won during a specific state, the specific state may end.More specifically, if a special result is won during a predetermined state in a specific state, the specific state does not end; If a special result is obtained in a state other than the predetermined state, the specific state ends. Therefore, while making people expect to win a special result that can cause a transition to a special state during a specific state, it also makes them expect that the special result will occur during a predetermined state, and the special result that is won during a specific state It is possible to attract a great deal of attention to the timing of the game, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Feature O2. As the special result, a first special result (first BB) and a second special result (second BB) different from the first special result are set,
The special transition means changes the gaming state to the first special when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result and a first special symbol combination corresponding to the first special result is stopped at the valid position. state (first BB state), the lottery result by the lottery means is the second special result, and the second special symbol combination corresponding to the second special result is stopped at the valid position, the gaming state is configured to move to a second special state (second BB state),
If the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result and the stop operation means is operated at a timing at which the first special symbol combination cannot be stopped at the valid position, the first special symbol combination cannot be stopped at the effective position. A first stop control means (first BB by the main control device 101) that controls to stop a specific number (reach number) that is different from the symbol combination and does not stop if it is not the first special result. A function that executes the process of stopping the reach mark when winning),
If the lottery result by the lottery means is the second special result and the stop operation means is operated at a timing at which the second special symbol combination cannot be stopped at the valid position, the second special symbol combination cannot be stopped at the valid position. A second stop control means (a second stop control means by the main controller 101) that controls the normal number (missing number) that can be stopped even if the number is different from the picture combination and is not the second special result. A function that executes a process that prevents the reach mark from stopping when winning 2BB),
Equipped with
If the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result in the specific state and not the predetermined state, the specific termination means does not terminate the specific state, but terminates the lottery result by the lottery means. is the second special result, the specific state is ended and the state is shifted to the normal state,
In the specific state and in the predetermined state, the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result, and the stop operation is performed at a timing when the first special symbol combination cannot be stopped at the effective position. When the means is operated, a stop restriction means for restricting the specific rolled number from being stopped by the first stop control means (a process for preventing the main controller 101 from stopping the reach number during the RT state) The gaming machine according to feature O1, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of:

According to the above configuration, in a situation other than the predetermined state, the specific state does not end if it is the first special result among the special results, but the specific state ends if it is the second special result. Therefore, while making people expect to win a special result that makes it possible to transition to a special state during a specific state, if that special result becomes a second special result, it is expected that the special result will be in the predetermined state. If the situation is not in the predetermined state, the player can expect the first special result to be the first special result.

If you win the first special result, the specific roll as a so-called reach that does not stop before winning can be stopped, while if you win the second special result, the relevant reach will not stop. First, since the normal roll can stop, it is possible to understand that the first special result has been won and the specific state continues by the appearance of the specific roll. In other words, it is possible to recognize that the second special result has been won and the specific state has ended by the fact that the specific result does not appear.

In such a configuration, it is in a state other than the predetermined state that the first special result is achieved and the specific number rolled as a reach number stops. Therefore, without erasing the thrill of being in a predetermined state, such as winning a special result during a predetermined state and continuing the specific state, winning a special result in a state other than the predetermined state will cause the specific state to continue. It becomes possible to fully enjoy a game in which it is possible to understand by a specific result that it can be ended.

Feature O3. The game according to feature O2, wherein the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the first special result is set to be higher than the probability that the lottery result will be the second special result. Machine.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the first special result is easier to win than the second special result, the appearance of a specific number when the first special result is won in a predetermined state is restricted. By doing this, there is an increased chance that it will not be possible to determine which special result was obtained during a predetermined state based on the appearance or absence of a specific result, and the significance of having a configuration like feature O2 will be increased. .

Feature O4. The gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O3, wherein the transition trigger occurs when the special state ends.

According to the above configuration, even if the special result is won after the end of the special state and until the end condition is met, the specific state will not end. By doing so, the consecutiveness of the special state in the specific state can be realized with a relatively simple configuration such as the relationship between the predetermined state and whether or not the specific state ends.

Feature O5. As the special result, a first special result (first BB) and a second special result (second BB) different from the first special result are set,
The special transition means changes the gaming state to the first special when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result and a first special symbol combination corresponding to the first special result is stopped at the valid position. state (first BB state), the lottery result by the lottery means is the second special result, and the second special symbol combination corresponding to the second special result is stopped at the valid position, the gaming state is configured to move to a second special state (second BB state),
The transition trigger may occur when the first special state ends, but cannot occur when the second special state ends, or is less likely to occur when the first special state ends. The gaming machine described in feature O4.

According to the above configuration, since the predetermined state is set after the first special state, the end of the specific state based on the special result winning is restricted after that until the end condition is met, while after the second special state Since this is not set to a predetermined state, the specific state ends after that when the special result is won. In other words, when a second special result is obtained in a specific state, after the second special state based on the second special result, the specific state can be ended with the next special result winning. By doing this, in a game where you have fun deciding which special result will result, it is possible to significantly improve the fun of the game by using a relatively simple configuration such as a predetermined state that is set after the special state. becomes.

Feature O6. As the lottery result by the lottery means, a replay result is set in which the bonus granting means grants a replay that allows the next game to be played without requiring new game media;
The gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O5, wherein the predetermined state is a re-gaming state in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the predetermined re-gaming result is different from the normal gaming state.

According to the above configuration, by using a relatively simple configuration such as a re-gaming state as a so-called RT state where the winning probability of the re-gaming result is different from the normal gaming state, the continuation of the specific state when the special result is won in the specific state. It becomes possible to set the gender.

Note that it is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in the respective configurations of other feature A groups to feature O groups to each of the configurations of feature A groups to feature O groups described in detail above. However, it is also possible to apply the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above-mentioned features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: an operating means operated by a player, a game ball firing means that fires a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball path that guides the fired game ball to a predetermined gaming area, A game machine comprising game parts arranged within a region, and giving a bonus to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage part of each game part.

Reel-type gaming machines such as slot machines: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displays the symbol row at a final stop, and the symbols begin to fluctuate due to the operation of the starting operation means. A special game that is advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the stopping operation means or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-using belt-type gaming machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displays the symbol row as a final stop; A special gaming state (bonus game, etc.), and further includes a throwing device that is provided with a ball tray and performs a throwing process of taking in game balls from the ball tray, and a putting device that puts out game balls to the ball tray. A game machine configured such that the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when a game ball is thrown into the game machine.

10... Slot machine as a gaming machine, 32... Reel as a rotating body, 41... Start lever as a start operation means, 42-44... Stop switch as a stop operation means, 64... Speaker forming an auxiliary performance section, 65 ... Auxiliary display part constituting an auxiliary production part, 68... Instruction monitor, N8... Eighth display segment as a section indicator, 81... Display control device as a sub control board, 101... Main control device as a main control board , 102... A CPU that constitutes various control means such as a lottery means and a main control means.

Claims (1)

a plurality of orbiting bodies with plural kinds of patterns attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a starting operation means that, when operated, causes each of the orbiting bodies to start orbiting;
a lottery means that performs a lottery to decide whether or not to give a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
a stop operation means that stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
drive control means for causing each of the orbiting bodies to start orbiting when the start operation means is operated and for stopping the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result when the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
Certain conditions are set that are advantageous to the player.
As the lottery result by the said lottery means,
a first result in which a first pattern combination can be stopped when the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode;
a second result in which a second pattern combination different from the first pattern combination can be stopped when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode;
has
means capable of performing storage processing of specific information based on a predetermined setting trigger in the specific state;
In the specific game in the specific state, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result and first specific information corresponding to the first result is stored as the specific information, the specific state is continued. a means capable of executing the process of
Even if the first specific information is stored as the specific information, if the lottery result by the lottery means in the specific game is the second result, processing for terminating the specific state can be executed. means and
In the specific game, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the second result and second specific information corresponding to the second result is stored as the specific information, processing to continue the specific state. executable means and
Even if the second specific information is stored as the specific information, if the lottery result by the lottery means in the specific game is the first result, processing for terminating the specific state can be executed. means and
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined setting opportunity occurs in a game before the specific game .

Images